department of transportation - south...

Department of Transportation Office of Project Development 700 E Broadway Avenue Pierre, South Dakota 57501-2586 605/773-3268 FAX: 605/773-2614

February 14, 2018 ADDENDUM NO. 1

RE: Item #4, February 21, 2018 Letting - P 1358(04), PCN 05JD, Minnehaha County - Grading, landscaping, Shared Use Path, Structures, Lighting, Trailhead

TO WHOM IT MAY CONCERN: The following addenda to the plans shall be inserted and made a part of your proposal for the referenced project. SPECIAL PROVISIONS: Please remove the Special Provisions checklist and replace with

attached Special Provisions checklist revised 2/14/18.

Please add the “Special Provision for Contract Time”, dated 2/5/18 before the “Special Provision for Subletting of Contract”, dated 1/5/18”. Please place the “Rotary Park Project Manual” after the “Special Provision for Contractor Staking”, dated 1/9/18.

BID ITEM FILE: Bidders must log in to retrieve the addendum bid item file that must be loaded into the SDEBS to incorporate the revisions listed here.

Bid Items were added: Bid Item 451E7020 “Sewer Bypass Pumping” Bid Items were removed: Bid Item 633E1440 “Pavement Marking Paint, Area”

PLANS: Please destroy sheets 2, 6, and 7 and replace with the enclosed sheets, dated 2/6/18

and 2/14/18.

Sheet 2: In PARTICIPATING BID ITEMS – SITE WORK table, Bid Items were removed: Bid Item 633E1440 “Pavement Marking Paint, Area” In NON-PARTICIPATING BID ITEMS table,

Bid Items were added: Bid Item 451E7020 “Sewer Bypass Pumping”

Sheet 6: CONSTRUCTION PHASING AND SEQUENCING Phase 2 – Pedestrian

Bridge note was revised. Sheet 7: SEWER BYPASS PUMPING PLAN note was added.

Connecting South Dakota and the Nation

Sincerely, Sam Weisgram Engineering Supervisor SW/cj CC: Craig Smith, Mitchell Region Engineer Travis Dressen, Sioux Falls Area Engineer

REV. 2/14/18

INDEX OF SPECIAL PROVISIONS PROJECT NUMBER(S): P 1358(04) PCN: 05JD TYPE OF WORK: GRADING, LANDSCAPING, SHARED USE PATH, STRUCTURES,

LIGHTING, TRAILHEAD COUNTY: MINNEHAHA The following clauses have been prepared subsequent to the Standard Specifications for Roads and Bridges and refer only to the above described improvement, for which the following Proposal is made. The Contractor’s attention is directed to the need for securing from the Department of Environment & Natural Resources, Foss Building, Pierre, South Dakota, permission to remove water from public sources (lakes, rivers, streams, etc.). The Contractor should make his request as early as possible after receiving his contract, and insofar as possible at least 30 days prior to the date that the water is to be used. Greg Johnson is the official in charge of the Sioux Falls Career Center for Minnehaha County. THE FOLLOWING ITEMS ARE INCLUDED IN THIS PROPOSAL FORM: Special Provision for Contract Time, dated 2/5/18. Special Provision for Subletting of Contract, dated 1/5/18. Special Provision Regarding Section 404 of the Clean Water Act, dated 1/9/18. Fact Sheet #23. Special Provision for Construction Practices in Streams Inhabited by the Topeka Shiner,

dated 5/10/10. Special Provision for Contractor Staking, dated 1/9/18. Rotary Park Project Manual. Special Provision for Contractor Administered Preconstruction Meeting, dated 3/15/16. Fuel Adjustment Affidavit, DOT form 208 dated 7/15. Standard Title VI Assurance, dated 3/1/16. Special Provision For Disadvantaged Business Enterprise, dated 5/20/15. Special Provision For EEO Affirmative Action Requirements on Federal and Federal-aid

Construction Contracts, dated 9/1/97. Special Provision For Required Contract Provisions Federal-aid Construction Contracts, Form

FHWA 1273 (Rev. May/1/12), dated 4/30/13.

Required Contract Provisions Federal-aid Construction Contracts, Form FHWA 1273 (Rev. 5/1/12).

Special Provision for Cargo Preference Act, dated 1/20/16. Special Provision Regarding Minimum Wage on Federal-Aid Projects, dated 4/30/13. Wage and Hour Division US Department of Labor Washington DC.

- US Dept. of Labor Decision Number SD150001, dated 10/9/15. Special Provision for Supplemental Specifications to 2015 Standard Specifications for Roads

and Bridges, dated 6/1/16. Special Provision for Errata to 2015 Standard Specifications for Roads and Bridges, dated 6/1/16. Special Provision for Price Schedule for Miscellaneous Items, dated 10/14/15. Special Provision Regarding Storm Water Discharge, dated 5/3/13. General Permit for Storm Water Discharges Associated with Construction

Activities, dated 2/1/10. http://denr.sd.gov/des/sw/IPermits/ConstructionGeneralPermit2010.pdf

http://denr.sd.gov/des/sw/IPermits/ConstructionGeneralPermit2010.pdf

STATE OF SOUTH DAKOTADEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION

SPECIAL PROVISIONFOR

CONTRACT TIME

PROJECT P 1358(04); PCN 05JDMINNEHAHA COUNTY

FEBURARY 5, 2018

Field Work Completion

The Contractor will complete the project by the October 5, 2018 field work completion date.

East Big Sioux River Interim Completion Requirement

In addition, the Contractor will complete all work in the east Big Sioux River bike path portion of the project by the September 1, 2018 interim completion date.

If the Contractor does not complete the work by the interim completion requirement, the Department will make a disincentive assessment in the amount of $500 per calendar day. The Department will count calendar days in accordance with Section 8.6 B.

Sioux Falls Marathon Restrictions

In the case of delayed interim completion, the Contractor will open the bike path on the east side of the Big Sioux River to unimpeded pedestrian and bike traffic and the Department will not allow work on the project from September 8, 2018 to September 9, 2018 (inclusive) due to the Sioux Falls Marathon.

The Contractor will not expose pedestrian or bike traffic to differential elevations in traveling lanes during this timeframe. The Department will not allow uneven lanes, loose gravel, unmarked lanes, or shoulder drop offs during this timeframe. The Contractor will pave all transitions for a smooth ride as approved by the Engineer.

The Department will make a disincentive assessment in the amount of $500 per calendar day for the Contractor’s failure to comply with the Sioux Falls Marathon restrictions. The Department will not grant time extensions for the Sioux Falls Marathon restrictions for any reason.

Failure to Complete on Time

The Contractor will complete all work on the project prior to the field work completion requirement. If the Contractor does not complete all work by the field work completion requirement, the Department will assess liquidated damages in accordance with Section 8.8. The Department will assess liquidated damages for each working day the work (project) is late until the Contractor completes all field work.

In the event the Contractor does not complete all field work on time, the Department will count working days in accordance with Section 8.6 C.

Expected Adverse Weather Days

The Department has provided Attachment 1 for information purposes only as a guide to bidders. This table depicts the typical number of adverse weather days expected for any given month, based on historical records. The Department will consider this project a grading project in Zone 6.

The Department will consider expected adverse weather days cumulative in nature over the time period when the Contractor is actively pursuing completion of the work. The Department will not consider adverse weather days during an extended period of time when the Contractor is not pursuing completion of the work. When considering a time extension for interim completion, or field work completion of the project, the Engineer will compare the total number of expected adverse weather days against the total number of actual adverse weather days for the time period during which the work was being completed.

* * * * *

ATTACHMENT 1

Figure A - Expected Adverse Weather Days for South Dakota

Table 1 - Expected Adverse Weather Days for South Dakota

Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4 Zone 5 Zone 6 Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4 Zone 5 Zone 6Jan 18 18 16 16 22 24 18 18 15 16 21 23Feb 19 18 12 14 19 21 19 18 12 14 19 21Mar 12 10 9 8 11 13 12 10 9 8 10 12Apr 6 5 8 5 6 6 5 4 6 4 4 4May 6 6 8 6 6 6 5 5 6 4 4 5Jun 7 6 7 6 7 8 5 5 5 4 5 6Jul 5 5 6 5 6 7 4 4 5 3 4 5

Aug 4 4 5 4 5 6 3 3 4 3 4 4Sep 3 3 4 3 4 5 2 2 3 2 3 4Oct 4 3 5 3 4 4 3 3 4 2 3 3Nov 11 9 8 7 10 12 11 9 8 7 10 11Dec 21 19 15 14 20 22 21 19 15 14 20 22

Grading Projects Surfacing and Structural Projects

NOTE: Includes Holidays and Weekends.

Project P 1538(04) I229 and 26th Street - Rotary Park Improvements, Sioux Falls, South Dakota October 6, 2017

LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT CIVIL ENGINEER

ARCHITECT ELECTRICAL ENGINEER

MECHANICAL ENGINEER

ROTARY PARK PROJECT MANUAL


TABLE OF CONTENTS

SPECIAL PROVISIONS Special Provisions for Trenchless Construction

SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION 03: CONCRETE 033000 Cast-In-Place Concrete

DIVISION 04: MASONRY 042000 Unit Masonry 047200 Cast Stone Masonry

DIVISION 05: METALS 055000 Metal Fabrications

DIVISION 06: WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 061000 Rough Carpentry 061600 Sheathing 061753 Shop-Fabricated Wood Trusses 062013 Exterior Finish Carpentry

DIVISION 07: THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 074113 Metal Roof Panels 076200 Sheet Metal Flashing & Trim 079200 Joint Sealants

DIVISION 08: OPENINGS 081113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 089119 Fixed Louvers

DIVISION 09: FINISHES 096723 Resinous Flooring 097700 Special Ceiling Surfacing 099600 High Performance Coatings

DIVISION 10: SPECIALTIES 101400 Signage 102113 Solid Plastic Toilet Compartments 102800 Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories

DIVISION 11: EQUIPMENT 116800 Play Field Equipment & Structures


DIVISION 22: PLUMBING AND HEATING HYDRONICS

220100 General Provisions 220400 Plumbing 220700 Insulation and Piping Identification DIVISION 23: HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING 230100 General Provisions 230800 Ventilation and Air Conditioning DIVISION 22: CIVIL/PLUMBING 221343 Duplex Grinder Pump Lift Stations DIVISION 26: ELECTRICAL 260100 Common Electrical Requirements 260500 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 260600 Grounding and Bonding 261200 Conductors and Cables 261300 Raceways and Boxes 261400 Wiring Devices 261450 Lighting Control Devices 264420 Panelboards 265110 Lighting

DIVISION 32: EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 321816 Playground Protective Surfacing

APPENDIX Geotechnical Explorations Report – GeoTek #17-539 Report of Foundation Investigation - SD DOT Wetland Delineation Report - HDR

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

City of Sioux Falls

Special Provisions

for

Trenchless Construction

City of Sioux Falls Public Works/Engineering 224 West Ninth Street P.O. Box 7402 Sioux Falls, SD 57117-7402

i 07/2015

1.0 GENERAL .......................................................................................................... 1 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK ............................................................................................ 1 1.2 TERM OF WARRANTY ...................................................................................... 1 1.3 QUALITY CONTROL AND SUBMITTALS ......................................................... 1 1.4 EXISTING SITE CONDITIONS .......................................................................... 2 1.5 PAYMENT .......................................................................................................... 2 1.6 ACCEPTANCE ................................................................................................... 2

2.0 MATERIALS ...................................................................................................... 3 2.1 CARRIER PIPE .................................................................................................. 3 2.2 CASING PIPE .................................................................................................... 6 2.3 CASING END SEAL ........................................................................................... 7 2.4 CASING SPACERS ........................................................................................... 7 2.5 TRACER WIRE .................................................................................................. 8 2.6 CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH MATERIAL .................................................. 9

3.0 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS .............................................................. 10 3.1 ALIGNMENT AND GRADE .............................................................................. 10 3.2 EXCAVATION PITS ......................................................................................... 10 3.3 TRENCHLESS INSTALLATION ....................................................................... 10 3.4 AUGER BORING (JACK AND BORE) ............................................................. 11 3.5 DIRECTIONAL DRILLING ................................................................................ 11 3.6 OPEN-ENDED PIPE RAMMING ...................................................................... 14 3.7 MICROTUNNELING ........................................................................................ 15

4.0 METHOD OF MEASURMENT AND BASIS OF PAYMENT ............................ 16 4.1 TRENCHLESS CONSTRUCTION ................................................................... 16 4.2 CARRIER PIPE ................................................................................................ 16 4.3 CASING PIPE .................................................................................................. 16 4.4 BORE OBSTRUCTION .................................................................................... 16 4.5 CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH MATERIAL ................................................ 17

1 07/2015

City of Sioux Falls Special Provisions

for Trenchless Construction

1.0 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK The Contractor shall furnish all the necessary labor, materials, equipment, tools, and supplies that are necessary to complete the trenchless construction, as shown on the plans and/or called for in these specifications or its addenda. It is the intent of these specifications to install a complete system or job. 1.2 TERM OF WARRANTY Reference Section 500—Warranty for Construction Activity. 1.3 QUALITY CONTROL AND SUBMITTALS The Contractor or Supplier shall submit appropriate documentation for products and construction methods not listed in these specifications to the Engineer for approval. This documentation must be provided no later than seven days prior to bid opening. No consideration will be made by the Engineer or City for documentation submitted after this date. Shop drawings and data shall be submitted for, but not be limited to, the following items:

Proposed installation method and equipment, carrier pipe, casing pipe, casing spacers, casing end seal, controlled low strength material and any other pertinent information concerning construction materials that the Engineer deems necessary for the review of the materials used on the project in accordance with the specifications and drawings.

The Contractor shall submit the number of copies that the Contractor requires plus three copies that the Engineer will retain. The Contractor shall obtain shop drawing approval before any of the work related to that material is performed or any materials are ordered. All personnel shall be fully trained in their respective duties as part of the trenchless construction crew and in safety.

2 07/2015

The Contractor shall submit a work plan two weeks prior to commencing construction activities. At a minimum the work plan shall include trenchless method selected, bore pit size and locations, bore dimensions and locations, daily work hours and working dates. The plan shall also include a project safety and contingency plan for drilling fluid containment and cleanup. 1.4 EXISTING SITE CONDITIONS The Contractor shall examine the project site and contract documents for the work contemplated. On request, Owner will provide Contractor access to the Site to conduct such examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, and studies as Contractor deems necessary for submission of a Bid. Contractor shall fill all holes, clean up and restore the Site to its former condition upon completion of such explorations, investigations, tests, and studies. Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations relative to excavation and utility locates. Submission of a bid will be considered conclusive evidence that the Contractor has investigated and is satisfied as to the site conditions to be encountered including, but not limited to, the soil types and water table depths.

Any boring logs that were completed for the areas of trenchless construction are included in the plans and specifications. It is understood that such information was obtained and is intended for design and estimating purposes. Its accuracy is not guaranteed. It is made available to Contractors so they may have access to identical subsurface information available to the City. It is not intended as a substitute for personal investigation, interpretations, or judgment of the Contractors as ultimately, the Contractor shall be responsible for the utility installation. The City will not be financially responsible for any changes or differences in the soil conditions or water table depths from the boring logs or records of subsurface investigations provided in the contract documents. Additional payment will not be made to the Contractor in the event site conditions require the Contractor to change their trenchless construction methods.

1.5 PAYMENT Payments to the Contractor shall be made in accordance with the General Conditions and Section 4 of this special provision. 1.6 ACCEPTANCE Acceptance of the work shall be in accordance with the General Conditions.

3 07/2015

2.0 MATERIALS 2.1 CARRIER PIPE Carrier pipe shall be of the material and size as required below. All water distribution materials shall meet NSF/ANSI Standard 61—Drinking Water System Components, Health Effects and NSF/ANSI 61 Annex G, NSF/ANSI 372.

A. Water Main Pipe: (non-restrained and restrained joint): Reference Section 300 Supplemental Standard Specifications for Water Main Construction

B. Fusible PVC Water Main Pipe: Fusible polyvinylchloride material shall conform to AWWA C900 or C905, ASTM D1784, DR 18, 235 psi and cell classification 12454. Compound formulation shall be in accordance with PPI TR-2/2006. Provide size and pressure class as shown on the drawings equal to connecting pipelines. Fusible PVC pipe shall be allowed for 16 inch and smaller water main. Pipe shall be manufactured with 100% virgin resin. Pipe shall also have 0% recycled plastics content, and shall not consist of any rework compound, even that obtained from the manufacturer’s own production using the same formulation. Fusible polyvinylchloride pipe shall be extruded with plain ends. The ends shall be square to the pipe and free of any bevel or chamfer. There shall be no bell or gasket of any kind incorporated into the pipe, unless specified otherwise on the drawings. Fusible polyvinylchloride pipe shall be manufactured in a standard 20’, 30’, 40’, or 45’ nominal lengths. Fusible polyvinylchloride pipe shall be blue in color indicating potable water. Pipe shall be marked per AWWA C900 or AWWA C905, and shall include as a minimum: nominal size, dimension ratio, standard dimension ratio or schedule, AWWA pressure class or rating, AWWA standard designation number, NSF-61 mark verifying suitability for potable water service, extrusion production-record code, trademark or trade name, cell classification 12454 and/or PVC material code 1120 may also be include. Pipe shall be homogeneous throughout and be free of visible cracks, holes, foreign material, blisters, or other deleterious faults. Fittings for fusible PVC pipe shall conform to Section 300 Supplemental Standard Specifications for Water Main Construction.

4 07/2015

The fusion technician shall be fully qualified by the pipe supplier to install fusible PVC pipe of the types and sizes being used. Qualifications shall be current for the date of installation. Each fusion joint shall be recorded and logged by an electronic monitoring device connected to the fusion machine. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer a copy of fusion data log and joint reports.

C. HDPE Water Main: Pipe shall be manufactured from a PE 4710 resin listed with the Plastic Pipe Institute (PPI) as TR-4. The resin material shall meet the specifications of ASTM D3350 with a minimum cell classification of PE445574C. Pipe shall be DR 9, 250 psi ductile iron pipe sizes (DIPS). Pipe shall have a manufacturing standard of ASTM D3350 and be manufactured by an ISO 9001 certified manufacturer. The pipe shall contain no recycled compounds except that generated in the manufacturer’s own plant from resin of the same specification from the same raw material. The pipe shall be homogeneous throughout and free of visible cracks, holes, foreign inclusions, voids, or other injurious defects. Fittings: Butt fusion fittings shall be in accordance with ASTM D3261 and shall be manufactured by injection molding, a combination of extrusion and machining, or fabricated from HDPE pipe conforming to this specification. All fittings shall be pressure rated to provide a working pressure rating no less than that of the pipe. The fitting shall be homogeneous throughout and free of visible cracks, holes, foreign inclusions, voids, or other injurious defects. Electrofusion fittings shall be PE4710 HDPE, Cell Classification of 445574C as determined by ASTM D3350 and be the same base resin as the pipe. Electrofusion fittings shall have a manufacturing standard of ASTM F1055. Flanged and mechanical joint adapters shall be PE 4710 HDPE, Cell Classification of 445574C as determined by ASTM D3350 and be the same base resin as the pipe. Flanged and mechanical joint adapters shall have a manufacturing standard of ASTM D3261. All adapters shall be pressure rated to provide a working pressure rating no less than that of the pipe. All joints shall be restrained. Mechanical restraint for HDPE may be provided by mechanical means separate from the mechanical joint gasket sealing gland. The restrainer shall provide wide, supportive contact around the full circumference of the pipe and be equal to the listed widths. Means of restraint shall be machined serrations on the inside surface of the restrainer. Loading of the restrainer shall be by a ductile iron follower that provides even circumferential loading over the entire restrainer. Design shall be such that restraint shall be increased with increases in line pressure.

5 07/2015

Serrated restrainer shall be ductile iron ASTM A536 with a ductile iron follower; bolts, nuts and rod shall be stainless steel. The restrainer shall have a pressure rating of, or equal to that of the pipe on which it is used. Restrainers shall be JCM Industries, Sur-Grip, or prebid approved equal. Pipe stiffeners shall be used in conjunction with restrainers. The pipe stiffeners shall be designed to support the interior wall of the HDPE. The stiffeners shall support the pipe’s end and control the “necking down” reaction to the pressure applied during normal installation. The pipe stiffeners shall be formed of 316 stainless steel to the HDPE manufacturers published average inside diameter of the specific size and DR of the HDPE. Stiffeners shall be by JCM Industries or prebid approved equal. Butt Fusion: Sections of polyethylene pipe shall be joined into continuous lengths on the jobsite above ground. The joining method shall be the butt fusion method and shall be performed in strict accordance with the pipe manufacturer’s recommendations. The butt fusion equipment used in the joining procedures should be capable of meeting all conditions recommended by the pipe manufacturer, including, but not limited to, temperature requirements of 400 degrees Fahrenheit, alignment, and an interfacial fusion pressure of 75 PSI. The butt fusion joining will produce a joint weld strength equal to or greater than the tensile strength of the pipe itself. Temperature, fusion pressure and a graphic representation of the fusion cycle shall be part of the quality control records. Provide pressure rated HDPE MJ Adapters for connections between HDPE and PVC pipe sections. Other: Socket fusion, hot gas fusion, threading, solvents, and epoxies may not be used to join HDPE pipe. Transitions shall be completed without exceeding the manufacturer’s maximum joint deflection or bending radius. The Contractor shall consult the pipe manufacturer to determine if any relaxation period is necessary prior to installing fittings and making any connections. Personnel performing HDPE fusion joining must be trained and competent in the implementation of the heat-fusion joining procedure and must be qualified by either the pipe manufacturer or the manufacturer’s representative.

D. Gravity sanitary sewer pipe with casing: Reference Section 100 – Sanitary Sewer Construction.

E. Gravity sanitary sewer pipe without casing: Reference Section 100 – Sanitary Sewer Construction. Fusible PVC pipe in Section 2.1B green in color for

6 07/2015

gravity sewer and HDPE pipe in Section 2.1C are also acceptable materials. The inside of the fusible PVC and HDPE shall be de-beaded.

F. Sanitary sewer force main: Reference Section 100 – Sanitary Sewer Construction. Fusible PVC pipe in Section 2.1B green in color for force main and HDPE pipe in Section 2.1C are also acceptable materials.

G. Storm sewer pipe: Reference Section 200 – Storm Sewer Construction.

2.2 CASING PIPE Steel casing pipe shall be new pipe material meeting ASTM A 53, Type S, Grade B. Casing pipe under highways, railroad tracks and for 30” casing and larger shall have a minimum wall thickness of 0.375” unless otherwise specified in the plans. All other locations shall have a minimum wall thickness of 0.25” unless the SD DOT or railroad authority requires a greater thickness. Casing pipe shall be ASTM A53, double submerged arc welded, rolled and welded or seamless. Welded joints shall have full penetrating welds.

PVC casing pipe shall meet the requirements of restrained joint PVC in Section 2.1. HDPE casing pipe shall meet the requirements of HDPE water main in Section 2.1. The interior of all fused casing pipes shall have the bead removed. Steel casing shall be required for all auger boring/jack and bore or open-ended pipe ramming installations. Casing material shall be PVC, HDPE or steel as required on Plans for directional drilling or microtunneling. Casing material shall be steel for all railroad crossings.

7 07/2015

The casing size shall be as specified in the plans. If the casing size is not specified then the minimum diameter shall be as specified in the table below:

C900 Water Main C905 Water Main HDPE 4710 D.I.P.S. SDR 35 Sewer Main RCPCasing Size Casing Size Casing Size Casing Size Casing Size

(in) (in) (in) (in) (in) (in)4 8 8 86 12 10 108 14 12 12

10 16 14 1412 20 16 16 2414 24 1815 20 2616 24 2018 28 24 3020 30 2421 3624 36 28 3827 4230 42 36 4833 5136 42 54

Carrier Pipe Size

2.3 CASING END SEAL Full conical-shaped wraparound seals made of 1/8-inch-thick neoprene rubber shall be provided for each end of the casing pipe. T-304 stainless steel banding straps with a 100 percent nonmagnetic worm gear mechanism and pressure sensitive butyl mastic strips shall be provided to seal edges. End seals shall be model AW Wraparound casing end seals as manufactured by Advance Products & Systems, Inc., Lafayette, LA, model ESW as manufactured by CCI Pipeline Systems or a prebid approved equal. 2.4 CASING SPACERS Casing spacers shall be constructed of circular T-304 stainless steel segments, which bolt together forming a shell around the carrier pipe. The spacers shall be designed with risers (when needed) and runners to support and center the carrier pipe within the casing pipe and maintain a minimum clearance of 1 inch between the casing pipe inside diameter (ID) and the spacer outside diameter (OD). On carrier pipes with an OD of 16 inches or less, each spacer shall have four riser/runner combinations—two on each half. On carrier pipes with an OD of 20 inches and greater, the number of riser/runner combinations shall be as recommended by the manufacturer, with four being the minimum. T-304 stainless steel bolts and nuts shall be supplied with the spacers. The shells for carrier pipes with a nominal pipe diameters ranging from 4” – 24” shall be manufactured of 8-inch wide 14-gauge T-304 stainless steel. The riser shall be

8 07/2015

constructed of 10-gauge T-304 stainless steel with a minimum length of 6-inch long. Abrasion-resistant runners shall have a minimum length of 7 inches. The height of the runner shall be limited to 1” greater than the bell outside diameter.

The shells for carrier pipes with nominal pipe diameters larger than 24” shall be manufactured of 12-inch wide 14-gauge T-304 stainless steel. The riser shall be constructed of 10-gauge T-304 stainless steel with a minimum length of 10-inch long. Abrasion-resistant runners shall have a minimum length of 11 inches. The height of the runner shall be limited to 1” greater than the bell outside diameter.

Abrasion-resistant runners shall be a minimum width of 2 inches, shall be attached to each riser to minimize friction between the casing pipe and the carrier pipe as it is installed. Runner material shall be of glass filled polymer plastic with the following minimum properties: compression strength of 25,000 psi, flexural strength of 32,000 psi, and tensile strength of 22,000 psi. The ends of all runners shall be beveled to facilitate installation over rough weld beads or the welded ends of misaligned or deformed casing pipe.

Interior surfaces of the stainless steel shell shall be lined with EPDM having a minimum thickness of 0.090 inches with a hardness of durometer “A” 85-90. Placement of the spacers shall be a maximum of one foot on each side of the bell joint and one every 6–8 feet minimum thereafter unless otherwise specified. Casing spacers shall be Model SSI as manufactured by Advance Products & Systems, Inc., Lafayette, LA, model CSS manufactured by CCI Pipeline Systems or a prebid approved equal. 2.5 TRACER WIRE The components of the tracer wire system for water mains and sanitary force main carrier pipe installed with casing pipe shall be per Section 100 – Sanitary Sewer Construction and Section 300 Water Main Construction of the City of Sioux Falls Supplemental Standard Specifications. The tracer wire shall be installed with the carrier pipe and tested for conductivity. Tracer wire for water main shall be blue in color and tracer wire for sanitary sewer shall be green in color. The tracer wire for carrier pipe that is installed without a casing pipe shall be 12 gauge tracer wire with 45 mil HMCO-HDPE jacket, rated for direct burial at 30 volts and minimum 1,150 pound break load. Tracer wire shall be Pro-Trace HDD-CCS PE 45 directional drilling tracer wire, Copperhead SoloShot-EHS or prebid approved equal.

9 07/2015

2.6 CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH MATERIAL Controlled low strength material (CLSM) shall be used as required in the plans. The CLSM shall be a mixture of cementitious material and water with or without aggregate proportioned to produce a pourable consistency without segregation of the constituents. The CLSM may contain fly ash. The 28-day compressive strength shall be a maximum of 100 psi.

10 07/2015

3.0 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS No work shall commence until the design and construction procedure has been reviewed in writing by the Engineer. The entire trenchless path shall be reviewed in the field prior to starting. All existing underground utilities shall be marked and identified in the field prior to starting. 3.1 ALIGNMENT AND GRADE The Engineer will provide stakes for alignment and grade at the surface within 48 hours of notification. The Contractor shall carry line and grade into the trench by means of approved survey methods. At no time shall the Contractor or his employees change the grade without being reviewed by the Engineer. If underground interference is encountered at the assigned grade, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer for alternate alignment. The Engineer shall be allowed to access both ends of the pipe after it is installed to visually inspect the line and grade. Unless specified otherwise in the plans, the allowable tolerance for sanitary sewer and storm sewer shall be ±2 inches of proposed line and grade vertically and horizontally and such that at no point does it hold water. The allowable tolerance for water main and force main shall be ±6 inches (vertically and horizontally) unless specified otherwise in the plans. If tolerances are not met, the Contractor will be allowed to use casing spacers of varying heights to correct the grade. Minimum cover requirements shall be maintained at all times. 3.2 EXCAVATION PITS Access pits shall be large enough to accommodate the installation of equipment and the pipe but shall not be excessive in order to reduce disturbance to the surrounding area. The Contractor shall provide necessary sheeting and shoring to prevent movement of the existing pavement, soil, utilities or structures outside of the excavation. The pits shall conform to applicable OSHA Standards. Existing structures and other permanent objects shall be protected by the Contractor. Any damage to these objects shall be repaired by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.3 TRENCHLESS INSTALLATION

The Contractor shall be responsible for monitoring ground movements associated with the work and making appropriate changes in the construction methods to control ground movements and prevent damage to the project, neighboring structures and pavements. The Contractor shall bore under existing utilities as required to maintain or exceed minimum cover. Transition to vertical runs or change in depth shall be accomplished

11 07/2015

without exceeding the maximum bending radius recommended by the pipe manufacturer. Transition to mainline pipe shall be accomplished without exceeding the maximum bending radius recommended by the pipe manufacturer. Pipe shall be extended as necessary to provide a smooth transition to mainline pipe. Rigid caps shall be installed on the ends of the carrier pipe to keep inside of pipe clean until connected to mainline pipe. The depth of the crossing shall be verified by the electronic guidance system that is used for the trenchless technology. The Engineer may request the Contractor excavate the pipe if the accuracy of the electronic guidance system is being questioned. The Contractor shall contact the Engineer immediately if rock/obstruction is encountered and the trenchless construction process needs to stop. The Contractor shall have the option to remove the rock or abandon the casing. If the casing pipe is abandoned then it should be filled with controlled low strength material.

3.4 AUGER BORING (JACK AND BORE)

A method that utilizes a rotating cutting head to form the bore hole and a series of rotating augers inside a casing pipe to remove the spoil. Casing pipe shall be required for all installations. The Contractor shall verify the casing pipe wall thickness is adequate for the anticipated jacking loads. The auger boring machine shall be capable of steering the casing pipe to ensure the tolerances can be met. The first section of pipe shall have a jacking head that is securely anchored to prevent wobble or variations in alignment during the operation. The driving end of the pipe and intermediate joints shall be protected from damage. Any sections of casing pipe that are damaged shall be replaced. The casing pipe shall be jacked as boring operations continue. If steel casing pipe is used, then the ends shall be welded together to form a water tight seal. Jacking operations shall be conducted to avoid freezing of the casing pipe. All excavated material shall be removed from the casing pipe and shall not be allowed to accumulate in the pipe. Excessive loss of soil around the casing pie shall be filled with controlled low strength material immediately. 3.5 DIRECTIONAL DRILLING

The directional drilling equipment shall consist of a directional drilling rig of sufficient capacity to perform the bore and pull-back the pipe, a drilling fluid mixing & delivery system of sufficient capacity to successfully complete the boring, a guidance system to accurately guide boring operations and trained and competent personnel to operate the system. All equipment shall be in good, safe operating condition with sufficient supplies, materials and spare parts on hand to maintain the system in good working order for the duration of this project.

12 07/2015

Drilling Rig: The directional drilling machine shall consist of a hydraulically powered system to rotate, push and pull hollow drill pipe into the ground at a variable angle while delivering a pressurized fluid mixture to a guidable drill (bore) head. The machine shall be anchored to the ground to withstand the pulling, pushing and rotating pressure required to complete the boring. The hydraulic power system shall be self-contained with sufficient pressure and volume to power drilling operations. Hydraulic system shall be free of leaks. Rig shall have a system to monitor and record maximum pull-back pressure during pull-back operations. Drill Head: The drill head shall be steerable by changing its rotation and shall provide the necessary cutting surfaces and drilling fluid jets for the material being drilled. The Guidance System shall be of a proven type and shall be setup and operated by personnel trained and experienced with this system. The Operator shall be aware of any magnetic anomalies and shall consider such influences in the operation of the guidance system if using a magnetic system. At a minimum, the guidance system shall provide information on the horizontal and vertical location of the drill head along the entire length of the bore. The drilling head shall be steerable by means of an electronic or magnetic detection system. The system shall be able to monitor the point of rotation of the head, offset from the baseline, distance along the baseline and depth of cover. Mixing System: A self-contained, closed, drilling fluid mixing system shall be of sufficient size to mix and deliver drilling fluid composed of bentonite clay, potable water and appropriate additives. Mixing system shall be able to molecularly shear individual bentonite particles from the dry powder to avoid clumping and ensure thorough mixing. The drilling fluid reservoir tank shall be sized for adequate storage of the fluid. Mixing system shall continually agitate the drilling fluid during drilling operations. Drilling System: Use a mixture of bentonite clay or other approved stabilizing agent mixed with potable water to create the drilling fluid for lubrication and soil stabilization. Water shall be from a clean source with a pH of 6.0 and/or as per mixing requirements of the Manufacturer. The water and additives shall be mixed thoroughly and be absent of any clumps or clods. The Contractor shall assure that construction activities and materials of construction do not damage the natural environment, or wildlife. The Contractor shall be responsible for any environmental damage which results from his activities. Drilling fluid shall be maintained at a viscosity sufficient to suspend cuttings and maintain the integrity of the bore wall. Delivery System: The mud pumping system shall have a minimum capacity to supply mud in accordance with the drilling equipment pull-back rating at a constant required pressure. The delivery system shall have filters in-line to prevent solids from being pumped into the drill pipe. Connections between the pump and drill pipe shall be relatively leak-free. Used drilling fluid and drilling fluid spilled during drilling operations shall be contained and properly disposed of. A containment system shall be maintained around drill rigs, drilling fluid

13 07/2015

mixing system, entry and exit pits and drilling fluid recycling system (if used) to prevent spills into the surrounding environment. Pumps and or vacuum truck(s) of sufficient size shall be in place to convey excess drilling fluid from containment areas to storage facilities. Pipe Rollers: Pipe rollers, if required, shall be of sufficient size to fully support the weight of the pipe during set-up and pull-back operations. Sufficient number of rollers shall be used to prevent excess sagging of pipe. Pipe Rammers: Hydraulic or pneumatic pipe rammers may only be used with the authorization of Engineer and should never be used with PVC pipe. Restrictions: Other devices or utility placement systems for providing horizontal thrust other than those previously defined in the preceding sections shall not be used unless approved by the manufacturer prior to commencement of the work. Consideration for approval will be made on an individual basis for each specified location. The proposed device or system will be evaluated prior to approval or rejection on its potential ability to complete the utility placement satisfactorily without undue stoppage and to maintain line and grade within the tolerances prescribed by the particular conditions of the project. Pipe: Pipe shall be joined together in one length, if space permits. The maximum pipe bending radius as specified by the pipe manufacturer shall not be exceeded during the installation process. Pilot Bore Hole: Pilot hole shall be drilled along the bore path. In the event that the pilot bore does deviate from the bore path the Contractor may be required to pull-back and re-drill from the location were the deviation started. Reaming: Minimize potential damage from soil displacement/settlement by limiting the ratio of the bore hole to the pipe size. The size of the back reamer bit or pilot bit, if no back reaming is required, will be limited to the following:

Maximum Pilot or Back-Reamer Bit Diameter When Rotated 360 Degrees

Nominal Inside Pipe Diameter, Inches Bit Diameter, Inches < 8 Pipe Dia. + 4

8 to 24 Pipe Dia. x 1.5 > 24 Pipe Dia. plus 12

Contractor will not attempt to ream at one time more than the drilling equipment and mud system are designed to safely handle. Multiple reaming passes may be necessary due to the size of the bore hole. Pull-Back: After successfully reaming bore hole to the required diameter, Contractor will pull the pipe through the bore hole. In front of the pipe shall be a swivel. Once pull-back operations have commenced, operations must continue without interruption until pipe is

14 07/2015

completely pulled into bore hole. During pull-back operations Contractor will not apply more than the maximum safe pipe pull pressure at any time. The pipe entry and staging area shall be graded as needed to support the pipe and prevent damage to the pipe during the pull-back process. In the event that pipe becomes stuck, Contractor will cease pulling operations to allow any potential hydro-lock to subside and will commence pulling operations. If pipe remains stuck, Contractor will notify Engineer. Damage Restoration: The Contractor shall restore to original or better condition any areas damaged by heaving, settlement, and separation of pavement, escaping drilling fluid or the directional drilling operations at no additional cost to the Owner. Failed Bore Paths: If conditions warrant that a bore path needs to be abandoned, then the Contractor shall fill all voids by injecting controlled low strength material into them. 3.6 OPEN-ENDED PIPE RAMMING A method that involves driving a steel casing pipe with a percussive hammer. The front end of the casing pipe is open-ended. Spoils are removed from the pipe. The pipe used for ramming shall be free of obvious damage and of good quality. The wall thickness shall meet the manufacturer’s recommendation for thickness. Straps will be allowed on joints for casing pipes 12” or larger. However, broken welds are not allowed and straps will not be considered a replacement for broken welds. The rammer shall be of sufficient size to meet the project length, diameter and soil conditions. The leading edge shall contain a soil shoe that is available from the manufacturer or fabricated on site. As excavation progresses each pipe shall be rammed forward. Complete and adequate ground support shall be maintained at all times. The external surface of the pipe shall be lubricated to reduce skin friction. The hammer frame shall be positioned to provide a uniformed ramming force on the entire circumference of the pipe. The pipe should be set to ensure the correct alignment and that the launch seal (if needed) is properly designed. The lubricating system shall be designed to provide lubrication on the inside and outside of the pipe to reduce friction during the ramming process. Lubricating points shall be located by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. The amount of lubrication applied to the outside of the pipe should be adequate to fill the void. The amount of lubrication applied to the inside of the pipe should be adequate to assist with spoil removal.

15 07/2015

Spoil removed from casings 30” in diameter or less can be completed with pressurized air and water. Water pressure shall not exceed 300 psi and air pressure shall not exceed 150 psi. 3.7 MICROTUNNELING

A method of pipe jacking using a remote controlled tunnel boring machine. The microtunneling boring machines (MTBM) shall have a shield that can be steered to maintain face stability regardless of the soil conditions that are encountered. The steering mechanism shall be remote controlled to prevent personnel from entering the tunnel. The steering mechanism shall be capable of articulating in both the vertical and horizontal directions. A slurry system shall be used to balance groundwater and earth pressure. Variable flow slurry pumps shall be used to control slurry system pressure. There shall be a minimum of two flow meters, one on the feed side and one on the return side and pressure control valves. Slurry spoil transportation, earth and groundwater pressure at the face shall be used to control the slurry pressure. The separation system for the slurry spoil shall be of sufficient size to remove solids while the system is running. The discharge shall contain negligible fines. The MTBM cutter face shall at all times be capable of supporting the full excavated area without the use of ground stabilization and have the capability of measuring the earth pressure at the face and setting a calculated earth balancing pressure. The machine shall have sufficient power under normal operations to crush or cut hard material up to 1/3 diameter of the pipe and up to 30,000 psi compressive strength. The outside diameter of the MTBM shall not exceed the diameter of the casing pipe by more than one inch for nominal pipe diameters less than 24” and a two inches for nominal pipe diameters 24” and above. The MTBM shall be advanced by jacks mounted in a jacking frame and located in the drive shaft. The MTBM shall be moved forward by the jacks advancing a successive string of connected pipes toward a receiving shaft. The control equipment shall integrate the method of excavation and removal of soil and its simultaneous replacement by a pipe. Line and grade shall be controlled by a guidance system that relates the actual position of the MTBM to a design reference (e.g.. by a laser beam transmitted from the drive shaft along the center line of the pipe to a target mounted in the shield). As each pipe section is jacked forward, the control system shall synchronize spoils removal, excavation, and jacking speeds. The MTBM display equipment shall continuously show and automatically record the position of the shield with respect to the project design line and grade.

16 07/2015

4.0 METHOD OF MEASURMENT AND BASIS OF PAYMENT 4.1 TRENCHLESS CONSTRUCTION The basis of measurement shall be by the lineal foot for the trenchless construction. The measured length of the trenchless construction shall be rounded up to the nearest 1-foot increment. Payment for trenchless construction shall be full compensation for installing the casing pipe or carrier pipe when a casing pipe is not required by the approved trenchless method. Payment shall include all work, labor and materials required for excavation and backfilling of bore pits, protection around the bore pits and all other appurtenances necessary to complete the work. The Contractor is responsible for choosing the trenchless construction method from the approved list. The Contractor will only be paid once for the trenchless construction even if the method they choose doesn’t work and they need to change the trenchless construction method. 4.2 CARRIER PIPE The basis of measurement shall be by the lineal foot for carrier pipe. The measured length of carrier pipe shall be rounded up to the nearest 1-foot increment. Furnishing of carrier pipe shall be paid for at the contract unit price per lineal foot for the types, classes and sizes furnished and installed in accordance with the specifications. Payment for carrier pipe will be full compensation for furnishing of the carrier pipe, installing the carrier pipe in the casing pipe when a casing pipe is required, gaskets, tracer wire and all other appurtenances necessary for the proper installation of the carrier pipe. 4.3 CASING PIPE The basis of measurement shall be by the lineal foot for casing pipe. The measured length of casing pipe shall be rounded up to the nearest 1-foot increment. Furnishing of casing pipe shall be paid for at the contract unit price per lineal foot for the types, classes and sizes furnished and installed in accordance with the specifications. Payment for casing pipe will be full compensation for furnishing the casing pipe, welding when necessary, casing end seals and casing spacers. 4.4 BORE OBSTRUCTION Payment for bore obstruction will be full compensation for the labor, equipment, and materials needed for removal of the obstruction. Payment for bore obstructions will be paid only for bore obstructions removed by excavations from the surface. A bore obstruction shall be defined as any concrete, rock, boulder, etc., or similar material, which is encountered during the excavation that cannot be removed by the boring machine and requires shutdown of the equipment for removal. The Contractor shall be aware that all quantities are estimates and that there may be no obstructions or could be a large number of obstructions on the project. The Contractor will only be paid for obstructions encountered and reported to and verified by the Engineer. The bid item

17 07/2015

quantities are not guaranteed items. Bore obstruction shall include the removal and replacement of the pavement, excavation to the obstruction and removal of the obstruction. In the event that the bore obstruction is located under the interstate, a major arterial or any other location where the Owner determines that excavation of the bore obstruction is not feasible or desirable, the Contractor will be allowed to abandon the bore and change the alignment. The new alignment shall be reviewed by the Engineer. The abandonment of the bore shall be paid for as the amount of controlled low strength material required to fill the pipe and the amount of casing or carrier pipe that was installed, as measured, from the edge of the bore pit. The Contractor will not be paid for trenchless construction of the abandoned bore. Any controlled low strength material necessary to fill the voids of the bore path or casing pipe shall be paid for at the contract unit price for controlled low strength material. Failed bore paths or bore obstructions that are due to the Contractor selecting a trenchless construction method that does not work for the site conditions or having inadequate equipment will be the responsibility of the Contractor and no additional payment will be made by the Owner. 4.5 CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH MATERIAL The basis of measurement shall be by the cubic yard for controlled low strength material. The measured volume of controlled low strength material shall be rounded up to the nearest cubic yard increment. Furnishing and installing controlled low strength material shall be paid for at the contract unit price per cubic yard installed in accordance with the specifications. Payment for controlled low strength material will be full compensation for furnishing and installing the controlled low strength material.

I229 and 26th Street Area Improvements: Rotary Park Improvements Sioux Falls, SD

Perspective, Inc. 17007 July 19, 2017

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 1

SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the following:

1. Footings. 2. Foundation walls, and piers. 3. Slabs-on-grade.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for elastomeric joint sealants in contraction and other joints in cast-in-place architectural concrete.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume; subject to compliance with requirements.

1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following:

a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures. c. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer. d. Concrete Subcontractor. e. Special concrete finish Subcontractor.

2. Review special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality control, concrete finishes and finishing, cold- and hot-weather concreting procedures,

Jessica Williams [email protected]

Rotary PM Stamp




forms and form removal limitations, methods for achieving specified floor and slab flatness and levelness and concrete protection.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Design mixes are to be developed and certified by an engineer licensed in the state of South Dakota. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.

1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site if allowed.

C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement.

D. Construction and Control Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the structure.

1. Location of construction joints and control joints are subject to approval of the Architect.

E. Samples: For vapor retarder.

F. Welding certificates.

G. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:

1. Cementitious materials. 2. Admixtures. 3. Form materials and form-release agents. 4. Steel reinforcement and accessories. 5. Fiber reinforcement. 6. Curing compounds. 7. Floor and slab treatments. 8. Bonding agents. 9. Adhesives. 10. Vapor retarders. 11. Semi rigid joint filler. 12. Joint-filler strips. 13. Repair materials.

H. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance with requirements:

1. Aggregates.


Rotary PM Stamp




I. Field quality-control reports.

J. Concrete Testing Services: coordinate with Owner qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certified Concrete Flatwork Technician.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from single source from single manufacturer.

D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M, "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel."

E. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents:

1. ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5. 2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."

F. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.

G. Mockups: Cast concrete formed-surface panels to demonstrate typical joints, surface finish, texture, tolerances, and standard of workmanship.

1. Build panel approximately 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m) for formed surface in the location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.

2. Approved panels may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage. Avoid damaging coatings on steel reinforcement.


Rotary PM Stamp




1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.

1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301 (ACI 301M).

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.

3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.

B. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) and as follows:

1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS

A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.

1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials. 2. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1,

and as follows:

a. High-density overlay, Class 1 or better. b. Medium-density overlay, Class 1 or better; mill-release agent treated and edge

sealed. c. Structural 1, B-B or better; mill oiled and edge sealed. d. B-B (Concrete Form), Class 1 or better; mill oiled and edge sealed.

B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.

C. Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic, paper, or fiber tubes that will produce surfaces with gradual or abrupt irregularities not exceeding specified formwork surface class. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation.


Rotary PM Stamp




D. Form liners for Patterned Concrete Walls: 1x4 nominal rough sawn boards in pattern indicated on drawings or approved equal form liner of similar pattern. 1. Locations: see drawing for locations

E. Sandblasted Finished Concrete: Form areas with ‘smooth-forms’ for final custom finish.

F. Void Forms: Biodegradable paper surface, treated for moisture resistance, structurally sufficient to support weight of plastic concrete and other superimposed loads.

G. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch (19 by 19 mm), minimum.

H. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.

I. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal.

1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch (25 mm) to the plane of exposed concrete surface.

2. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes no larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in diameter in concrete surface.

2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent.

B. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed.

C. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M, as drawn.

D. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets.

2.3 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES

A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), plain-steel bars, cut true to length with ends square and free of burrs.

B. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows:


Rotary PM Stamp




1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.

2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I/II, gray. Supplement with the following:

a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F or C. b. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 4S coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide aggregates from a single source.

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: ¾” (19 mm) nominal. 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable.

2.5 ADMIXTURES

A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.

1. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.

2.6 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A or B. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Inc.; Blackline 400. b. Fortifiber Building Systems Group; Moistop Ultra 15. c. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co.; Florprufe 120. d. Insulation Solutions, Inc.; Viper VaporCheck 16. e. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Perminator 15 mil. f. Raven Industries Inc.; Vapor Block 15. g. Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn 15 mil Green. h. Stego Industries, LLC; Stego Wrap 15 mil. i. Prior approved equal.


Rotary PM Stamp




B. Granular Fill beneath Vapor Retarder: Refer to Geotechnical report for recommended material.

2.7 CURING MATERIALS

A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) when dry.

B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

C. Water: Potable.

D. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, dissipating.


a. Axim Italcementi Group, Inc.; CATEXOL CimFilm. b. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Confilm. c. ChemMasters; SprayFilm. d. Conspec by Dayton Superior; Aquafilm. e. Dayton Superior Corporation; Sure Film (J-74). f. Edoco by Dayton Superior; BurkeFilm. g. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Eucobar. h. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Vapor-Aid. i. Lambert Corporation; LAMBCO Skin. j. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; E-CON. k. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; EVAPRE. l. Metalcrete Industries; Waterhold. m. Nox-Crete Products Group; MONOFILM. n. Sika Corporation; SikaFilm. o. SpecChem, LLC; Spec Film. p. Symons by Dayton Superior; Finishing Aid. q. TK Products, Division of Sierra Corporation; TK-2120 TRI-FILM. r. Unitex; PRO-FILM. s. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex Envio Set. t. Prior approved equal.

2.8 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork.

B. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059/C 1059M, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene.


Rotary PM Stamp




C. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to suit requirements, and as follows:

1. Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete.

D. Reglets: Fabricate reglets of not less than 0.022-inch- (0.55-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel sheet. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of reglet to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris.

E. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot-dip galvanized-steel sheet, not less than 0.034 inch (0.85 mm) thick, with bent tab anchors. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of slots to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris.

2.9 REPAIR MATERIALS

A. Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219.

2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application.

3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3.2 to 6 mm) or coarse sand as recommended by underlayment manufacturer.

4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi (29 MPa) at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.

B. Repair Overlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) and that can be filled in over a scarified surface to match adjacent floor elevations.

1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219.

2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application.

3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3.2 to 6 mm) or coarse sand as recommended by topping manufacturer.

4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi (34.5 MPa) at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.

2.10 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301. Submit written reports of each proposed mix for each class of concrete at least 15 days prior to start of the related


Rotary PM Stamp




work. Mix designs are to be developed and certified by an Engineer licensed in South Dakota. The report for each proposed mix design shall contain the following information:

Design Slump Cement and Fly Ash Content with ASTM reference for each product Fine Aggregate Weight (with sieve analysis) and ASTM reference Coarse Aggregate Weight (with sieve analysis) with ASTM reference Quantity of each Admixture with manufacturer’s literature and ASTM reference Air Content Expected 28-day Compressive Strength Location in the Project of each Design Mix (e.g. 4000 psi Footings, etc.)

1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.

B. Cementitious Materials: Use fly ash, pozzolan, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume as needed to reduce the total amount of portland cement, which would otherwise be used, by not less than 40 percent. Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows:

1. Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 25 percent.

C. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of cement.

D. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use high-range water-reducing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability.

2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.

3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50.

4. Use corrosion-inhibiting admixture in concrete mixtures where indicated.

2.11 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS

A. Footings: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi (20.7 MPa) at 28 days.


Rotary PM Stamp




2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.50. 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm).

B. Foundation Walls, Piers, and Stoops: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi (20.7 MPa) at 28 days. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.50. 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm). 4. Air Content: 5.5 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-1/2-inch

(38-mm) nominal maximum aggregate size. 5. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-inch (25-mm)

or 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal maximum aggregate size.

C. Slabs-on-Grade: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi (20.7 MPa) at 28 days. 2. Slump Limit: 5 inches (125 mm). 3. Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel-finished floors to exceed 3 percent.

2.12 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

2.13 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116/C 1116M, and furnish batch ticket information.

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK

A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads.

B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.

C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows:

1. Class A, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) for smooth-formed finished surfaces.


Rotary PM Stamp




D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.

E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.

1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. 2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.

F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.

G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.

H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete, except where noted on the drawings.

I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.

J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete.

K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.

L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement.

3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

2. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and other conditions.

3. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated.


Rotary PM Stamp




3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS

A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 24 hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations and curing and protection operations need to be maintained.

1. Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that supports weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved at least 70 percent of its 28-day design compressive strength.

2. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without loosening or disturbing shores.

B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent.

C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect.

3.4 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Lap joints 6 inches (150 mm) and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.

3.5 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.

1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that would reduce bond to concrete.

C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars.

1. Weld reinforcing bars according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M, where indicated.

D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

E. Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset


Rotary PM Stamp




laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire.

3.6 JOINTS

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect.

1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs.

2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into concrete.

C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness as follows:

1. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- (3.2-mm-) wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks.

D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated.

1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface unless otherwise indicated.

2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) or more than 1 inch (25 mm) below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants," are indicated.

3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together.

E. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.

3.7 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.

B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless approved by Architect.


Rotary PM Stamp




C. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.

1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.

2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301. 3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators

vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches (150 mm) into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.

D. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.

1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.

2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured

surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.

E. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.

1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301.

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.

3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.

F. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:

1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.


Rotary PM Stamp




3.8 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.

B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view.

2. Form liner, to match pattern indicated on plans, may be used in lieu of rough-sawn 4” nominal boards in select areas.

C. Sand-Blast Finish: All exposed to public view area of Restroom Building. 1. Blasting Operations and Requirements:

a. Preform sand blasting at least 72 hours after placement of concrete. Coordinate with formwork construction, concrete placement, schedule, and formwork removal to ensure surfaces to be blast finished at the same age for uniform results.

b. Determine type of nozzle, nozzle pressure, and blasting techniques required to match Architects sample or approved level of ‘light’ finish.

c. Abrasive blast corners and edges of patterns carefully, using back-up boards, to maintain uniform corner or edge line.

2. Depth of Cut: Use an abrasive grit of proper type and gradation to expose aggregate and surrounding matrix surface as follows; a. Light Sand Blast Finish: Expose fine aggregate with occasional exposure of coarse

aggregate; maximum 1/16” reveal. 3. Surface Continuity: Preform sand blast finishing in as continuous an operation as

possible, utilizing the same work crew to maintain continuity of finish on each surface or area of work.

4. Protection and Repair: a. Protect adjacent materials and finishes from dust, dirt, and other surfaces or

physical damage during abrasive blast finishing operations. Provide protection as required and remove from site at completion of work.

b. Repair or replace other work damaged by finishing operations. 5. Clean-Up: Maintain control of concrete chips, dust, and debris in each area of the work.

Clean up and remove such material at the completion of each day of operation. Prevent migration of airborne materials by use of tarpaulins, wind breaks, and similar containing devices.

D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.


Rotary PM Stamp




3.9 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.

1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with epoxy flooring, resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-film-finish coating system.

2. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled, freestanding, 10-ft.- (3.05-m-) long straightedge resting on two high spots and placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed 3/16 inch (4.8 mm).

C. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thin-set method. While concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom.

1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel-finished floor surfaces.

3.10 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS

A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work.

B. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates from manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment.

3.11 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during curing.

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after


Rotary PM Stamp




loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for the remainder of the curing period.

D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.

E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials:

a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete

surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

3.12 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS

A. Sealing Coat: Uniformly apply a continuous sealing coat of curing and sealing compound to hardened concrete by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Remove curing compounds, sealers, oil, dirt, laitance, and other contaminants and

complete surface repairs. 2. Do not apply to concrete that is less than seven days' old.

3.13 JOINT FILLING

A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least six month(s). Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased.

B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joint clean and dry.

C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches (50 mm) deep in formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.


Rotary PM Stamp




3.14 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.

B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing.

C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.

1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch (19 mm). Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.

2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface.

3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect.

D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.

1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch (0.25 mm) wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions.

2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing

operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete.

4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch (6 mm) to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface.

6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with


Rotary PM Stamp




clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch (19-mm) clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.

7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.

E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar.

F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval.

3.15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a special inspector and qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. Contractor shall coordinate with the Testing and Inspection Agency for all testing and inspection as required. Contractor must inform testing and inspecting agency of all concrete placement operations with sufficient lead time to accommodate the testing and inspection agency’s schedule.

B. Inspections:

1. Steel reinforcement placement. 2. Verification of use of required design mixture. 3. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing.

C. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:

1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd. (4 cu. m), but less than 25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m), plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m) or fraction thereof.

a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.

2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.


Rotary PM Stamp




4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each composite sample.

5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M.

a. Cast and laboratory cure four standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.

6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one laboratory-cured specimens at 7 days and three specimens at 28 days.

7. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete.

8. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa).

9. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, Structural Engineer, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.

10. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.

11. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect.

12. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

13. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the Contract Documents.

3.16 PROTECTION OF LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS

A. Protect liquid floor treatment from damage and wear during the remainder of construction period. Use protective methods and materials, including temporary covering, recommended in writing by liquid floor treatments installer.

END OF SECTION 033000


Rotary PM Stamp



UNIT MASONRY 042000 - 1

SECTION 042000 - UNIT MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following: 1. Decorative Masonry Units 2. Face Brick. 3. Mortar and grout. 4. Reinforcing steel. 5. Masonry joint reinforcement. 6. Ties and anchors. 7. Miscellaneous masonry accessories. 8. Masonry vents.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Section 047200 “Cast Stone Masonry” for cast stone trims. 2. Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" and in this Section. 3. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for sealing control and expansion joints in unit masonry.

C. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following:

D. Products installed, but not furnished, under this Section include the following:

1. Cast-stone trim, furnished under Division 04 Section "Cast Stone Masonry." 2. Steel lintels and shelf angles for unit masonry, furnished under Division 05 Section

"Metal Fabrications."

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide structural unit masonry that develops indicated net-area compressive strengths (f'm) at 28 days.


Rotary PM Stamp




B. Determine net-area compressive strength (f'm) of masonry from average net-area compressive strengths of masonry units and mortar types (unit-strength method) according to Tables 1 and 2 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: For the following:

1. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes. 2. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars.

Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Show elevations of reinforced walls.

3. Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, end-dam units, and other special applications.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For the following:

1. Face brick, in the form of straps, five or more bricks. 2. Retain paragraph and subparagraph below for critical work where record of mockup ma-

terials is desired.

D. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

E. Material Certificates: Include statements of material properties indicating compliance with requirements including compliance with standards and type designations within standards. Provide for each type and size of the following:

1. Masonry units.

a. Include material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements. b. For exposed brick, include material test report for efflorescence according to

ASTM C 67. c. For masonry units used in structural masonry, include data and calculations

establishing average net-area compressive strength of units.

2. Cementitious materials. Include brand, type, and name of manufacturer. 3. Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 4. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 5. Reinforcing bars. 6. Joint reinforcement. 7. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories.

F. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.

1. Pre-packaged, pre-blended dry grout is preferred. Use of ready-mix grout is acceptable

pending submittal and successful review of a grout mix design certified by an engineer licensed in South Dakota, which is to include evidence that this specific mix represented


Rotary PM Stamp




by the submitted mix design has performed successfully on recent projects in the geographic area of the project site.

G. Statement of Compressive Strength of Masonry: For each combination of masonry unit type and mortar type, provide statement of average net-area compressive strength of masonry units, mortar type, and resulting net-area compressive strength of masonry determined according to Tables 1 and 2 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

H. Cold-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used to comply with cold-weather requirements.


A. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, through one source from a single manufacturer for each product required.

B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from a single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source or producer for each aggregate.


A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry.

B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp.

C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided.

D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for lifting and emptying into dispensing silo. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in a metal dispensing silo with weatherproof cover.

E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil.

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress.


Rotary PM Stamp




1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down both sides and hold cover securely in place.

2. Where 1 wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes, secure cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down face next to unconstructed wythe and hold cover in place.

B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns.

C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry.

1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading coverings on ground and over wall surface.

2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and

integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from

splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.

D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than 7 days after completing cleaning.

E. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified.

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.


Rotary PM Stamp




2.2 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL

A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to exceed tolerances and to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not uses units where such defects, including dimensions that vary from specified dimensions by more than stated tolerances, will be exposed in the completed Work or will impair the quality of completed masonry.

2.3 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMUs)

A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows:

1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions.

2. Provide square-edged and bullnose units for outside corners, unless otherwise indicated.

a. Bullnose units at door of openings and interior outside corners only.

B. Decorative Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90.

1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of 1900 psi (13.1 MPa), Grade: N

2. Weight Classification: Normal weight (C33). 3. Integral Water Repellent: Provide units made with integral water repellent for exposed

units. a. Integral Water Repellent: Liquid polymeric, integral water-repellent admixture

that does not reduce flexural bond strength. Units made with integral water repellent, when tested as a wall assembly made with mortar containing integral water-repellent manufacturer's mortar additive according to ASTM E 514, with test period extended to 24 hours, show no visible water or leaks on the back of test specimen.

b. Available Products:

1) Addiment Incorporated; Block Plus W-10. 2) Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Dry-

Block. 3) Master Builders, Inc.; Rheopel. 4) Prior approved equal.

4. Size (Width): 8”x16” nominal manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal

dimensions. a. Pattern and Finish:

i. Standard running bond pattern.

ii. Finish and Color: Smooth/ground finish, Gage Premium Glacier Gray #4 or similar.


Rotary PM Stamp




5. Available Basis-of-Design Products:

a. Concrete Materials, Harrisburg, South Dakota, phone-888-256-2575, www.concretematerialscompany.com

b. Prior approved equal.

2.4 FACE BRICK

A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching finish and color of exposed faces of adjacent units:

1. For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinished brick surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished.

2. Provide special shapes for applications where stretcher units cannot accommodate special conditions, including those at corners, movement joints, bond beams, sashes, and lintels.

3. Provide special shapes for applications requiring brick of size, form, color, and texture on exposed surfaces that cannot be produced by sawing.

4. Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing would result in sawed surfaces being exposed to view.

B. Face Brick: Facing brick complying with ASTM C 216.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

a. Endicott Clay Products, Medium Ironspot #77

2. Grade: SW. 3. Type: FBS. 4. Initial Rate of Absorption: Less than 30 g/30 sq. in. (30 g/194 sq. cm) per minute when

tested per ASTM C 67. 5. Efflorescence: Provide brick that has been tested according to ASTM C 67 and is rated

"not effloresced." 6. Size (Actual Dimensions): 3-5/8 inches (92 mm) wide by 2-1/4 inches (57 mm) high by

11-5/8 inches (295 mm) long. 7. Pattern: 1/3 (4” lap) running bond.

2.5 MASONRY LINTELS

A. General: Provide either concrete or masonry lintels, at Contractor's option, complying with requirements below.

B. Masonry Lintels: Prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels made from bond beam concrete masonry units with reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. Cure precast lintels before handling and installing. Temporarily support built-in-place lintels until cured.


Rotary PM Stamp




2.6 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207, Type S. Pre-packaged mortar and grout is required. Use of ready-mix mortar or grout is prohibited.

B. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.

1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or crushed stone.

C. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.

D. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition indicated.

1. Available Products:

a. Addiment Incorporated; Mortar Kick. b. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Accelguard 80. c. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Morset. d. Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex; Trimix-NCA. e. Prior approved equal.

E. Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with concrete masonry units, containing integral water repellent by same manufacturer.


a. Addiment Incorporated; Mortar Tite. b. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Dry-Block

Mortar Admixture. c. Master Builders, Inc.; Color Cure Mortar Admix or Rheomix Rheopel.

F. Water: Potable.

2.7 REINFORCEMENT

A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60 (Grade 420).

B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951.

1. Interior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel. 2. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel. 3. Wire Size for Side Rods: W1.7 or 0.148-inch (3.8-mm) diameter. 4. Wire Size for Cross Rods: W1.7 or 0.148-inch (3.8-mm) diameter. 5. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches (407 mm) o.c. 6. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet (3 m), with prefabricated corner and tee units.


Rotary PM Stamp




C. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or truss type with single pair of side rods.

2.8 TIES AND ANCHORS

A. Corrugated Metal Ties: Metal strips not less than 7/8 inch (22 mm) wide with corrugations having a wavelength of 7.6 to 12.7 mm and an amplitude of 0.06 to 0.10 inch (1.5 to 2.5 mm) made from 0.060-inch- (1.52-mm-) thick, steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication.

B. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Concrete: Provide anchors that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall.

1. Connector Section: Dovetail tabs for inserting into dovetail slots in concrete and attached to tie section; formed from 0.060-inch- (1.52-mm-) thick, steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication.

a. 0.064-inch- (1.63-mm-)] thick, galvanized sheet may be used at interior walls unless otherwise indicated.

2. Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie, sized to extend within 1 inch (25 mm) of masonry face, made from 0.187-inch- (4.76-mm-) diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.

C. Partition Top anchors: 0.097-inch- (2.5-mm-) thick metal plate with 3/8-inch- (10-mm-) diameter metal rod 6 inches (150 mm) long welded to plate and with closed-end plastic tube fitted over rod that allows rod to move in and out of tube. Fabricate from steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

D. Rigid Anchors: Fabricate from steel bars 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide by 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick by 24 inches (600 mm) long, with ends turned up 2 inches (50 mm) or with cross pins, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Corrosion Protection: Hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS

A. Unit Type Inserts in Concrete: Cast-iron or malleable-iron wedge-type inserts.

B. Anchor Bolts: Headed or L-shaped steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C; of dimensions indicated.

C. Postinstalled Anchors: Provide chemical anchors, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in solid or grouted unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.


Rotary PM Stamp




1. Corrosion Protection (Interior Applications): Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 (5 microns) for Class SC 1 service condition (mild).

2. Corrosion Protection (Exterior Applications): Stainless-steel components complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2 (ASTM F 738M and ASTM F 836M, Alloy Group 1 or 4) for bolts and nuts; ASTM A 666 or ASTM A 276, Type 304 or 316, for anchors.

2.10 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing complying with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" and as follows: 1. Fabricate continuous flashings in sections 96 inches (2400 mm) long minimum, but not

exceeding 12 feet (3.7 m). Provide splice plates at joints of formed, smooth metal flashing.

2. Fabricate through-wall flashing with snaplock receiver on exterior face where indicated to receive counterflashing.

3. Fabricate through-wall flashing with sealant stop unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate by bending metal back on itself 3/4 inch (19 mm) at exterior face of wall and down into joint 1/4 inch (6 mm) to form a stop for retaining sealant backer rod.

B. Flexible Flashing: Use one of the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Asphalt-Coated Copper Flashing: 7-oz./sq. ft. (2-kg/sq. m) copper sheet coated with flexible asphalt. Use only where flashing is fully concealed in masonry.

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1) Advanced Building Products Inc. 2) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.

C. Application: Unless otherwise indicated, use the following:

1. Where flashing is indicated to receive counterflashing, use metal flashing. 2. Where flashing is indicated to be turned down at or beyond the wall face, use metal

flashing. 3. Where flashing is partly exposed and is indicated to terminate at the wall face, use metal

flashing or flexible flashing with a metal drip edge. 4. Where flashing is fully concealed, use flexible flashing.

D. Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings: As specified in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

E. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to substrates.


Rotary PM Stamp




F. Termination Bars for Flexible Flashing: Stainless steel bars 1/8 inch by 1 inch (3 mm by 25 mm).

2.11 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES

A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene, urethane, or PVC.

B. Brick Vent: Basis-of-Design product; 1. Aluminum, 1” +/- flanged, insect screen, fixed louvered, 8”x16” nominal, clear finish,

Airolite (or approved equal), 740.373.7676, www.airolite.com . a. Provide brick vent on inside and outside face of wall for back to back installation.

C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).

D. Weep/Cavity Vent Products: Use one of the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Cellular Plastic Weep/Vent: One-piece, flexible extrusion made from UV-resistant

polypropylene copolymer, manufacturer jumbo 3/8” thick x 3½”w x 3 ½” l, in color selected from manufacturer's standard.

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1) Advanced Building Products Inc. 2) Heckmann Building Products, Inc. 3) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. 4) Wire-Bond.

E. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry unit cells with loops for holding reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.142-inch (3.6-mm) steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units with either two loops or four loops as needed for number of bars indicated.


a. Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; D/A 810, D/A 812 or D/A 817.

b. Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 376 Rebar Positioner. c. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; #RB or #RB-Twin Rebar Positioner. d. Wire-Bond; O-Ring or Double O-Ring Rebar Positioner.

2.12 MASONRY CLEANERS

A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without


Rotary PM Stamp




discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned.

1. Available Manufacturers:

a. Diedrich Technologies, Inc. b. EaCo Chem, Inc. c. ProSoCo, Inc.

2.13 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement, mortar cement, and lime. 3. Limit cementitious materials in mortar for exterior and reinforced masonry to portland

cement, mortar cement, and lime. 4. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to

view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.

B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site.

C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with BIA Technical Notes 8A, Proportion Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated or needed to provide required compressive strength of masonry.

1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type S. 2. For reinforced masonry, use Type S. 3. For mortar parge coats, use Type N. 4. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet walls; for

interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions; and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N.

5. For interior non-load-bearing partitions, Type O may be used instead of Type N.

D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.

1. Pre-packaged, pre-blended dry grout is preferred. Use of ready-mix grout is acceptable pending submittal and successful review of a grout mix design certified by an engineer licensed in South Dakota, which is to include evidence that this specific mix represented by the submitted mix design has performed successfully on recent projects in the geographic area of the project site.


Rotary PM Stamp




2.14 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform source quality-control testing indicated below:

1. Payment for these services will be made by Owner. 2. Retesting of materials failing to comply with specified requirements shall be done at

Contractor's expense.

B. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit furnished, per ASTM C 140.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.

1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of work.

2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified. 3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed.

B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to full thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths indicated.

B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections.

C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening.

D. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.

E. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures.

1. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed.


Rotary PM Stamp




F. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. (30 g/194 sq. cm) per minute when tested according to ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at time of laying.

3.3 TOLERANCES

A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements:

1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation, do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch (12 mm) or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).

2. For location of elements in plan, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/2 inch (12 mm).

3. For location of elements in elevation, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm) in a story height or 1/2 inch (12 mm) total.

B. Lines and Levels:

1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls, do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), or 1/2-inch (12-mm) maximum.

2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2-inch (12-mm) maximum.

3. For vertical lines and surfaces, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2-inch (12-mm) maximum.

4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2-inch (12-mm) maximum.

5. For lines and surfaces, do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2-inch (12-mm) maximum.

6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet ((6 mm in 3 m),) or 1/2-inch (12-mm) maximum.

7. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances specified for warpage of units.

C. Joints:

1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm), with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch (12 mm).

2. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm).

3. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8 inch (9 mm) or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).

4. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm). Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm).

5. For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a straight line by more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) from one masonry unit to the next.


Rotary PM Stamp




3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS

A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations.

B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

C. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh masonry.

D. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.

E. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core.

G. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches (600 mm) under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Build non-load-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof structure above, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure above.

2. Fasten partition top anchors to structure above and build into top of partition. Grout cells of CMUs solidly around plastic tubes of anchors and push tubes down into grout to provide 1/2-inch (13-mm) clearance between end of anchor rod and end of tube. Space anchors 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

3. Wedge non-load-bearing partitions against structure above with small pieces of tile, slate, or metal. Fill joint with mortar after dead-load deflection of structure above approaches final position.

4. At fire-rated partitions, treat joint between top of partition and underside of structure above to comply with Division 07 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems."

3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING

A. Lay hollow concrete masonry units as follows:

1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints. 2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters.


Rotary PM Stamp




3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings.

4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on footings where cells are not grouted.

B. Lay solid/cast masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints.

1. Clean soiled surfaces with fiber brush and soap powder and rinse thoroughly with clear water.

2. Allow cleaned surfaces to dry before setting. 3. Wet joint surfaces thoroughly before applying mortar. 4. Rake out mortar joints for pointing with sealant.

C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated.

3.6 CAVITY WALLS

A. Bond wythes of cavity walls together as indicated on drawings:

B. Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Bevel beds away from cavity, to minimize mortar protrusions into cavity. Do not attempt to trowel or remove mortar fins protruding into cavity.

3.7 ANCHORED MASONRY VENEERS

A. Anchor masonry veneers to wall framing with masonry-veneer anchors to comply with the following requirements: 1. Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up and

down. 2. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. vertically and 25

inches (635 mm) o.c. horizontally, with not less than one anchor for each 2.67 sq. ft. (0.25 sq. m) of wall area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches (305 mm) of openings and at intervals, not exceeding 36 inches (914 mm), around perimeter.

B. Provide not less than 1 inch (25 mm) of airspace between back of masonry veneer and face of sheathing.

C. Keep airspace clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Bevel beds away from airspace, to minimize mortar protrusions into airspace. Do not attempt to trowel or remove mortar fins protruding into airspace.


Rotary PM Stamp




3.8 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch (16 mm) on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch (13 mm) elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm).

1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. 2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) o.c. in foundation walls and

parapet walls. 3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) above and below wall openings

and extending 12 inches (305 mm) beyond openings.

a. Reinforcement above is in addition to continuous reinforcement.

B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.

D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.

3.9 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS

A. General: Install control and expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses. Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in-plane wall or partition movement.

B. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows:

1. Fit bond-breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of concrete masonry units on one side of control joint. Fill resultant core with grout and rake out joints in exposed faces for application of sealant.

C. Provide horizontal, pressure-relieving joints by either leaving an air space or inserting a compressible filler of width required for installing sealant and backer rod specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants," but not less than 3/8 inch (10 mm).

1. Locate horizontal, pressure-relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting masonry.

3.10 LINTELS

A. Install steel lintels where indicated.

B. Provide masonry lintels where shown and where openings of more than 12 inches (305 mm) for brick-size units and 24 inches (610 mm) for block-size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels.

C. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches (200 mm) at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.


Rotary PM Stamp




3.11 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, AND CAVITY VENTS

A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated.

B. Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated:

1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer.

2. At masonry-veneer walls, extend flashing through veneer, across airspace behind veneer, and up face of sheathing at least 8 inches (200 mm); with upper edge tucked under water-resistive barrier, lapping at least 4 inches (100 mm). Fasten upper edge of flexible flashing to sheathing through termination bar.

3. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) into masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches (150 mm) at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches (50 mm) to form end dams.

C. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are shown to be built into masonry.

D. Install weep holes in exterior wythes and veneers in head joints of first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashing.

1. Use specified weep/cavity vent products to form weep holes. 2. Space weep holes formed from plastic tubing 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. 3. Trim wicking material flush with outside face of wall after mortar has set.

4. Place cavity drainage material in airspace behind veneers to comply with configuration requirements for cavity drainage material in "Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories" Article.

3.12 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION

A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support reinforced masonry elements during construction.

1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry.

2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that may be placed on them during construction.

B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.


Rotary PM Stamp




C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough strength to resist grout pressure.

1. Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.

2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches (1520 mm).


A. Inspectors: Owner will engage qualified independent inspectors to perform inspections and prepare reports. Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner’s Inspection Agency for all inspections as required. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to perform inspections.

1. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and grades, sizes, and locations of reinforcement.

2. Place grout only after inspectors have observed and verified placement of embedded items.

B. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. (465 sq. m) of wall area or portion thereof.

C. Grout Test (Slump and Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, per ASTM C 1019.

3.14 PARGING

A. Parge exterior faces of below-grade masonry walls, where indicated, in two uniform coats to a total thickness of 3/4 inch (19 mm). Dampen wall before applying first coat, and scarify first coat to ensure full bond to subsequent coat.

B. Use a steel-trowel finish to produce a smooth, flat, dense surface with a maximum surface variation of 1/8 inch per foot (3 mm per 300 mm). Form a wash at top of parging and a cove at bottom.

C. Damp-cure parging for at least 24 hours and protect parging until cured.

3.15 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.

B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated.


Rotary PM Stamp




C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.

D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:

1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels.

2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry.

3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape.

4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water.

5. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions.

6. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces.

3.16 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL

A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.

B. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.



Rotary PM Stamp




THIS PAGE HAS BEEN LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY.


Rotary PM Stamp



CAST STONE MASONRY 047200 - 1

SECTION 047200 - CAST STONE MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Cast stone trim including the following:

a. Coping. b. Lintels. c. Trims d. Wall and pier caps.


1. Section 042000 "Unit Masonry" for installing cast stone units in unit masonry.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


1. For cast stone units, include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for cast stone units. Include dimensions, details of reinforcement and anchorages if any, and indication of finished faces.

1. Include building elevations showing layout of units and locations of joints and anchors.

C. Samples for Verification:

1. For each color and texture of cast stone required, 10 inches (250 mm) square in size. 2. For colored mortar. Make Samples using same sand and mortar ingredients to be used on

Project. Label Samples to indicated types and amounts of pigments used.

D. Qualification Data: For manufacturer.

1. Include copies of material test reports for completed projects, indicating compliance of cast stone with ASTM C 1364.


Rotary PM Stamp




E. Material Test Reports: For each mix required to produce cast stone, based on testing according to ASTM C 1364, including test for resistance to freezing and thawing.

1. Provide test reports based on testing within previous two years.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer of cast stone units similar to those indicated for this Project that has sufficient production capacity to manufacture required units, and is a plant certified by the Cast Stone Institute or the Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute for Group A, Category AT.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

C. Source Limitations for Cast Stone: Obtain cast stone units through single source from single manufacturer.

D. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color, from one manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source or producer for each aggregate.

E. Mockups: Furnish cast stone for installation in mockups specified in Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry” and “Adhered Stone Masonry Veneer".


A. Coordinate delivery of cast stone with unit masonry work to avoid delaying the Work and to minimize the need for on-site storage.

B. Pack, handle, and ship cast stone units in suitable packs or pallets.

1. Lift with wide-belt slings; do not use wire rope or ropes that might cause staining. Move cast stone units, if required, using dollies with wood supports.

2. Store cast stone units on wood skids or pallets with nonstaining, waterproof covers, securely tied. Arrange to distribute weight evenly and to prevent damage to units. Ventilate under covers to prevent condensation.

C. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp.

D. Store mortar aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination can be avoided.


A. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.


Rotary PM Stamp




1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and above and will remain so until cast stone has dried, but no fewer than seven days after completing cleaning.

B. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CAST STONE MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1364 and the following:

B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III, containing not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according to ASTM C 114. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce cast stone color indicated.

C. Coarse Aggregates: Granite, quartz, or limestone complying with ASTM C 33; gradation and colors as needed to produce required cast stone textures and colors.

D. Fine Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone complying with ASTM C 33, gradation and colors as needed to produce required cast stone textures and colors.

E. Color Pigment: ASTM C 979, synthetic mineral-oxide pigments or colored water-reducing admixtures; color stable, free of carbon black, nonfading, and resistant to lime and other alkalis.

F. Admixtures: Use only admixtures specified or approved in writing by Architect.

1. Do not use admixtures that contain more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious materials. Do not use admixtures containing calcium chloride.

2. Use only admixtures that are certified by manufacturer to be compatible with cement and other admixtures used.

3. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. Add to mixes for units exposed to the exterior at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in an air content of 4 to 6 percent, except do not add to zero-slump concrete mixes.

4. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 5. Water-Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 6. Water-Reducing, Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type E.

G. Reinforcement: Deformed steel bars complying with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420). Use galvanized or epoxy-coated reinforcement when covered with less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) of cast stone material.

1. Epoxy Coating: ASTM A 775/A 775M. 2. Galvanized Coating: ASTM A 767/A 767M.

H. Embedded Anchors and Other Inserts: Fabricated from stainless steel complying with ASTM A 240/A 240M, ASTM A 276, or ASTM A 666, Type 304.


Rotary PM Stamp




2.2 CAST STONE UNITS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. American Artstone Co., Inc., New Ulm, MN, 507.233.3700 2. Architectural Cast Stone, Inc., Wichita, KS, 316.262.5543 3. Enterprise precast Concrete, Inc., Omaha, NE, 402.895.3848 4. Midwest Cast Stone, Kansas City, MO 913.371.3300 5. Stonco, Omaha, NE, 402.556.5544

B. Provide cast stone units complying with ASTM C 1364 using either the vibrant dry tamp or wet-cast method.

1. Provide units that are resistant to freezing and thawing as determined by laboratory testing according to ASTM C 666/C 666M, Procedure A, as modified by ASTM C 1364.

C. Fabricate units with sharp arris and accurately reproduced details, with indicated texture on all exposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

1. Slope exposed horizontal surfaces 1:12 to drain unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide raised fillets at backs of sills and at ends indicated to be built into jambs. 3. Provide drips on projecting elements unless otherwise indicated.

D. Fabrication Tolerances:

1. Variation in Cross Section: Do not vary from indicated dimensions by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm).

2. Variation in Length: Do not vary from indicated dimensions by more than 1/360 of the length of unit or 1/8 inch (3 mm), whichever is greater, but in no case by more than 1/4 inch (6 mm).

3. Warp, Bow, and Twist: Not to exceed 1/360 of the length of unit or 1/8 inch (3 mm), whichever is greater.

4. Location of Grooves, False Joints, Holes, Anchorages, and Similar Features: Do not vary from indicated position by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) on formed surfaces of units and 3/8 inch (10 mm) on unformed surfaces.

E. Cure units as follows:

1. Cure units in enclosed moist curing room at 95 to 100 percent relative humidity and temperature of 100 deg F (38 deg C) for 12 hours or 70 deg F (21 deg C) for 16 hours.

2. Keep units damp and continue curing to comply with one of the following:

a. No fewer than five days at mean daily temperature of 70 deg F (21 deg C) or above.

b. No fewer than six days at mean daily temperature of 60 deg F (16 deg C) or above. c. No fewer than seven days at mean daily temperature of 50 deg F (10 deg C) or

above. d. No fewer than eight days at mean daily temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C) or

above.


Rotary PM Stamp




F. Acid etch units after curing to remove cement film from surfaces to be exposed to view.

G. Colors and Textures: To be selected by Architect based upon one of the following combinations that best matches the light sandblasted exposed to view concrete foundations with our regional quartzite aggregates;

a. Color: Custom color match to approved ‘decorative unit masonry unit’ color

(Glacier Gray) or approved equal. b. Texture: Light Acid-Etch (LAE).

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Anchors: Type and size indicated, fabricated from Type 304 stainless steel complying with ASTM A 240/A 240M, ASTM A 276, or ASTM A 666.

B. Dowels: 1/2-inch- (12-mm-) diameter, round bars, fabricated from Type 304 stainless steel complying with ASTM A 240/A 240M, ASTM A 276, or ASTM A 666.

2.4 MORTAR MIXES

A. Comply with requirements in Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for mortar mixes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 SETTING CAST STONE IN MORTAR

A. Install cast stone units to comply with requirements in Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry."

B. Set cast stone as indicated on Drawings. Set units accurately in locations indicated with edges and faces aligned according to established relationships and indicated tolerances.

1. Install anchors, supports, fasteners, and other attachments indicated or necessary to secure units in place.

2. Coordinate installation of cast stone with installation of flashing specified in other Sections.

C. Wet joint surfaces thoroughly before applying mortar or setting in mortar.

D. Set units in full bed of mortar with full head joints unless otherwise indicated.


Rotary PM Stamp




1. Set units with joints 3/8 to 1/2 inch (10 to 13 mm) wide unless otherwise indicated. 2. Build anchors and ties into mortar joints as units are set. 3. Fill dowel holes and anchor slots with mortar. 4. Fill collar joints solid as units are set. 5. Build concealed flashing into mortar joints as units are set. 6. Keep head joints in coping and other units with exposed horizontal surfaces open to

receive sealant. 7. Keep joints at shelf angles open to receive sealant.

E. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated.

F. Provide sealant joints at copings and other horizontal surfaces, at expansion, control, and pressure-relieving joints, and at locations indicated.

1. Keep joints free of mortar and other rigid materials. 2. Build in compressible foam-plastic joint fillers where indicated. 3. Form joint of width indicated, but not less than 3/8 inch (10 mm). 4. Prime cast stone surfaces to receive sealant and install compressible backer rod in joints

before applying sealant unless otherwise indicated. 5. Prepare and apply sealant of type and at locations indicated to comply with applicable

requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

3.3 SETTING ANCHORED CAST STONE WITH SEALANT-FILLED JOINTS

A. Set cast stone as indicated on Drawings. Set units accurately in locations indicated with edges and faces aligned according to established relationships and indicated tolerances.

1. Install anchors, supports, fasteners, and other attachments indicated or necessary to secure units in place.

2. Shim and adjust anchors, supports, and accessories to set cast stone in locations indicated with uniform joints.

B. Keep cavities open where unfilled space is indicated between back of cast stone units and backup wall; do not fill cavities with mortar or grout.

C. Fill anchor holes with sealant.

1. Where dowel holes occur at pressure-relieving joints, provide compressible material at ends of dowels.

D. Set cast stone supported on clip or continuous angles on resilient setting shims. Use material of thickness required to maintain uniform joint widths. Hold shims back from face of cast stone a distance at least equal to width of joint.

E. Keep joints free of mortar and other rigid materials. Remove temporary shims and spacers from joints after anchors and supports are secured in place and cast stone units are anchored. Do not begin sealant installation until temporary shims and spacers are removed.


Rotary PM Stamp




1. Form open joint of width indicated, but not less than 3/8 inch (10 mm).

F. Prime cast stone surfaces to receive sealant and install compressible backer rod in joints before applying sealant unless otherwise indicated.

G. Prepare and apply sealant of type and at locations indicated to comply with applicable requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace stained and otherwise damaged units and units not matching approved Samples. Cast stone may be repaired if methods and results are approved by Architect.

B. Replace units in a manner that results in cast stone matching approved Samples, complying with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement.



Rotary PM Stamp






Rotary PM Stamp



METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 1

SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment. 2. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified

in other Sections. 3. Loose bearing and leveling plates for applications where they are not specified in other

Sections.

B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section:

C. Related Sections:

1. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, wedge-type inserts, and other items cast into concrete.

2. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for installing loose lintels, anchor bolts, and other items built into unit masonry.

3. Division 06 Sections for metal framing anchors.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Paint products. 2. Grout.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

D. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer.


Rotary PM Stamp




E. Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.

F. Welding certificates.

G. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.

B. Coordinate installation of anchorages and steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METALS, GENERAL

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

2.2 FERROUS METALS

A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.

C. Rolled-Stainless-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 793.

D. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing.

E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.


Rotary PM Stamp




2.3 NONFERROUS METALS

A. Aluminum Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 6061-T6.

B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T6.

C. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 443.0-F.

D. Bronze Castings: ASTM B 584, Alloy UNS No. C83600 (leaded red brass) or No. C84400 (leaded semired brass).

2.4 FASTENERS

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.

1. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. 2. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel. 3. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening nickel silver.

B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 325, Type 3 (ASTM A 325M, Type 3); with hex nuts, ASTM A 563, Grade C3 (ASTM A 563M, Class 8S3); and, where indicated, flat washers.

C. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M); with hex nuts, ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M); and, where indicated, flat washers; Alloy Group 1 (A1).

D. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.

1. Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized.

E. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3 (ASME B18.6.7M).

F. Lag Screws: ASME B18.2.1 (ASME B18.2.3.8M).

G. Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22.1 (ASME B18.22M).

H. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.1 (ASME B18.21.2M).

I. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.


Rotary PM Stamp




J. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip galvanized per ASTM F 2329.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.

B. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer.

C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.

D. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

E. Concrete: Comply with requirements in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa).

2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.

D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.

E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately.


Rotary PM Stamp




4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

G. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.

I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.

1. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches (3.2 by 38 mm), with a minimum 6-inch (150-mm) embedment and 2-inch (50-mm) hook, not less than 8 inches (200 mm) from ends and corners of units and 24 inches (600 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work.

B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction.

C. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated.

2.8 SHELF ANGLES

A. Fabricate shelf angles from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to concrete framing. Provide horizontally slotted holes to receive 3/4-inch (19-mm) bolts, spaced not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from ends and 24 inches (600 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

1. Provide mitered and welded units at corners. 2. Provide open joints in shelf angles at expansion and control joints. Make open joint

approximately 2 inches (50 mm) larger than expansion or control joint.

B. Galvanize shelf angles located in exterior walls.


Rotary PM Stamp




2.9 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS

A. Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. Fabricate in single lengths for each opening unless otherwise indicated. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated.

B. Size loose lintels to provide bearing length at each side of openings equal to 1/12 of clear span but not less than 8 inches (200 mm) unless otherwise indicated.

C. Galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls.

D. Prime loose steel lintels located in interior walls with zinc-rich primer.

2.10 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES

A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete.

2.11 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.

C. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into surrounding surface.

2.12 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.

1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion.

B. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.

1. Shop prime with universal shop primer indicated.


Rotary PM Stamp




PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.

B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors.

E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.

F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with the following:

1. Cast Aluminum: Heavy coat of bituminous paint. 2. Extruded Aluminum: Two coats of clear lacquer.

3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings.

B. Anchor supports for operable partitions securely to and rigidly brace from building structure.

C. Support steel girders on solid grouted masonry, concrete, or steel pipe columns. Secure girders with anchor bolts embedded in grouted masonry or concrete or with bolts through top plates of pipe columns.


Rotary PM Stamp




1. Where grout space under bearing plates is indicated for girders supported on concrete or masonry, install as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article.

3.3 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.

B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout.

1. Use nonshrink grout, either metallic or nonmetallic, in concealed locations where not exposed to moisture; use nonshrink, nonmetallic grout in exposed locations unless otherwise indicated.

2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.


A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil (0.05-mm) dry film thickness.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.



Rotary PM Stamp



ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 1

SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Framing with dimension lumber. 2. Wood blocking and nailers. 3. Wood furring and grounds. 4. Plywood backing panels.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 06 Section "Sheathing." 2. Division 06 Section "Shop-Fabricated Wood Trusses."

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Exposed Framing: Framing not concealed by other construction.

B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal (38 mm actual) or greater but less than 5 inches nominal (114 mm actual) in least dimension.

C. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:

1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association. 2. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority. 3. RIS: Redwood Inspection Service. 4. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 5. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 6. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.


Rotary PM Stamp




1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.

2. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.

3. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment.

B. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the ALSC Board of Review.

C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with building code in effect for Project:

1. Wood-preservative-treated wood. 2. Power-driven fasteners. 3. Powder-actuated fasteners. 4. Expansion anchors. 5. Metal framing anchors.


A. Source Limitations for Engineered Wood Products: Obtain each type of engineered wood product through one source from a single manufacturer.


A. Stack lumber flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on

end or back of each piece or omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by grading agency.


Rotary PM Stamp




3. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber.

4. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2, except that lumber that is not in contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be treated according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX).

1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium.

B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.

C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review.

D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:

1. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete.

2. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior masonry or concrete walls.

3. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade.

2.3 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING

A. Maximum Moisture Content: 15 percent.

B. Framing Other Than Interior Partitions: Construction or No. 2 grade and any of the following species:

1. Douglas fir-larch; WCLIB or WWPA. 2. Mixed southern pine; SPIB. 3. Hem-fir; WCLIB or WWPA. 4. Douglas fir-larch (north); NLGA.

C. Joists, Rafters, and Other Framing Not Listed Above: Construction or No. 2 grade and any of the following species:

1. Mixed southern pine; SPIB. 2. Hem-fir; WCLIB or WWPA. 3. Douglas fir-larch (north); NLGA.


Rotary PM Stamp




2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following:

1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Furring. 4. Grounds.

B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content of any species.

C. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades:

1. Mixed southern pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB. 2. Hem-fir or hem-fir (north), Construction or 2 Common grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or

WWPA.

D. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose.

E. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.

F. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.

2.5 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS

A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2-inch (13-mm) nominal thickness.

2.6 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture.

1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.

C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.


Rotary PM Stamp




D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.

E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1 (ASME B18.2.3.8M).

F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.

G. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency.

1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5.

2.7 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS

A. Basis-of-Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated on Drawings or comparable products by one of the following:

1. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co. 2. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc. 3. USP Structural Connectors.

B. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those of products of manufacturers listed. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency.

C. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) coating designation.

1. Use for interior locations where stainless steel is not indicated.

D. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304.

1. Use for exterior locations and where indicated.


A. Water-Repellent Preservative: NWWDA-tested and -accepted formulation containing 3-iodo-2-propynyl butyl carbamate, combined with an insecticide containing chloropyrifos as its active ingredient.


Rotary PM Stamp




PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.

B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated.

C. Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Do not splice structural members between supports, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim.

1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c.

F. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.

G. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber.

1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water.

H. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following:

1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.

I. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; do not countersink nail heads, unless otherwise indicated.


Rotary PM Stamp




3.2 WOOD GROUND, BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION

A. Install where indicated and where required for screeding or attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved.

B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure-preservative-treated, key-beveled lumber not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required.

3.3 WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION

A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for tolerance of finish work.

B. Furring to Receive Plywood or Hardboard Paneling: Install 1-by-3-inch nominal- (19-by-63-mm actual-) size furring horizontally and vertically at 24 inches (610 mm) o.c.

C. Furring to Receive Gypsum Board: Install 1-by-2-inch nominal- (19-by-38-mm actual-) size furring vertically at 16 inches (406 mm) o.c.

3.4 CEILING JOIST AND RAFTER FRAMING INSTALLATION

A. Ceiling Joists: Install ceiling joists with crown edge up and complying with requirements specified above for floor joists. Face nail to ends of parallel rafters.

1. Where ceiling joists are at right angles to rafters, provide additional short joists parallel to rafters from wall plate to first joist; nail to ends of rafters and to top plate and nail to first joist or anchor with framing anchors or metal straps. Provide 1-by-8-inch nominal- (19-by-184-mm actual-) size or 2-by-4-inch nominal- (38-by-89-mm actual-) size stringers spaced 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. crosswise over main ceiling joists.

B. Rafters: Notch to fit exterior wall plates and toe nail or use metal framing anchors. Double rafters to form headers and trimmers at openings in roof framing, if any, and support with metal hangers. Where rafters abut at ridge, place directly opposite each other and nail to ridge member or use metal ridge hangers.

1. At valleys, provide double-valley rafters of size indicated or, if not indicated, of same thickness as regular rafters and 2 inches (50 mm) deeper. Bevel ends of jack rafters for full bearing against valley rafters.

2. At hips, provide hip rafter of size indicated or, if not indicated, of same thickness as regular rafters and 2 inches (50 mm) deeper. Bevel ends of jack rafters for full bearing against hip rafter.


Rotary PM Stamp




C. Provide collar beams (ties) as indicated or, if not indicated, provide 1-by-6-inch nominal- (19-by-140-mm actual-) size boards between every third pair of rafters, but not more than 48 inches (1219 mm) o.c. Locate below ridge member, at third point of rafter span. Cut ends to fit roof slope and nail to rafters.

D. Provide special framing as indicated for eaves, overhangs, dormers, and similar conditions, if any.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.



Rotary PM Stamp



SHEATHING 061600 - 1

SECTION 061600 – SHEATHING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Roof sheathing. 2. Wall sheathing.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for plywood backing panels.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.

1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.

2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials.

3. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated plywood both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5516.

4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.

5. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment.


A. Stack panels flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect sheathing from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.


Rotary PM Stamp




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS

A. Emissions: Products shall meet the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

B. Plywood: Either DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2 unless otherwise indicated.

C. Oriented Strand Board: DOC PS 2.

D. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified, but not less than thickness indicated.

E. Factory mark panels to indicate compliance with applicable standard.

2.2 WALL SHEATHING

A. Plywood Wall Sheathing: Exterior Exposure 1, Structural I sheathing.

1. Span Rating: Not less than 32/16. 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm).

B. Oriented-Strand-Board Wall Sheathing: Exposure 1, Structural I sheathing.

1. Span Rating: Not less than 32/16. 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm).

C. Cementitious Backer Units: ASTM C 1325, Type A.


a. C-Cure; C-Cure Board 990. b. Custom Building Products; Wonderboard. c. FinPan, Inc.; Util-A-Crete Concrete Backer Board. d. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board. e. Prior approved equal.

2. Thickness: As indicated.

2.3 ROOF SHEATHING

A. Plywood Roof Sheathing: APA-Rated Exposure 1, sheathing on sloped roofs.

1. Span Rating: Not less than 32/16. 2. Nominal Thickness: As indicated on drawings


Rotary PM Stamp




B. Oriented-Strand-Board Roof Sheathing: APA-Rated Exposure 1, sheathing on sloped roofs.

1. Span Rating: Not less than 32/16. 2. Nominal Thickness: As indicated on drawings

2.4 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture.

1. For roof sheathing, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.


C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.

D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.


A. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with APA AFG-01 that is approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by manufacturers of both adhesives and panels.

1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2. Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints so that pieces do not span between fewer than three support members.

B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction unless otherwise indicated.

C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following:

1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's "International Building Code."


Rotary PM Stamp




3. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2), "Alternate Attachments," in ICC's "International Residential Code for One- and Two-Family Dwellings."

D. Use common wire nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections. Install fasteners without splitting wood.

E. Coordinate wall and roof sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed assembly.

F. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural support elements.

G. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is forecast.

3.2 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30, "Engineered Wood Construction Guide," for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated.

B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below:

1. Wall and Roof Sheathing:

a. Nail to wood framing. b. Space panels 1/8 inch (3 mm) apart at edges and ends.

3.3 CEMENTITIOUS BACKER UNIT INSTALLATION

A. Install panels and treat joints according to ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's written instructions for type of application indicated.



Rotary PM Stamp



SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 061753 - 1

SECTION 061753 - SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Wood roof trusses 2. Wood girder trusses. 3. Wood truss bracing. 4. Metal truss accessories.


1. Division 06 Section "Sheathing" for roof sheathing.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Metal-Plate-Connected Wood Trusses: Planar structural units consisting of metal-plate-connected members fabricated from dimension lumber and cut and assembled before delivery to Project site.


A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for trusses.

1. Show location, pitch, span, camber, configuration, and spacing for each type of truss required.

2. Indicate sizes, stress grades, and species of lumber. 3. Indicate locations of permanent bracing required to prevent buckling of individual truss

members due to design loads. 4. Indicate locations, sizes, and materials for permanent bracing required to prevent

buckling of individual truss members due to design loads. 5. Indicate type, size, material, finish, design values, orientation, and location of metal

connector plates. 6. Show splice details and bearing details.


Rotary PM Stamp




B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For metal-plate-connected wood trusses indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Metal Connector-Plate Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer that is a member of TPI and that complies with quality-control procedures in TPI 1 for manufacture of connector plates.

1. Manufacturer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility.

2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, licensed in South Dakota.

B. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that participates in a recognized quality-assurance program that complies with quality-control procedures in TPI 1 and that involves third-party inspection by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to Architect and authorities having jurisdiction


A. Handle and store trusses to comply with recommendations in TPI BCSI, "Building Component Safety Information: Guide to Good Practice for Handling, Installing, Restraining, & Bracing Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses."

1. Store trusses flat, off of ground, and adequately supported to prevent lateral bending. 2. Protect trusses from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. 3. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

B. Inspect trusses showing discoloration, corrosion, or other evidence of deterioration. Discard and replace trusses that are damaged or defective.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements," to design metal-plate-connected wood trusses.

B. Structural Performance: Provide metal-plate-connected wood trusses capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated. Comply with requirements in TPI 1 unless more stringent requirements are specified below.

1. Design Loads: As indicated. 2. Maximum Deflection Under Design Loads:

a. Roof Trusses: Live load vertical deflection of 1/480 of span.


Rotary PM Stamp




C. Comply with applicable requirements and recommendations of the following publications:

1. TPI 1, "National Design Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Truss Construction." 2. TPI DSB, "Recommended Design Specification for Temporary Bracing of Metal Plate

Connected Wood Trusses." 3. TPI BCSI, "Building Component Safety Information: Guide to Good Practice for

Handling, Installing, Restraining, & Bracing Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses."

D. Wood Structural Design Standard: Comply with applicable requirements in AF&PA's "National Design Specifications for Wood Construction" and its "Supplement."

2.2 DIMENSION LUMBER

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, omit grade stamp and

provide certificates of grade compliance issued by grading agency. 3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S. 4. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing.

B. Permanent Bracing: Provide wood bracing that complies with requirements for miscellaneous lumber in Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry."

2.3 METAL CONNECTOR PLATES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following :

1. Alpine Engineered Products, Inc.; an ITW company. 2. Cherokee Metal Products, Inc.; Masengill Machinery Company. 3. CompuTrus, Inc. 4. MiTek Industries, Inc.; a subsidiary of Berkshire Hathaway Inc. 5. Truswal Systems Corporation; an ITW company. 6. Prior approved equal.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain metal connector plates from single manufacturer.

C. General: Fabricate connector plates to comply with TPI 1.

D. Hot-Dip Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M; Structural Steel (SS), high-strength low-alloy steel Type A (HSLAS Type A), or high-strength low-alloy steel Type B (HSLAS Type B); G60 (Z180) coating designation; and not less than 0.036 inch (0.9 mm) thick.

1. Use for interior locations unless otherwise indicated.


Rotary PM Stamp




E. Hot-Dip Heavy-Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M; Structural Steel (SS), high-strength low-alloy steel Type A (HSLAS Type A), or high-strength low-alloy steel Type B (HSLAS Type B); G185 (Z550) coating designation; and not less than 0.036 inch (0.9 mm) thick.

1. Use for wood-preservative-treated lumber and where indicated.

2.4 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture.

1. Provide fasteners for use with metal framing anchors that comply with written recommendations of metal framing manufacturer.


2.5 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS AND ACCESSORIES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co. 2. KC Metals Products, Inc. 3. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc. 4. USP Structural Connectors. 5. Prior approved equal.

B. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated of products of manufacturers listed. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency.

C. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) coating designation.

1. Use for interior locations unless otherwise indicated.

D. Hot-Dip Heavy-Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M; Structural Steel (SS), high-strength low-alloy steel Type A (HSLAS Type A), or high-strength low-alloy steel Type B (HSLAS Type B); G185 (Z550) coating designation; and not less than 0.036 inch (0.9 mm) thick.

1. Use for wood-preservative-treated lumber and where indicated.

E. Roof Truss Bracing/Spacers: U-shaped channels, 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide by 1 inch (25 mm) deep by 0.040 inch (1.0 mm) thick, made to fit between two adjacent trusses and accurately space them apart, and with tabs having metal teeth for fastening to trusses.


Rotary PM Stamp





A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20, with dry film containing a minimum of 94 percent zinc dust by weight.

2.7 FABRICATION

A. Cut truss members to accurate lengths, angles, and sizes to produce close-fitting joints.

B. Fabricate metal connector plates to sizes, configurations, thicknesses, and anchorage details required to withstand design loads for types of joint designs indicated.

C. Assemble truss members in design configuration indicated; use jigs or other means to ensure uniformity and accuracy of assembly with joints closely fitted to comply with tolerances in TPI 1. Position members to produce design camber indicated.

1. Fabricate wood trusses within manufacturing tolerances in TPI 1.

D. Connect truss members by metal connector plates located and securely embedded simultaneously in both sides of wood members by air or hydraulic press.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install wood trusses only after supporting construction is in place and is braced and secured.

B. If trusses are delivered to Project site in more than one piece, assemble trusses before installing.

C. Hoist trusses in place by lifting equipment suited to sizes and types of trusses required, exercising care not to damage truss members or joints by out-of-plane bending or other causes.

D. Install and brace trusses according to TPI recommendations and as indicated.

E. Install trusses plumb, square, and true to line and securely fasten to supporting construction.

F. Space trusses as indicated; adjust and align trusses in location before permanently fastening.

G. Anchor trusses securely at bearing points; use metal truss tie-downs or floor truss hangers as applicable. Install fasteners through each fastener hole in metal framing anchors according to manufacturer's fastening schedules and written instructions.

H. Securely connect each truss ply required for forming built-up girder trusses.

1. Anchor trusses to girder trusses as indicated.

I. Install and fasten permanent bracing during truss erection and before construction loads are applied. Anchor ends of permanent bracing where terminating at walls or beams.


Rotary PM Stamp




1. Install bracing to comply with Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry." 2. Install and fasten strongback bracing vertically against vertical web of parallel-chord

floor trusses at centers indicated.

J. Install wood trusses within installation tolerances in TPI 1.

K. Do not alter trusses in field. Do not cut, drill, notch, or remove truss members.

L. Replace wood trusses that are damaged or do not meet requirements.

1. Damaged trusses may be repaired according to truss repair details signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for truss design, when approved by Architect.

3.2 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.

B. Protect wood trusses from weather. If, despite protection, wood trusses become wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.

C. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on exposed surfaces with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Protective Coating: Clean and prepare exposed surfaces of metal connector plates. Brush apply primer, when part of coating system, and one coat of protective coating.

1. Apply materials to provide minimum dry film thickness recommended by coating system manufacturer.



Rotary PM Stamp



EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062013 - 1

SECTION 062013 - EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Exterior wood trim. 2. Plywood siding. 3. Plywood soffits. 4. Wood soffits.


1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for furring, blocking, and other carpentry work not exposed to view.


A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials, dimensions, profiles, textures, and colors and include construction and application details.

1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical-treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. Include chemical-treatment manufacturer's written instructions for finishing treated material.

2. Include copies of warranties from chemical-treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment.

B. Samples for Verification:

1. For each species and cut of lumber and panel products, with half of exposed surface finished; 50 sq. in. (300 sq. cm) for lumber and 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm) for panels.

2. For siding and soffits, 50 sq. in. (300 sq. cm) for board types and 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm) for panels.



Rotary PM Stamp




A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire-retardant-treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested.


A. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect materials from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecast weather conditions permit work to be performed and at least one coat of specified finish can be applied without exposure to rain, snow, or dampness.

B. Do not install finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty for Hardboard Siding and Trim: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace siding that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, deformation or deterioration beyond normal weathering. 1. Warranty Period for Siding and Trim (Excluding Finish): 25 years from date of

Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and the following grading rules:

1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association, "Standard Grading Rules for Northeastern Lumber."

2. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority, "Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber."

3. RIS: Redwood Inspection Service, "Standard Specifications for Grades of California Redwood Lumber."

4. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau, "Standard Grading Rules for Southern Pine Lumber."


Rotary PM Stamp




5. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau, Standard No. 17, "Grading Rules for West Coast Lumber."

6. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association, "Western Lumber Grading Rules."

B. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency indicating grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill.

1. For exposed lumber, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece, or omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by inspection agency.

2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC3b.

1. Kiln dry lumber and plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 and 18 percent respectively.

2. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium.

3. For exposed items indicated to receive transparent finish, do not use chemical formulations that contain colorants or that bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes.

4. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.

5. Mark lumber with treatment-quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the American Lumber Standard Committee's Board of Review.

a. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece or omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by inspection agency.

6. Application: All exterior lumber.

2.3 EXTERIOR WODD TRIM

A. Lumber Trim for Unfinished Applications:

1. Species and Grade: Hem-fir, pressure-preservative treated; 1 Common; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.

2. Species and Grade: Southern pine, pressure-preservative treated; B & B; SPIB. 3. Maximum Moisture Content: 15 percent. 4. Finger Jointing: Allowed if made with wet-use adhesive complying with ASTM D 5572. 5. Face Surface: Surfaced (smooth).

B. Lumber Trim for Semitransparent-Stained Finish and Clear Finish:

1. Species and Grade: Redwood, Clear All Heart and Clear; RIS. 2. Species and Grade: Western red cedar, Clear Heart VG (Vertical Grain) and Clear Heart,

Grade A; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.


Rotary PM Stamp




3. Maximum Moisture Content: 15 percent with at least 85 percent of shipment at 12 percent or less.

4. Finger Jointing: Not allowed. 5. Face Surface: Surfaced (smooth) and Saw textured.

C. Lumber Trim for Painted Finish:

1. Species and Grade: Western red cedar, Grade A; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 2. Species and Grade: Northern white cedar, D Select; NeLMA or NLGA. 3. Maximum Moisture Content: 15 percent. 4. Finger Jointing: Allowed if made with wet-use adhesive complying with ASTM D 5572. 5. Face Surface: Surfaced (smooth). 6. Factory Priming: Factory coated on faces and edges with exterior primer compatible

with topcoats specified.

2.4 WOOD SOFFITS

A. Provide kiln-dried lumber siding complying with DOC PS 20.

B. Species and Grade: Clear VG (Vertical Grain) Heart for Semi-Transparent finish, western red cedar or douglas fir; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.

C. Soffit Pattern: V-edge, smooth-faced tongue-and-groove pattern with eased edges, actual face width (coverage) and thickness of 5-1/8 by 23/32 inch (130 by 18 mm), measured at 19 percent moisture content.

D. Trims: 5/4 S4S x size indicated on drawings.

E. Finish: Shop applied stain and finish coat as described in Section 099300 “Staining and Transparent Finishing”.

2.5 PLYWOOD SIDING AND PLYWOOD SOFFITS

A. Plywood Type: APA-rated siding, in panel sizes indicated.

1. Face Grade: 303-OC or 4-W.

B. Thickness: As indicated.

C. Face Species: Western red cedar.

D. Pattern: Plain and Texture 1-11; grooves 4 inches (101.6 mm) o.c.

E. Surface: Smooth and Rough sawn; final selection by Architect.



Rotary PM Stamp




A. Fasteners for Exterior Finish Carpentry: Provide nails or screws, in sufficient length to penetrate not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into wood substrate.

1. For face-fastening siding, provide galvanized ringed-shank siding nails or stainless-steel siding nails unless otherwise indicated.

2. For redwood, provide stainless-steel fasteners. 3. For prefinished items, provide matching prefinished aluminum fasteners where face

fastening is required. 4. For pressure-preservative-treated wood, provide stainless-steel fasteners. 5. For applications not otherwise indicated, provide stainless-steel fasteners.

B. Sealants: Latex, complying with ASTM C 834 Type OP, Grade NF and with applicable requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants," recommended by sealant manufacturer and manufacturer of substrates for intended application.


a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolac. b. Bostik, Inc.; Chem-Calk 600. c. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex 600. d. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+. e. Schnee-Morehead, Inc., an ITW company; SM 8200. f. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834. g. Prior approved equal.

C. Flashing: Comply with requirements in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing materials installed in exterior finish carpentry.

1. Horizontal Joint Flashing for Panel Siding: Preformed, prefinished-aluminum, Z-shaped flashing.

2.7 FABRICATION

A. Back out or kerf backs of standing and running trim wider than 5 inches (125 mm), except members with ends exposed in finished work.

B. Ease edges of lumber less than 1 inch (25 mm) in nominal thickness to 1/16-inch (1.5-mm) radius and edges of lumber 1 inch (25 mm) or more in nominal thickness to 1/8-inch (3-mm) radius.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.


Rotary PM Stamp




B. Examine finish carpentry materials before installation. Reject materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.

B. Prime lumber and moldings to be painted, including both faces and edges, unless factory primed. Cut to required lengths and prime ends. Comply with requirements in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting."


A. Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements.

B. Install exterior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where necessary for alignment.

1. Scribe and cut exterior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as recommended by manufacturer.

2. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2438 mm) for level and plumb. Install adjoining exterior finish carpentry with 1/32-inch (0.8-mm) maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16-inch (1.5-mm) maximum offset for reveal installation.

3. Coordinate exterior finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it. Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate exterior finish carpentry.

3.4 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION

A. Install flat-grain lumber with bark side exposed to weather.

B. Install trim with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches (610 mm) long except where necessary.

1. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints. 2. Stagger end joints in adjacent and related members.

C. Fit exterior joints to exclude water. Cope at returns and miter at corners to produce tight-fitting joints with full-surface contact throughout length of joint. Plane backs of casings to provide uniform thickness across joints, where necessary for alignment.

D. Where face fastening is unavoidable, countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand unless otherwise indicated.


Rotary PM Stamp




3.5 SIDING INSTALLATION

A. Install siding to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements.

B. Plywood Siding: Install panels with edges over framing or blocking. Nail at 6 inches (150 mm) o.c. at panel perimeter and 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. at intermediate supports unless manufacturer recommends closer spacing. Leave 1/16-inch (1.5-mm) gap between adjacent panels and 1/8-inch (3-mm) gap at perimeter, openings, and horizontal joints unless otherwise recommended by panel manufacturer.

1. Seal butt joints at inside and outside corners and at trim locations. 2. Install continuous metal flashing at horizontal panel joints. 3. Apply battens and corner trim as indicated. Countersink nail heads, fill flush, and sand

filler.

C. Flashing: Install metal flashing as indicated on Drawings and as recommended by siding manufacturer.

D. Finish: Apply finish within two weeks of installation.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Replace exterior finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements. Exterior finish carpentry may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Clean exterior finish carpentry on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.

3.8 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products from damage from weather and other causes during construction.

B. Remove and replace finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.



Rotary PM Stamp






Rotary PM Stamp



METAL ROOF PANELS 074113 - 1

SECTION 074113 - METAL ROOF PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Standing-seam metal roof panels.


1. Division 06 Section "Shop-Fabricated Wood Trusses” for wood roof trusses.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Metal Roof Panel Assembly: Metal roof panels, attachment system components, miscellaneous

metal framing, thermal insulation, and accessories necessary for a complete weathertight

roofing system.


A. General Performance: Metal roof panels shall comply with performance requirements without

failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.

B. Delegated Design: Design metal roof panel assembly, including comprehensive engineering

analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design

criteria indicated.

C. Air Infiltration: Air leakage through assembly of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. (0.3 L/s per

sq. m) of roof area when tested according to ASTM E 1680 at the following test-pressure

difference:

1. Test-Pressure Difference: Positive and negative not less than 6.24 kPa as per ASTM

E283/1680.

D. Water Penetration: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 1646 at the

following test-pressure difference:

1. Test-Pressure Difference: 20 percent of positive design wind pressure, but not less than

6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa) and not more than 12.0 lbf/sq. ft. (575 Pa).


Rotary PM Stamp




E. Hydrostatic-Head Resistance: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 2140.

F. Wind-Uplift Resistance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with UL 580 for

wind-uplift-resistance class indicated.

1. Uplift Rating: UL 90.

G. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface

temperature changes. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar

heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient, material surfaces.

H. Thermal Performance: Provide insulated metal roof panel assemblies with thermal-resistance

value (R-value) indicated when tested according to ASTM C 518.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material

descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of

roof panel and accessory.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of metal roof panels; details of edge

conditions, side-seam and end lap joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, trim, flashings,

closures, and accessories; and special details. Distinguish between factory- and field-assembled

work.

1. Accessories: Include details of the following items, at a scale of not less than 1-1/2

inches per 12 inches (1:10):

a. Flashing and trim.

b. Roof penetrations; pipes vents, or similar.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size

indicated below:

1. Metal Roof Panels: 12 inches (300 mm) long by actual panel width. Include fasteners,

clips, closures, and other metal roof panel accessories.

2. Trim and Closures: 12 inches (300 mm) long. Include fasteners and other exposed

accessories.

3. Accessories: 12-inch- (300-mm-) long Samples for each type of accessory.

D. Coordination Drawings: Roof plans, drawn to scale, on which the following are shown and

coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:

1. Roof panels and attachments.

E. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that roof panels comply with

energy performance requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.


Rotary PM Stamp




1. Submit evidence of meeting performance requirements.

F. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified

testing agency, for each product.

H. Field quality-control reports.

I. Maintenance Data: For metal roof panels to include in maintenance manuals.

J. Warranties: Samples of special warranties.


A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of metal roof panels from single source from single

manufacturer.

D. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide metal roof panels having insulation core material with

the following surface-burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products

according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate

markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.

2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

E. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide metal roof panels identical to those of

assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a qualified testing agency. Identify

products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of

another qualified testing agency.

2. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136.

F. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to

demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

1. Build mockup of typical roof eave, including fascia, as shown on Drawings;

approximately four panels wide by full eave width, including insulation, underlayment,

attachments, and accessories.

2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract

Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations

in writing.

3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of

Substantial Completion.


Rotary PM Stamp





A. Deliver components, sheets, metal roof panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be

damaged or deformed. Package metal roof panels for protection during transportation and

handling.

B. Unload, store, and erect metal roof panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting,

and surface damage.

C. Stack metal roof panels on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and

ventilated covering. Store metal roof panels to ensure dryness. Do not store metal roof panels

in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.

D. Protect strippable protective covering on metal roof panels from exposure to sunlight and high

humidity, except to extent necessary for period of metal roof panel installation.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather

conditions permit metal roof panel work to be performed according to manufacturer's written

instructions and warranty requirements.

B. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of construction contiguous with metal roof

panels by field measurements before fabrication.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with

actual equipment provided.

B. Coordinate metal roof panels with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, and construction of decks,

parapets, walls, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive

installation.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace metal roof panel assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within specified

warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing.

b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

weathering.

2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.


Rotary PM Stamp




B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer

agrees to repair finish or replace metal roof panels that show evidence of deterioration of

factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.

b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.

c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.

2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PANEL MATERIALS

A. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet metallic coated by the hot-dip

process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.

1. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating

designation; structural quality.

2. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 coating

designation, Grade 40 (Class AZM150 coating designation, Grade 275); structural

quality.

3. Surface: Smooth, flat finish.

4. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:

a. 2-Coat Fluoropolymer (min.): AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not

less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and

apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin

manufacturers' written instructions.

5. Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard white or light-

colored acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a

minimum total dry film thickness of 0.3 mil (0.010 mm).

B. Panel Sealants:

1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound

sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic,

nonstaining tape 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide and 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick.

2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; elastomeric polyurethane, polysulfide, or silicone sealant;

of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in metal roof panels

and remain weathertight; and as recommended in writing by metal roof panel

manufacturer.

3. Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTM C 1311.

2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS


Rotary PM Stamp




A. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: 30 to 40 mils (0.76 to 1.0 mm) thick minimum,

consisting of slip-resisting, polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-

modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when

recommended by underlayment manufacturer.

1. Thermal Stability: Stable after testing at 240 deg F (116 deg C); ASTM D 1970.

2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Passes after testing at minus 20 deg F (29 deg C);

ASTM D 1970.


a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc., Div. of Carlisle Companies Inc.;

CCW WIP 300HT.

b. Grace Construction Products; a unit of Grace, W. R. & Co.; Ultra.

c. Henry Company; Blueskin PE200 HT.

d. Metal-Fab Manufacturing, LLC; MetShield.

e. Owens Corning; WeatherLock Metal High Temperature Underlayment.

f. Prior approved equal.


A. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end-welded

studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed

fasteners with heads matching color of metal roof panels by means of plastic caps or factory-

applied coating. Provide EPDM, PVC, or neoprene sealing washers.

B. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil

(0.4-mm) dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of

asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.

2.4 STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS

A. General: Provide factory-formed metal roof panels designed to be installed by lapping and

interconnecting raised side edges of adjacent panels with joint type indicated and mechanically

attaching panels to supports using concealed clips in side laps. Include clips, cleats, pressure

plates, and accessories required for weathertight installation.

1. Steel Panel Systems: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with

ASTM E 1514.

B. Vertical-Rib, Snap-Joint, Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Formed with vertical ribs at panel

edges and flat pan between ribs; designed for sequential installation by mechanically attaching

panels to supports using concealed clips located under one side of panels and engaging opposite

edge of adjacent panels, and snapping panels together.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

a. Petersen Aluminum Corporation.


Rotary PM Stamp




b. Firestone – Una-Clad

2. Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet, 24 ga. nominal thickness.

a. Exterior Finish: 2-coat fluoropolymer for 1.0 mil (0.25mm) total dry film

thickness.

b. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer full range of solid color and

non-metallic finishes.

3. Style: Snap-on (UL 90 rated).

4. Clips: Floating to accommodate thermal movement.

5. Panel Coverage: 12 inches (305 mm).

6. Panel Height: 1.0 inch (25 mm).

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Roof Panel Accessories: Provide components approved by roof panel manufacturer and as

required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, corner units,

ridge closures, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match

material and finish of metal roof panels unless otherwise indicated.

1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and ridges, fabricated of same metal as metal roof

panels.

2. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or

closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick, flexible closure

strips; cut or premolded to match metal roof panel profile. Provide closure strips where

indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction.

3. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from

material recommended by manufacturer.

B. Flashing and Trim: Refer to Division 07 Section “Sheet Metal Flashing & Trim”. Provide

flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance.

Locations include, but are not limited to, eaves, rakes, corners, bases, framed openings, ridges,

fasciae, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal roof

panels.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate and finish metal roof panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible,

by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes and as necessary to fulfill indicated

performance requirements. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural

requirements.

B. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full

length of panel.


Rotary PM Stamp




C. Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in

SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal,

and other characteristics of item indicated.

1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling,

and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded

back to form hems.

2. End Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form

seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength.

3. End Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams.

Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.

4. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate

elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards.

5. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not

allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view.

6. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of size and metal thickness recommended by

SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" or by metal roof panel manufacturer for

application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured.

2.7 FINISHES

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for

recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a

strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.

Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of

approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances, metal roof panel supports, and other conditions

affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine primary and secondary roof framing to verify that rafters, purlins, angles, channels,

and other structural panel support members and anchorages have been installed within

alignment tolerances required by metal roof panel manufacturer.

C. Examine solid roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or

blocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal roof panel

manufacturer.


Rotary PM Stamp




D. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal roof panels to verify actual

locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal roof panels before metal roof panel

installation.

E. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to

performance of the Work.

F. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation, including removing projections capable of

interfering with insulation attachment.

B. Substrate Board: Install substrate boards over roof on entire roof surface. Attach with

substrate-board fasteners.

1. Install substrate board with long joints in continuous straight lines, perpendicular to roof

slopes with end joints staggered between rows. Tightly butt substrate boards together.

2. Comply with UL requirements for fire-rated construction.

3.3 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION

A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Apply primer if required by manufacturer. Comply with

temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation. Apply over entire area,

wrinkle free, in shingle fashion to shed water, and with end laps of not less than 6 inches (150

mm) staggered 24 inches (600 mm) between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2

inches (90 mm). Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days.

B. Install flashings to cover underlayment to comply with requirements specified in Division 07

Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

3.4 METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Provide metal roof panels of full length from eave to ridge unless otherwise indicated or

restricted by shipping limitations.

B. Thermal Movement. Rigidly fasten metal roof panels to structure at one and only one location

for each panel. Allow remainder of panel to move freely for thermal expansion and contraction.

Predrill panels for fasteners.

1. Point of Fixity: Fasten each panel along a single line of fixing located at ridge or center

of panel length.

2. Avoid attaching accessories through roof panels in a manner that will inhibit thermal

movement.

C. Install metal roof panels as follows:


Rotary PM Stamp




1. Commence metal roof panel installation and install minimum of 300 sq. ft. (27.8 sq. m.)

in presence of factory-authorized representative.

2. Field cutting of metal panels by torch is not permitted.

3. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment.

4. Provide metal closures at rake edges, rake walls, and each side of ridge and hip caps.

5. Flash and seal metal roof panels with weather closures at eaves, rakes, and perimeter of

all openings.

6. Install ridge and hip caps as metal roof panel work proceeds.

7. Install metal flashing to allow moisture to run over and off metal roof panels.

8. End of splices: Not permitted unless prior approved with Architect. No more than one

(1) will be considered.

D. Fasteners:

1. Steel Roof Panels: Use stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior and

galvanized-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior.

E. Anchor Clips: Anchor metal roof panels and other components of the Work securely in place,

using manufacturer's approved fasteners according to manufacturers' written instructions.

F. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,

protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by

applying rubberized-asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent

separation as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer.

1. Coat back side of roof panels with bituminous coating where roof panels will contact

wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.

G. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for

weatherproof performance of metal roof panel assemblies. Provide types of gaskets, fillers, and

sealants indicated or, if not indicated, types recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer.

1. Seal metal roof panel end laps with double beads of tape or sealant, full width of panel.

Seal side joints where recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer.

2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 07 Section

"Joint Sealants."

3.5 METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION

A. Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with concealed clips at

each standing-seam joint at location, spacing, and with fasteners recommended by

manufacturer.

1. Install clips to supports with self-tapping fasteners.

2. Install pressure plates at locations indicated in manufacturer's written installation

instructions.

3. Snap Joint: Nest standing seams and fasten together by interlocking and completely

engaging factory-applied sealant.


Rotary PM Stamp




3.6 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting and

provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.

1. Install components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including trim,

copings, ridge closures, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips,

and similar items.

B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation

instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners

where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints,

and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.

1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool

marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to

form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in

waterproof and weather-resistant performance.

2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.

Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24

inches (600 mm) of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be

used or would not be sufficiently weather resistant and waterproof, form expansion joints

of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with mastic

sealant (concealed within joints).

C. Pipe Flashing: Form flashing around pipe penetration and metal roof panels. Fasten and seal to

metal roof panels as recommended by manufacturer.

3.7 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal roof panel units within installed tolerance of 1/4

inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m) on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch (3-

mm) offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect

metal roof panel installation, including accessories. Report results in writing.

B. Remove and replace applications of metal roof panels where inspections indicate that they do

not comply with specified requirements.

C. Additional inspections, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of

replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

3.9 CLEANING


Rotary PM Stamp




A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal roof panels are

installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On

completion of metal roof panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal

roof panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.

B. Replace metal roof panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful

repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.



Rotary PM Stamp



SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 1

SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Formed Products:

a. Formed steep-slope roof sheet metal fabrications. b. Formed wall sheet metal fabrications.


1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim layout and seams with sizes and locations of penetrations to be flashed, and joints and seams in adjacent materials.

B. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim installation with adjoining roofing and wall materials, joints, and seams to provide leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.


A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies as indicated shall withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight.

B. Fabricate and install roof edge flashing and copings capable of resisting the following forces according to recommendations in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49:

C. Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that allows for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C) material surfaces.


Rotary PM Stamp




1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each manufactured product and accessory.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim, including plans, elevations, expansion-joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work. Include the following:

1. Identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in Project.

2. Details for forming sheet metal flashing and trim, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions.

3. Details for joining, supporting, and securing sheet metal flashing and trim, including layout of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams.

4. Details of termination points and assemblies, including fixed points. 5. Details of expansion joints and expansion-joint covers, including showing direction of

expansion and contraction. 6. Details of edge conditions, including eaves, ridges, valleys, rakes, crickets, and

counterflashings as applicable. 7. Details of special conditions. 8. Detail formed flashing and trim at a scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches

(1:10).

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sheet metal flashing, trim, and accessory indicated with factory-applied color finishes involving color selection.

D. Qualification Data: For qualified fabricator.

E. Maintenance Data: For sheet metal flashing, trim, and accessories to include in maintenance manuals.

F. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on Drawings.

C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

1. Build mockup of typical roof eave, including built-in gutter, fascia, fascia trim, base/wall typical and special flashing and similar transition areas approximately 10 feet (3.0 m)


Rotary PM Stamp




long, including supporting construction cleats, seams, attachments, underlayment, and accessories.

2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.


A. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials away from uncured concrete and masonry.

B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to the extent necessary for the period of sheet metal flashing and trim installation.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.

2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SHEET METALS

A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.

B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, with temper as required to suit forming operations and performance required; with smooth, flat embossed surface.

1. Factory Prime Coating: Where painting after installation is required, pretreat metal with

white or light-colored, factory-applied, baked-on epoxy primer coat; minimum dry film thickness of 0.2 mil (0.005 mm).


Rotary PM Stamp




2. Color Anodic Finish, Coil Coated: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A42/A44, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker. a. As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors and color densities. b. Color Range: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations

in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

3. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:

a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

4. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of solid and non-metallic color/finishes.

5. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil (0.013 mm).

2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS

A. Felt: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt, nonperforated.

B. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 to 40 mils (0.76 to 1.0 mm) thick, consisting of slip-resisting polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer.

1. Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 240 deg F (116 deg C). 2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus 20 deg F (29

deg C). 3. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc.; CCW WIP 300HT. b. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co.; Ultra. c. Henry Company; Blueskin PE200 HT. d. Metal-Fab Manufacturing, LLC; MetShield. e. Owens Corning; WeatherLock Metal High Temperature Underlayment. f. Prior approved equal.

C. Slip Sheet: Building paper, 3-lb/100 sq. ft. (0.16-kg/sq. m) minimum, rosin sized.


A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing


Rotary PM Stamp




and trim installation and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item unless otherwise indicated.

B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item.

1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head.

a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory-applied coating.

b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal being fastened.

c. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching internal gutter width.

2. Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel. 3. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Hot-dip galvanized steel according

to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 or Series 300 stainless steel.

C. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide and 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick.

D. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane polymer sealant; low modulus; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.

E. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement.

F. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

G. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application.

2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item indicated. Fabricate items at the shop to greatest extent possible.

1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal.

2. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. 3. Form sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool

marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.


Rotary PM Stamp




4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces exposed to view.

B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 20 feet (3 mm in 6 m) on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch (3-mm) offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.

C. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant.

D. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints.

E. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal.

F. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual” and by FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured.

G. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use. Rivet joints where necessary for strength.

H. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.

2.5 STEEP-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Drip Edges: Fabricate from the following materials:

1. Galvanized Steel: 0.022 inch (0.56 mm) thick. 2. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: 0.022 inch (0.56 mm) thick.

B. Eave, Rake, Ridge, and Hip Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.022 inch (0.56 mm) thick. 2. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: 0.022 inch (0.56 mm) thick.

C. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:

1. Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch (0.71 mm) thick. 2. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: 0.028 inch (0.71 mm) thick.


Rotary PM Stamp




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates. 2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely

anchored.

B. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.


3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION

A. General: Install underlayment as indicated on Drawings.

B. Polyethylene Sheet: Install polyethylene sheet with adhesive for anchorage to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under sheet metal flashing and trim. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped and taped joints of not less than 2 inches (50 mm).

C. Felt Underlayment: Install felt underlayment with adhesive for temporary anchorage to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under sheet metal flashing and trim. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches (50 mm).

D. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free. Apply primer if required by underlayment manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer rather than nails for installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches (150 mm) staggered 24 inches (600 mm) between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches (90 mm). Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days.


A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.

1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.

2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.


Rotary PM Stamp




3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches (300 mm) apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners.

4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks.

5. Install sealant tape where indicated. 6. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. 7. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.

B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by SMACNA.

1. Coat back side of sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.

2. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet.

C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24 inches (600 mm) of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints.

D. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate wood sheathing not less than 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) for nails and not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) for wood screws.

E. Seal joints as shown and as required for watertight construction.

1. Where sealant-filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 1 inch (25 mm) into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is moderate, between 40 and 70 deg F (4 and 21 deg C), set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F (4 deg C).

2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

F. Rivets: Rivet joints where indicated and where necessary for strength.

3.4 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, sheet metal manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.

B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for specified wind zone and as indicated. Interlock


Rotary PM Stamp




bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at 16-inch (400-mm) centers.

C. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) over base flashing. Install stainless-steel draw band and tighten.

D. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to pipes that penetrate roof.

3.5 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance of 1/8 inch in 20 feet (3 mm in 6 m) on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch (3-mm) offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.

B. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerances specified in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal Roofing."

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.

B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder.

C. Clean off excess sealants.

D. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of installation, remove unused materials and clean finished surfaces. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.

E. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.



Rotary PM Stamp






Rotary PM Stamp



JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 1

SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Silicone joint sealants. 2. Urethane joint sealants.


1. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for masonry control and expansion joint fillers and gaskets.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:

1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation. 2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint-sealant formulation. 4. Joint-sealant color.

B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements.

C. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each kind of joint sealant from single source from single manufacturer.



Rotary PM Stamp




A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F (5 deg C).

2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for

applications indicated. 4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed

from joint substrates.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following:

1. Movement of the structure caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression.

2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric

contaminants.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

B. Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.

1. Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where sealants are indicated for Use I for joints that will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1247. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized water, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.

2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS


Rotary PM Stamp




A. Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, for Use NT.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Dow Corning Corporation; 790. b. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; SilPruf LM SCS2700. c. Pecora Corporation; 301 NS. d. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; SikaSil-C990. e. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 1.

B. Single-Component, Nonsag, Traffic-Grade, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, for Use T.


a. Dow Corning Corporation; 790. b. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex Sil 728 NS. c. Pecora Corporation; 301 NS. d. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 800.

C. Mildew-Resistant, Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT.


a. Pecora Corporation; 898.

2.3 POLYURETHAN/URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Single-Component or Multi-Compent, Nonsag, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920. Type S, Grade NS, Class 25 to 35, for Use T.


a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolastic Ultra. b. Pacific Polymers International, Inc.; Elasto-Thane 230 Type II. c. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; Sikaflex - 1a+ or 2c NS TG. d. Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 116.

B. Polyurethane/Urethane, S, NS, 100/50, T: Single-component, non-sag, plus 100 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, traffic, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Uses T. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:


Rotary PM Stamp




a. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; Sikaflex -728SL/NS/RCS

pending application location & conditions. b. Approved equal.

C. Polyurethane/Urethane, M or S, NS, 50, T: Multicomponent or Single component, nonsag, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability traffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT.

a. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; Sikaflex – 2c NS EZ Mix/150

LM pending application location & conditions. b. Approved equal.

2.4 JOINT SEALANT BACKING

A. General: Provide sealant backings of material that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material) or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.


A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance.



Rotary PM Stamp




3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.

2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following:

a. Concrete. b. Masonry.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do

not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:

a. Metal. b. Porcelain enamel.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.


Rotary PM Stamp




2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and

replace them with dry materials.

D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints.

E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow

optimum sealant movement capability.

F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not

discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise

indicated.


A. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.


Rotary PM Stamp




3.7 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. b. Isolation and expansion joints at foundations, masonry, precast concrete and cast-

in-place concrete slabs. c. Joints between different materials listed above.

2. Polyurethane/Urethane Joint Sealant: Single or multi-component, non-sag, self-leveling traffic grade.

3. Joint-Sealant Color: Manufacturer’s standard gray or limestone color. a. In specialty/decorative areas; As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full

range of colors to match adjacent surfaces..

B. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal non-traffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Construction joints in cast-in-place concrete. b. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry. c. Joints between metal panels. d. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors and louvers.

2. Silicone Joint Sealant: Single component, non-sag, non-staining, neutral curing, Class 100/50.

3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

C. Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal non-traffic surfaces.

1. Joint Sealant Location:

a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.

b. Joints between walls and counters.

2. Joint Sealant: Mildew resistant, single component, non-sag, neutral curing, Silicone. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.



Rotary PM Stamp






Rotary PM Stamp



HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 1

SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Standard hollow metal doors and frames.


1. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for embedding anchors for hollow metal work into masonry construction.

2. Division 09 Sections "High Performance Coating" for field painting hollow metal doors and frames.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings.

B. Standard Hollow Metal Work: Hollow metal work fabricated according to ANSI/SDI A250.8.

C. Custom Hollow Metal Work: Hollow metal work fabricated according to ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 861.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, fire-resistance rating, temperature-rise ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Include the following:

1. Elevations of each door design. 2. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. 7. Details of accessories.


Rotary PM Stamp




8. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing. 9. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems.

C. Other Action Submittals:

1. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow metal work prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with door hardware schedule.

D. Oversize Construction Certification: For assemblies required to be fire rated and exceeding limitations of labeled assemblies.

E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each type of hollow metal door and frame assembly.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal work from single source from single manufacturer.


A. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.

1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished units.

B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions.

C. Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch- (102-mm-) high wood blocking. Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidity.

1. Provide minimum 1/4-inch (6-mm) space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.


Rotary PM Stamp




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Amweld Building Products, LLC. 2. Benchmark; a division of Therma-Tru Corporation. 3. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company. 4. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company. 5. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company. 6. Prior approved equal.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications.

B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.

C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum A40 (ZF120) metallic coating.

D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z (12G) coating designation; mill phosphatized.

1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.

E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.

F. Powder-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow metal frames of type indicated.

G. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches (102 mm), as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.

H. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil (0.4-mm) dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.

2.3 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS


Rotary PM Stamp




A. General: Provide doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated; fabricated with smooth and raised panel surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces unless otherwise indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8.

1. Design: As indicated in drawings. 2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene,

polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core.

3. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Manufacturer's standard.

a. Beveled Edge: 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3 mm in 50 mm).

4. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.042-inch- (1.0-mm-) thick, end closures or channels of same material as face sheets.

5. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."

B. Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level:

1. Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), Model 2 (Seamless).

C. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates from same material as door face sheets.

D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.

2.4 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES

A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile.

B. Exterior Frames: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet.

1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. 2. Fabricate frames as face welded unless otherwise indicated. 3. Frames for Level 3 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick steel sheet.

C. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcement plates from same material as frames.

2.5 FRAME ANCHORS

A. Jamb Anchors:

1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2


Rotary PM Stamp




inches (50 mm) wide by 10 inches (250 mm) long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch (4.5 mm) thick.

B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick, and as follows:

1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.

2.6 STOPS AND MOLDINGS

A. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8 inch (16 mm) high unless otherwise indicated.

2.7 ACCESSORIES

A. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch (0.4 mm) thick.

2.8 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.

B. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 861.

C. Hollow Metal Doors:

1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration.

D. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames.

1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible.

2. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted.

3. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds per anchor.

4. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:

a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. and as follows:


Rotary PM Stamp




1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high. 2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high. 3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches (2286 to 3048 mm) high. 4) Four anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches

(610 mm) or fraction thereof above 120 inches (3048 mm) high.

5. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors or doors with smoke/acoustical seals, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction.

a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers.

E. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, edge channels, and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.

F. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the Door Hardware Schedule.

1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 861.

2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surface-mounted door hardware.

3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware.

4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with Division 26 Sections.

2.9 STEEL FINISHES

A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating.

1. Shop Primer: Tnemec; Tnemec-Zinc 90-97 applied at 2.5 -3.5 dry mils per coat.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation.

C. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


Rotary PM Stamp




3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

B. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumbness to the following tolerances:

1. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.

2. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.

3. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

4. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from head to floor.

C. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with HMMA 840.

1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling

limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

b. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. c. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been

properly set and secured. d. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim

as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. e. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout

containing antifreezing agents.

2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.

a. Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.


Rotary PM Stamp




3. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and masonry with grout.

4. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:

a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.

b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.

c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor.


A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after installation.

C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.



Rotary PM Stamp



FIXED LOUVERS 089119 - 1

SECTION 089119 - FIXED LOUVERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fixed, extruded-aluminum louvers.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Louver Terminology: Definitions of terms for metal louvers contained in AMCA 501 apply to this Section unless otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

B. Horizontal Louver: Louver with horizontal blades (i.e., the axes of the blades are horizontal).

C. Vertical Louver: Louver with vertical blades (i.e., the axes of the blades are vertical).

D. Drainable-Blade Louver: Louver with blades having gutters that collect water and drain it to channels in jambs and mullions, which carry it to bottom of unit and away from opening.

E. Wind-Driven-Rain-Resistant Louver: Louver that provides specified wind-driven rain performance, as determined by testing according to AMCA 500-L.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. For louvers specified to bear AMCA seal, include printed catalog pages showing specified models with appropriate AMCA Certified Ratings Seals.

B. Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Show frame profiles and blade profiles, angles, and spacing.

1. Show weep paths, gaskets, flashing, sealant, and other means of preventing water intrusion.

2. Show mullion profiles and locations.

C. Samples: For each type of metal finish required.


Rotary PM Stamp




D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For louvers indicated to comply with structural performance requirements, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed according to AMCA 500-L by a qualified testing agency or by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for each type of louver and showing compliance with performance requirements specified.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain louvers from single source from a single manufacturer where indicated to be of same type, design, or factory-applied color finish.


A. Delegated Design: Design louvers, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using structural performance requirements and design criteria indicated on the Structural drawing sheets.

B. Louver Performance Ratings: Provide louvers complying with requirements specified, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock units identical to those provided, except for length and width according to AMCA 500-L.

C. SMACNA Standard: Comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" for fabrication, construction details, and installation procedures.

2.3 FIXED, EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM LOUVERS

A. Horizontal, Drainable-Blade Louver :

1. Basis-Of-Design: Greenheck, ESD-435 or prior approved equal.

2. Louver Depth: 4 inches (100 mm). 3. Frame and Blade Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.080 inch (2.03 mm) for blades and

0.080 inch (2.03 mm) for frames.


Rotary PM Stamp




4. Mullion Type: Exposed. 5. Louver Performance Ratings:

a. Free Area: Not less than 2.0 sq. ft., or as indicated on drawings, per louver.

B. General: Provide screen at each exterior louver.

1. Screen Location for Fixed Louvers: Interior face. 2. Screening Type: Insect screening.

C. Secure screen frames to louver frames with stainless-steel machine screws, spaced a maximum of 6 inches (150 mm) from each corner and at 12 inches (300 mm) o.c.

D. Louver Screen Frames: Fabricate with mitered corners to louver sizes indicated.

1. Metal: Same type and form of metal as indicated for louver to which screens are attached. Reinforce extruded-aluminum screen frames at corners with clips.

2. Finish: Same finish as louver frames to which louver screens are attached. 3. Type: Non-rewirable, U-shaped frames.

E. Louver Screening for Aluminum Louvers: 1. Insect Screening: Stainless steel, 18-by-18 (1.4-by-1.4-mm) mesh, 0.009-inch (0.23-mm)

wire.

2.4 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5, T-52, or T6.

B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for forming, or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish.

C. Fasteners: Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions.

1. Use hex-head or Phillips pan-head screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

2. For fastening aluminum, use aluminum or 300 series stainless-steel fasteners. 3. For fastening galvanized steel, use hot-dip-galvanized steel or 300 series stainless-steel

fasteners. 4. For fastening stainless steel, use 300 series stainless-steel fasteners. 5. For color-finished louvers, use fasteners with heads that match color of louvers.

D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Factory assemble louvers to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.


Rotary PM Stamp




B. Maintain equal louver blade spacing to produce uniform appearance.

C. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints.

D. Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly.

E. Provide subsills made of same material as louvers or extended sills for recessed louvers.

F. Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds concealed from view, threaded fasteners, or both, as standard with louver manufacturer unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between frame members necessary.

2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Finish louvers after assembly.

B. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.04 mm). Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish.

1. Color and Gloss: Custom color match Architect's sample.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Locate and place louvers level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work.

B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection.


Rotary PM Stamp




C. Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured.

D. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated.

E. Protect unpainted galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces that are in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals from corrosion and galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint or by separating surfaces with waterproof gaskets or nonmetallic flashing.

F. Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation as louver installation progresses, where weathertight louver joints are required. Comply with Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for sealants applied during louver installation.


A. Clean exposed louver surfaces that are not protected by temporary covering, to remove fingerprints and soil during construction period. Do not let soil accumulate during construction period.

B. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or detergent not harmful to finishes. Thoroughly rinse surfaces and dry.

C. Restore louvers damaged during installation and construction so no evidence remains of corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by Architect, remove damaged units and replace with new units.

1. Touch up minor abrasions in finishes with air-dried coating that matches color and gloss of, and is compatible with, factory-applied finish coating.



Rotary PM Stamp






Rotary PM Stamp



RESINOUS FLOORING 096723 - 1

SECTION 096723 - RESINOUS FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Decorative resinous flooring systems.


1. Division 03 Section “Cast-In-Place Concrete” for concrete floors to receive decorative quartz flooring.

2. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealants installed at joints in resinous flooring systems.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's technical data, application instructions, and recommendations for each resinous flooring component required.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of exposed finish required.

C. Samples for Verification: For each resinous flooring system required, 6 inches (150 mm) square, applied to a rigid backing by Installer for this Project.

D. Product Schedule: For resinous flooring.

E. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with specified requirements.

F. Material Certificates: For each resinous flooring component, from manufacturer.

G. Material Test Reports: For each resinous flooring system.

H. Maintenance Data: For resinous flooring to include in maintenance manuals.


Rotary PM Stamp





A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of flooring systems required for this Project.

1. Engage an installer who is certified in writing by resinous flooring manufacturer as qualified to apply resinous flooring systems indicated.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain primary resinous flooring materials, including primers, resins, hardening agents, grouting coats, and topcoats, from single source from single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials, including patching and fill material, joint sealant, and repair materials, of type and from source recommended by manufacturer of primary materials.

C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken, bearing manufacturer's labels indicating brand name and directions for storage and mixing with other components.


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions for substrate temperature, ambient temperature, moisture, ventilation, and other conditions affecting resinous flooring application.

B. Lighting: Provide permanent lighting or, if permanent lighting is not in place, simulate permanent lighting conditions during resinous flooring application.

C. Close spaces to traffic during resinous flooring application and for not less than 24 hours after application unless manufacturer recommends a longer period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by the following:

1. NEOGARD; Division of JONES-BLAIR; Neo-Quartz WG125 Broadcast. 2. Or an Architect prior approved equal.


Rotary PM Stamp




2.2 DECORATIVE RESINOUS FLOORING

A. Resinous Flooring: Abrasion-, impact- and chemical-resistant, decorative-aggregate-filled, epoxy-resin-based, monolithic floor surfacing designed to produce a seamless floor.

B. System Characteristics:

1. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2. Wearing Surface: As coordinated with and as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s

full range. 3. Overall System Thickness: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm).

C. Body Coats:

1. Resin: Epoxy. 2. Formulation Description: 100 percent solids. 3. Application Method: Troweled base with broadcast aggregates.

a. Thickness of Coats: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). b. Number of Coats: Two (made up of Resin and Aggregate for an overall thickness

of not less than 1/8 inch (3.2 mm)..

4. Aggregates: Colored quartz (ceramic-coated silica).

D. Topcoat: Sealing or finish coats.

1. Resin: Epoxy. 2. Formulation Description: 100 percent solids. 3. Type: Clear. 4. Finish: Gloss. 5. Number of Coats: Two.

E. Base Coat System Physical Properties: Provide resinous flooring system with the following minimum physical property requirements when tested according to test methods indicated:

1. Compressive Strength: 10,900 psi per ASTM C 579. 2. Tensile Strength: 1,700 psi per ASTM C 307. 3. Flexural Strength: 4,200 psi per ASTM C 580. 4. Modulus of Elasticity: 1.16x106 psi per ASTM C580. 5. Heat Resistance: Pass per MIL-D-3234F. 6. Impacted Load: Pass @ ≤112 lbs per ASTM D 6905.

F. Top Coat System Physical Properties: Provide resinous flooring system with the following minimum physical property requirements when tested according to test methods indicated:

1. Compressive Strength: 11,000 psi per ASTM D 695. 2. Tensile Strength: 8,000 psi per ASTM D 638. 3. Elongation: 14% per ASTM D 638. 4. Flexural Strength: 10,000 psi per ASTM D 790.


Rotary PM Stamp




5. Flexural Modulus: 400,000 psi per ASTM D 790. 6. Shore D Hardness: 82 per ASTM D 2240. 7. Adhesion: 400 psi per ASTM D 4541. 8. Impact Resistance: Passes 16ft./lbs per Mil-D-3134, Sec. 4.7.3. 9. Taber Abrasion (cs17): 89 mg/1,000 rev per ASTM D 4060. 10. Water Resistance: <2% per ASTM D 570. 11. MVT@20 mils: 0.10 Perm per ASTM E 96. 12. Fungus & Bacteria Resistance: No Support of Growth Under TT-P-32 per Mil-F-52505. 13. Flame Spread: Class I per ASTM E 85. 14. Smoke Density Rating: 58.9% per ASTM C 84.

G. System Chemical Resistance: Contact material supplier for chemical resistance data for specified product.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Primer: Type if recommended by manufacturer for substrate and body coats indicated.

B. Patching and Fill Material: Resinous product of or approved by resinous flooring manufacturer and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. General: Prepare and clean substrates according to resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions for substrate indicated. Provide clean, dry substrate for resinous flooring application.

B. Concrete Substrates: Provide sound concrete surfaces free of laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminants incompatible with resinous flooring.

1. Roughen concrete substrates as follows:

a. Shot-blast surfaces with an apparatus that abrades the concrete surface, contains the dispensed shot within the apparatus, and recirculates the shot by vacuum pickup or as directed by Manufacturer written recommendations.

b. Comply with ASTM C 811 requirements unless manufacturer's written instructions are more stringent.

2. Repair damaged and deteriorated concrete according to resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions.

3. Verify that concrete substrates are dry and moisture-vapor emissions are within acceptable levels according to manufacturer's written instructions.


Rotary PM Stamp




a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with application of resinous flooring only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m) of slab area in 24 hours.

4. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Verify that concrete substrates have pH within acceptable range. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with application only after substrates pass testing.

C. Resinous Materials: Mix components and prepare materials according to resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Use patching and fill material to fill holes and depressions in substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Treat control joints and other nonmoving substrate cracks to prevent cracks from reflecting through resinous flooring according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.2 APPLICATION

A. General: Apply components of resinous flooring system according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a uniform, monolithic wearing surface of thickness indicated.

1. Coordinate application of components to provide optimum adhesion of resinous flooring system to substrate, and optimum intercoat adhesion.

2. Cure resinous flooring components according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent contamination during application and curing processes.

3. At substrate expansion and isolation joints, comply with resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Apply troweled body coats in thickness indicated for flooring system.

1. Broadcast aggregates at rate recommended by manufacturer and, after resin is cured, remove excess aggregates to provide surface texture indicated.

C. Apply grout coat, of type recommended by resinous flooring manufacturer, to fill voids in surface of final body coat and to produce wearing surface indicated.

D. Apply topcoats in number indicated for flooring system and at spreading rates recommended in writing by manufacturer.

E. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements and according to manufacturer’s written recommendation.


A. Material Sampling: Owner may at any time and any number of times during resinous flooring application require material samples for testing for compliance with requirements.


Rotary PM Stamp




1. Owner will engage an independent testing agency to take samples of materials being used. Material samples will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor.

2. Testing agency will test samples for compliance with requirements, using applicable referenced testing procedures or, if not referenced, using testing procedures listed in manufacturer's product data.

3. If test results show applied materials do not comply with specified requirements, pay for testing, remove noncomplying materials, prepare surfaces coated with unacceptable materials, and reapply flooring materials to comply with requirements.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect resinous flooring from damage and wear during the remainder of construction period. Use protective methods and materials, including temporary covering, recommended in writing by resinous flooring manufacturer.



Rotary PM Stamp



SPECIAL CEILING SURFACING 097700 - 1

SECTION 097700 - SPECIAL CELING SURFACING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 01 specifications Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Reinforced plastic ceiling panels and associated trims.

1.3 REFERENCES A. General: Standards listed by reference, including revisions by issuing authority, form a part of

this specification section to the extent indicated. Standards listed are identified by issuing authority, authority abbreviation, designation number, title or other designation established by issuing authority. Standards subsequently referenced herein are referred to by issuing authority abbreviation and standard designation.

ASTM International:

ASTM D256 Standard Test Methods for Determining the Izod Pendulum Impact Resistance of Plastics.

ASTM D570 Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics. ASTM D638 Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics. ASTM D696 Standard Test Method for Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion of Plastics

Between -30 degrees C and 30 degrees C With a Vitreous Silica Dilatometer. ASTM D790 Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced

Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials. ASTM D2583 Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plastics by Means of a

Barcol Impressor. ASTM D5420 Standard Test Method for Impact Resistance of Flat, Rigid Plastic Specimen by

Means of a Striker Impacted by a Falling Weight (Gardner Impact). ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

Underwriters’ Laboratories of Canada (ULC):

ULC-S102 Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance Requirements: Provide fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) panels, which have

been manufactured and installed to maintain performance criteria stated by manufacturer without defects, damage or failure.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


Rotary PM Stamp

Rotary Park Project, 2400 East 26th Street Sioux Falls, SD

Perspective, Inc. 17007 May 30, 2017


A. General: Submit listed submittals in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Section 013300 Submittal Procedures.

1. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data and installation instructions.

2. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing layout, profiles and product components, including anchorage, accessories, finish colors, patterns and textures. Indicate location and dimension of joints and fastener attachment.

3. Samples: Submit selection and verification samples for finishes, colors and textures. Submit 2 samples of each type of panel, trim and fastener.

4. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: Submit the following:

a. Test Reports: Certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties.

b. Certificates:

i. Submit manufacturer’s certificate that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

ii. Submit certificate of installer’s qualifications.

c. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Manufacturer’s installation instructions. 5. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following:

a. Operations and Maintenance Data: Operation and maintenance data for installed products in accordance with Section 017700 Closeout Procedure. Include methods for maintaining installed products and precautions against cleaning materials and methods detrimental to finishes and performance.

b. Warranty documents specified herein.


A. Installer Qualifications: Utilize an installer having demonstrated experience on projects of similar size and complexity.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING

A. General: Comply with Section 016000 Product Requirements.

1. Lead Time: Comply with manufacturer’s ordering instructions and lead-time requirements to avoid construction delays.

2. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.

3. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful environmental conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by the manufacturer.


Rotary PM Stamp


Perspective Inc. 17007 May 30, 2017


4. Store panels indoors. Lay panels flat. Do not stand panels on edge. Protect panels from

moisture. Do not store panels in contact with the floor or against an outside wall.

5. Handling: Remove foreign matter from face of panel by using a soft bristle brush, avoiding abrasive action.

1.8 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Requirements:

1. Installation shall not begin until building is enclosed, permanent heating and cooling equipment is in operation and residual moisture from plaster, concrete or terrazzo work has dissipated.

2. Install panels between 60 and 75 degrees F (15 and 24 degrees C) and relative humidity below 65%, ideally at the same conditions as the room’s normal operating temperatures after building is occupied.

3. Provide ventilation to disperse fumes during application of adhesive as recommended by adhesive manufacturer.

B. Field Measurements: Verify actual measurements/openings by field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate field measurements and fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid construction delays.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PLASTIC (PVC) SOFFIT/CEILING PANELS

A. Manufacturer: Nuform Building Technologies Inc., 1 Regalcrest Court, Woodbridge, Ontario, Canada, L4L 8P3, Toll Free: 1 877 747-WALL (9255), Tel.: 905 652-0001 Fax: 905 652-0002

1. Type: Reline 2. Surface Texture: smooth 3. Thickness: 3/8 inch 4. Size: 12” 5. Color: White

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Panel Adhesive: 1. Provide adhesive recommended by panel manufacturer.

B. Trim Treatment:

1. Material Type: a. “F” Trim (Multi-use trim optional alternative): cover around perimeter of each

room used.


Rotary PM Stamp




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS

Comply with the instructions and recommendations of the panel manufacturer.

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Site Verification of Conditions: Verify that substrate conditions, which have been previously installed under other sections, are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

Verify that site conditions are acceptable for installation of PVC panels. Examine back-up surfaces to determine that corners are plumb and straight, surfaces are

smooth, uniform, clean and free from foreign matter, nails are countersunk and joints and cracks are filled flush and smooth with the adjoining surface.

Do not proceed with installation of PVC panels until unacceptable conditions are corrected.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. General:

Prior to installing panels, remove packaging and allow panels to acclimate to room temperature and humidity for at least 48 hours.

Wall substrate must be dry and free from dirt, dust, grease and other contaminants. Walls must be flat and even. Remove high spots and fill low spots with material acceptable to

panel manufacturer.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. General:

Immediately inspect panels for any defects. Do not install panels of unacceptable quality. Do not install panels directly over stud framing or furring. When cutting panels, position them so that the saw blade enters the finished HPL side first to

avoid chipping or damage. Protect finish face of panel by covering work area. Follow adhesive manufacturer’s recommendations for appropriate height of adhesive bead left

by trowel, and do not allow adhesive to skin over.

Installation Using Molding:

Start in the corner. Mark plumb line. Set first panel true with plumb line. Slide panel into molding. Install panel to contact and do not withdraw to provide gap. Align

with plumb line. Install one-piece division bar and caps or next molding by sliding onto panel. Repeat process, working in one direction around room.


Rotary PM Stamp


Perspective Inc. 17007 May 30, 2017


3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean panel surfaces in compliance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

Use a clean, damp, nonabrasive cotton cloth and a mild liquid detergent or household cleaner. Rinse with clean water using a clean, nonabrasive cotton cloth. Dry panels with a soft, clean nonabrasive cotton cloth. Do not use cleaners containing acid, alkali or sodium hypochlorite.

3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect installed work from damage due to subsequent construction activity on the site.



Rotary PM Stamp






Rotary PM Stamp



HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 099600 - 1

SECTION 099600 - HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes surface preparation and application of high-performance coating systems on the following substrates:

1. Exterior Substrates:

a. Hardboard trim. b. Steel.

2. Interior Substrates:

a. Concrete masonry units (CMU). b. Steel. c. Wood.


1. Division 05 Sections for shop priming of metal substrates to be compatible with primers and finish coats specified in this Section.

2. Division 03 Section “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames” for shop priming of metal substrates to be compatible with primers and finish coats specified in this Section.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of finish-coat product indicated.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of coating system and in each color and gloss of finish coat indicated.

1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches (200 mm) square. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area.


Rotary PM Stamp




D. Product List: For each product indicated. Cross-reference products to coating system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.


A. Master Painters Institute (MPI) Standards:

1. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" for products and coating systems indicated.


A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C).

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.


A. Apply coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be coated and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C).

B. Do not apply coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Quantity: Furnish all unused materials to Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each coating system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. Provide products of same manufacturer for each coat in a coating system.


Rotary PM Stamp




B. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range or match Architect’s sample.

2.2 BLOCK FILLERS

A. Acrylic Block Filler:


a. ICI Paints; Devoe Coatings, Bloxfil® 4000 Interior/Exterior Heavy Duty Acrylic Block Filler.

b. Sherwin-Williams Company (The); PrepRite® Interior/Exterior Latex Block Filler B25W25.

c. Or an Architect prior approved equal.

B. Epoxy Block Filler:


a. Diamond Vogel Paints; V-Cote 100, Acrylic Epoxy Block Filler, MC-1234. b. ICI Paints; Devoe Coatings, Tru-Glaze-WB 4015 High Performance Waterborne

Epoxy Block Filler. c. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.; Aquapon, Epoxy Block Filler, 97-685. d. Sherwin-Williams Company (The); Industrial & Marine, Kem Cati-Coat HS

Epoxy Filler/Sealer, B24W400/V400 S. e. Or an Architect prior approved equal.

2.3 PRIMERS/SEALERS

A. Interior Latex-Based Wood Primer:


a. Benjamin Moore & Co.; Fresh Start, Interior/Exterior Primer, 23. b. Diamond Vogel Paints; Sure Grip, Acrylic Latex Primer, BU-1501/02. c. ICI Paints; Prep-N-Prime, Gripper Stain Killer Primer, 3210. d. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.; Seal Grip, Plastic Primer (Waterborne), 17-21. e. Sherwin-Williams Company (The); PrepRite, ProBlock Int/Ext Latex

Primer/Sealer, B51W20. f. Or an Architect prior approved equal.

B. Exterior Bonding Primer (Waterborne):


a. ICI Paints; Prep-N-Prime, Hydrosealer Waterborne Multi Purpose Exterior Primer/Sealer 6001-1200 applied at a dry film thickness of 1.5 mils per coat.

b. Sherwin-Williams Company (The); PrepRite, ProBlock Int/Ext Latex Primer/Sealer, B51W20.



Rotary PM Stamp




C. Wood-Knot Sealer: White shellac or other sealer recommended in writing by manufacturer for this purpose.

2.4 METAL PRIMERS

A. Polyamide Epoxy Primer:


a. Sherwin Williams; Macropoxy® 646 Fast Cure Epoxy applied at 3.0 to 6.0 dry mils per coat.

b. Or an Architect prior approved equal.

2.5 EXTERIOR LATEX COATINGS

A. Exterior Latex (Low Sheen):


a. ICI Paints; Dulux Fortis Premium 100% Acrylic Satin Exterior Enamel 6403 Series applied at 2.1 mils per dry coat..

b. Sherwin-Williams Company (The); SuperPaint® Exterior Latex Satin A89W51 Series.


2.6 EPOXY COATINGS

A. Water-Based Epoxy (Interior and Exterior):


a. Benjamin Moore & Co.; Acrylic Epoxy Gloss "A", Hardener "B", M43/M44. b. Diamond Vogel Paints; Aqua Pox, Waterborne Epoxy, MC-1245/6. c. ICI Paints; Devoe Coatings, Tru-Glaze-WB Epoxy Coating, 4406. d. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.; Aquapon, Waterborne Epoxy, 98-1/98-98. e. Sherwin-Williams Company (The); Industrial & Marine, Water Based Catalyzed

Epoxy, B70W Series. f. Or an Architect prior approved equal.

2.7 POLYURETHANE COATINGS

A. Aliphatic Acrylic Polyurethane, Semi-Gloss:


a. Sherwin Williams Company (The); Industrial & Marine, Acrolon™ 218 HS Acrylic Polyurethane applied at 3.0 to 6.0 dry mils per coat.


Rotary PM Stamp




b. Or an Architect prior approved equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.

1. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:

a. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent. b. Wood: 15 percent.

2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.

3. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry.

4. Coating application indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.

B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be coated. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and coating.

1. After completing coating operations, reinstall items that were removed; use workers skilled in the trades involved.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of coatings, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce coating systems indicated.

D. CMU Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not coat surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be coated exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale.

1. Clean using methods recommended in writing by coating manufacturer.

F. Wood Substrates:


Rotary PM Stamp




1. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of knot sealer before applying primer.

2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view and dust off. 3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and back sides of wood. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic

wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply high-performance coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for coating and substrate indicated. 2. Coat surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces.

Before final installation, coat surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

3. Coat back sides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.

B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of the same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of finish coat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through final coat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform coating finish, color, and appearance.

D. Apply coatings to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Produce sharp glass lines and color breaks.


A. Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when coatings are being applied:

1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample coating material being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor.

2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with specified requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying coatings if test results show materials

being used do not comply with specified requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying coating materials from Project site, pay for testing, and recoat surfaces coated with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously coated surfaces if, on recoating with complying materials, the two coatings are incompatible.


Rotary PM Stamp





A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.

B. After completing coating application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered coatings by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from coating operation. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced coated surfaces.

3.6 EXTERIOR HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATING SCHEDULE

A. Fiber Cement Board Substrates:

1. Exterior Latex System:

a. Prime Coat: Exterior Waterborne bonding primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior latex (low sheen).

B. Hardboard Trim Substrates:

1. Exterior Latex System:

a. Prime Coat: Exterior Waterborne bonding primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior latex (low sheen).

C. Steel Substrates:

1. Aliphatic Acrylic Polyurethane Enamel System:

a. Prime Coat: Polyamide epoxy primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Aliphatic acrylic polyurethane enamel matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Aliphatic acrylic polyurethane enamel (semigloss).

3.7 INTERIOR HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATING SCHEDULE

A. Concrete Masonry Units (CMU):

1. Water-Based Epoxy Coating System:

a. Prime Coat: Epoxy block filler. b. Intermediate Coat: Water-based epoxy (interior and exterior).


Rotary PM Stamp




c. Topcoat: Water-based epoxy (interior and exterior).

B. Steel Substrates:

1. Aliphatic Acrylic Polyurethane Enamel System:

a. Prime Coat: Polyamide epoxy primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Aliphatic acrylic polyurethane enamel matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Aliphatic acrylic polyurethane enamel (semigloss).

C. Wood Substrates:

1. Water-Based Epoxy Coating System:

a. Prime Coat: Interior latex-based wood primer/sealer. b. Intermediate Coat: Water-based epoxy (interior and exterior). c. Topcoat: Water-based epoxy (interior and exterior).



Rotary PM Stamp



SIGNAGE 101400 - 1

SECTION 101400 - SIGNAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Dimensional characters. 2. Panel signs. 3. Traffic signage –see drawings. 4. Site Custom signage –see drawings.


1. Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary Project identification signs and for temporary information and directional signs.

2. Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for labels, tags, and nameplates for plumbing systems and equipment.

3. Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for labels, tags, and nameplates for HVAC systems and equipment.

4. "Identification for Electrical Systems" for labels, tags, and nameplates for electrical equipment see drawings.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities; Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines."

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for signs.

1. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by others, and accessories.

2. Provide message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including tactile characters and Braille, and layout for each sign.


Rotary PM Stamp



SIGNAGE 101400 - 2

C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual units or sections of units showing the full range of colors available for the following:

1. Aluminum. 2. Cast Aluminum. 3. Zinc.

D. Samples for Verification: For each of the following products and for the full range of color, texture, and sign material indicated, of sizes indicated:

1. Dimensional Characters: Full-size Samples of each type of dimensional character (letter, number, and graphic element).

2. Aluminum: For each form, finish, and color, on 6-inch- (150-mm-) long sections of extrusions and squares of sheet at least 4 by 4 inches (100 by 100 mm).

3. Panel Signs: Not less than 6 inches (152 mm) square. 4. Accessories: Manufacturer's full-size unit.

E. Sign Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

F. Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator.

G. Maintenance Data: For signs to include in maintenance manuals.

H. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.


A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.

B. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.

C. Source Limitations for Signs: Obtain each sign type indicated from one source from a single manufacturer.

D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit installation of signs in exterior locations to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements.

B. Field Measurements: Verify recess openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.


Rotary PM Stamp



SIGNAGE 101400 - 3

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate placement of anchorage devices with templates for installing signs.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Deterioration of metal finishes beyond normal weathering. b. Deterioration of graphic image colors and sign lamination.

2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, of alloy and temper recommended by sign manufacturer for casting process used and for use and finish indicated.

B. Aluminum Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with at least the strength and durability properties of Alloy 5005-H32.

C. Zinc Plate: 1/8 inch (3.18mm) thickness, photochemically etched, finished including a special UV resistant clear urethane topcoat:

2.2 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product by the following: 1. ASI-Modulex, Inc.; Dimensional Letters – LC Series. 2. Or an Architect prior approved equal.

B. Cast Characters: Produce characters with smooth flat faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles, free of pits, scale, sand holes, and other defects. Cast lugs into back of characters and tap to receive threaded mounting studs. Alloy and temper recommended by sign manufacturer for casting process used and for use and finish indicated. Comply with the following requirements.

1. Character Material: Aluminum. 2. Thickness: ¾” +/- inch for the 5”.


Rotary PM Stamp



SIGNAGE 101400 - 4

3. Color(s): As indicated on drawings and as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

4. Mounting: Concealed studs, noncorroding for substrates encountered.

C. Dimensional Character Sign Schedule:

1. Sign Type:

a. Sign Size: As indicated on drawings. b. Character Size: 5 inch (203mm). c. Text/Message: To be determined with final building address. d. Location: As indicated on drawings.

2.3 PANEL SIGNS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product by the following: 1. ASI-Modulex, Inc.; Sign Etch 1 Exterior, Custom aluminum pan with solid aluminum

overlay, and Custom aluminum pan only as indicated on drawings. 2. Or as indicated on drawings and with Architect’s prior approved equal.

B. Photochemically Etched Copy, Tactile and Braille Building Signs (Restroom Building signage): Photochemically etched letters, numbers, symbols, braille and other graphic devices from first panel sign surface indicated to produce precisely formed copy with square-cut edges free from burrs and cut marks, incised to uniform depth complying with ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and with ICC/ANSI A117.1. Text shall be accompanied by Grade 2 Braille. Braille dots with domed or rounded shape.

1. Panel Material: Zinc in 1/8 inch (3.18mm) thickness with paint primer and urethane based color coat including a special UV resistant clear urethane top coat required for exterior applications.

2. Raised-Copy Thickness: Not less than 1/32 inch (0.8 mm). 3. Edge Condition and Finish: Square cut, brushed. 4. Corner Condition: Square. 5. Panel size: 7-1/2 by 10-1/2 inches (190.5 by 267mm). 6. Raised Text and Graphic Finishes: Metallic, silvertone, horizontal grain. 7. Recessed Area Texture: Smooth paint. 8. Letter Style: Helvetica Bold. 9. Letter Size: 1-1/4 inch (25mm).

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Anchors and Inserts: Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or lead expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work.


Rotary PM Stamp



SIGNAGE 101400 - 5

2.5 FABRICATION

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard signs of configurations indicated.

1. Welded Connections: Comply with AWS standards for recommended practices in shop welding. Provide welds behind finished surfaces without distortion or discoloration of exposed side. Clean exposed welded surfaces of welding flux and dress exposed and contact surfaces.

2. Mill joints to tight, hairline fit. Form joints exposed to weather to exclude water penetration.

3. Preassemble signs in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble signs only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and installation, in location not exposed to view after final assembly.

4. Conceal fasteners if possible; otherwise, locate fasteners where they will be inconspicuous.



B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Clear Satin Finish: Manufacturer's standard Class 1 clear coating, 0.018 mm or thicker, over a satin (directionally textured) mechanical finish, complying with AAMA 611.

B. Baked-Enamel Finish: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: acid-chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating; Organic Coating: as specified below). Apply baked enamel complying with paint manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and painting.

1. Organic Coating: Thermosetting, modified-acrylic enamel primer/topcoat system complying with AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.04 mm), medium gloss.


Rotary PM Stamp



SIGNAGE 101400 - 6

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Verify that items, including anchor inserts, are sized and located to accommodate signs.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types described and complying with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance.

B. Wall-Mounted Signs: Comply with sign manufacturer's written instructions except where more stringent requirements apply. 1. Mechanical Fasteners: Use nonremovable mechanical fasteners placed through predrilled

holes. Attach signs with fasteners and anchors suitable for secure attachment to substrate as recommended in writing by sign manufacturer. Provide a paper template to locate holes for fasteners.

C. Dimensional Characters: Mount characters using standard fastening methods to comply with manufacturer's written instructions for character form, type of mounting, wall construction, and condition of exposure indicated. Provide heavy paper template to establish character spacing and to locate holes for fasteners.

1. Flush Mounting: Mount characters with backs in contact with wall surface.


A. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Protect signs from damage until acceptance by Owner.



Rotary PM Stamp



SOLID PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113 - 1

SECTION 102113 - SOLID PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS

PART 1 – GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specifications, apply to this section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Floor mounted, over head braced solid-polymer toilet compartments configured as toilet

enclosures and urinal screens. 2. Hardware for toilet compartments and plastic partitions. 3. Shop drawings and working drawings. 4. Manufacturer’s guarantee.


1. Division 10 Section "Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories" for toilet tissue dispensers, grab bars, purse shelves, and similar accessories.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For toilet compartments. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Show locations of cutouts for compartment-mounted toilet accessories. 2. Show locations of reinforcements for compartment-mounted grab bars. 3. Show locations of centerlines of toilet fixtures.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of unit indicated. Include Samples of hardware and accessories involving material and color selection.

D. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes unless otherwise indicated:

1. Each type of material, color, and finish required for units, prepared on 6-inch- (152-mm-) square Samples of same thickness and material indicated for Work.

2. Each type of hardware and accessory

E. Product Certificates: For each type of toilet compartment, from manufacturer.


Rotary PM Stamp




F. Maintenance Data: For toilet compartments to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Comply with requirements in GSA's CID-A-A-60003, "Partitions, Toilets, Complete."

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84, or another standard acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in ICC/ANSI A117.1 for toilet compartments designated as accessible.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of toilet fixtures, walls, columns, ceilings, and other construction contiguous with toilet compartments by field measurements before fabrication.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Toilet partitions and screens to be supplied by SCRANTON PRODUCTS (Santana/Comtec/Capitol) Moosic, PA, or approved equal.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Doors, panels and pilasters shall be 1” thick constructed from High-Density Polyethylene (HDPE) resins. Partitions shall be fabricated from polymer resins compounded under high pressure, forming a single component which is waterproof, nonabsorbent and has a self-lubricating surface that resists marks from pens, pencils, markers and other writing instruments. All plastic components shall be covered with a protective plastic masking.

B. Panel color shall be selected by Architect from full range of manufacturer all available options.

2.3 CONSTRUCTION

A. Doors, panels, and pilasters shall be 1” thick with all edges rounded to a ¼” radius.

B. Doors and dividing panels shall be 55” high and mounted at 14” above the finished floor. An aluminum heat sinc may be fastened to the bottom edges (optional).


Rotary PM Stamp




C. Pilasters shall be 82” high (standard) and fastened into a 3” high pilaster shoe with a stainless steel, torx head sex bolts.

2.4 HARDWARE

A. Door hardware shall be as noted: 1. Hinges shall be 8” and fabricated from heavy-duty extruded aluminum (6463-T5 alloy) with

bright dipped anodized finish with wrap-around flanges, through bolted to doors and pilasters with stainless steel, torx head sex bolts. Hinges operate with field adjustable nylon cams. Cams can be field set in 30-degree increments OR, hinges shall be integral, fabricated from the door and pilaster with no exposed metal parts.

2. Door strike/keeper shall be 6” long and made of heavy-duty extruded aluminum (6436-T5 alloy) with bright dipped anodized finish, with wrap around flanges and secured to the pilasters with stainless steel, torx head sex bolts. Bumper shall be made of extruded black vinyl.

3. Latch and housing shall be made of heavy-duty extruded aluminum (6463-T5 alloy). The latch housing shall have a bright dipped anodized finish, and the slide bolt and button shall have a black anodized finish.

4. Each door shall be supplied with one coat bumper/hook and 2 door pulls made of chrome plated zamak . Outswing doors shall be supplied with a door stop made of chrome plated zamak.

B. Pilaster shoes shall be 3” high and made of one-piece molded HDPE plastic available in burgundy, mocha, black, parchment, white, charcoal grey, hunter, grey, fossil, linen, beige, blueberry, azure, cappuccino, sandcastle, sandstone, glacier grey, OR, pilaster shoes shall be 3” high (type 304 , 20 gauge) stainless steel. Pilaster shoes shall be secured to the pilaster with a stainless steel, torx head sex bolt.

C. Wall brackets shall be 54” long and made of heavy duty extruded PVC plastic and are available in burgundy, mocha, black, parchment, white, charcoal grey, hunter, grey, fossil, linen, beige, blueberry, azure, cappuccino, sandcastle, sandstone and glacier grey and fastened to the pilaster with stainless steel, tamper resistant torx screws and fastened to the panels with stainless steel, torx head sex bolts. OR, wall brackets shall be 1 ½” stirrup type made of heavy-duty aluminum (6463-T5 alloy) with a bright dipped anodized finish. Stirrup brackets shall be fastened to pilasters and panels with stainless steel, torx head sex bolts.

D. Headrail shall be made of heavy-duty extruded aluminum (6463-T5 alloy) with anti-grip design and integrated curtain track. The headrail shall have a clear anodized finish and shall be fastened to the headrail bracket by a stainless steel, torx head sex bolt, and fastened to the top of the pilasters with stainless steel, tamper resistant torx screws.

E. Headrail brackets shall be 20 gauge stainless steel with a satin finish, and secured to the wall with #14 stainless steel screws.


Rotary PM Stamp




PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Examine areas to receive toilet partitions, screens, and shower compartments for correct height and spacing of anchorage/blocking and plumbing fixtures that may affect installation of partitions. Report any discrepancies to the architect.

B. Take complete and accurate measurements of complete toilet compartment locations.

C. Start of work constitutes acceptance of job.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install partitions rigid, straight, plumb, and level manor, with plastic laid out as shown on shop drawings and manufacturer’s installation instructions.

B. All doors and panels to be mounted at 14” above finished floor.

C. Clearance at vertical edges of doors shall be uniform top to bottom and shall not exceed 3/8”

D. No evidence of cutting, drilling, and/or patching shall be visible on the finished work.

E. Finished surfaces shall be cleaned after installation and be left free of all imperfections.

3.3 WARRANTY

A. SCRANTON PRODUCTS (Santana/Comtec/Capitol) guarantees its plastic against breakage, corrosion, and delamination under normal conditions for 15 years from the date of receipt by the customer. If materials are found to be defective during that period for reasons listed above, the materials will be replaced free of charge. (Labor not included in warranty.)



Rotary PM Stamp



TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 1

SECTION 102800 - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Public-use washroom accessories. 2. Warm-air dryers. 3. Childcare accessories. 4. Underlavatory guards.

B. Owner-Furnished Material: Toilet Paper Dispenser, and Soap Dispenser.

C. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 10 Section “Solid Plastic Toilet Compartments” for mounting of accessories coordination.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following:

1. Construction details and dimensions. 2. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work

and substrate preparation. 3. Material and finish descriptions. 4. Features that will be included for Project. 5. Manufacturer's warranty.

B. Samples: Full size, for each accessory item to verify design, operation, and finish requirements.

1. Approved full-size Samples will be returned and may be used in the Work.

C. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required.

1. Identify locations using room designations indicated on Drawings. 2. Identify products using designations indicated on Drawings.


Rotary PM Stamp




D. Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same articles in Part 2, provide products of same manufacturer unless otherwise approved by Architect.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories.

B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.0312-inch (0.8-mm) minimum nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.0359-inch (0.9-mm) minimum nominal thickness.

C. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G60 (Z180) hot-dip zinc coating.

D. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

E. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper-and-theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed.

F. Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick.

G. ABS Plastic: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene resin formulation.

2.2 PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc. 2. American Specialties, Inc. 3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.


Rotary PM Stamp




4. Bradley Corporation. 5. General Accessory Manufacturing Co. (GAMCO). 6. Prior approved equal.

B. Grab Bar (GB#)

1. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners. 2. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch (1.3 mm) thick.

a. Finish: Smooth, No. 4, satin finish.

3. Outside Diameter: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). 4. Configuration and Length: As indicated on Drawings.

C. Sanitary-Napkin Disposal Unit:

1. Mounting: Surface mounted. 2. Door or Cover: Self-closing disposal-opening cover and hinged face panel with tumbler

lockset. 3. Receptacle: Removable. 4. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).

D. Mirror Unit (MI):

1. Frame: Frameless.

2. Mirror: Stainless Steel with Masonite Back fabricated of alloy 18-8 stainless steel, type 304, 20 gauge with no. 8 mirror finish. Backing shall be ¼” thick tempered waterproof Masonite. Unit shall have 5/16” returns to wall all sides. Unit shall have six (6) 7/32” dia. mounting holes,

a. Size: 24” x 36”.

2.3 WARM-AIR HAND DRYERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain warm-air dryers from single source from single manufacturer.

B. High-Speed Warm-Air Hand Dryer -EHD:

1. Basis-of-Design: Xcel Dryer, Inc, ThinAir Hand Dryer. a. Or Prior Approved Equal.

2. Description: High-speed, warm-air hand dryer for rapid hand drying. 3. Mounting: Surface mounted, with low-profile design. 4. Operation: Electronic-sensor activated with operation time of 10 to 20 seconds. 5. Cover Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (brush satin). 6. Electrical Requirements: 110-120V, 7-7.7a, 770-915W.

2.4 CHILDCARE ACCESSORIES


Rotary PM Stamp





1. American Infant Care Products Inc. 2. American Specialties, Inc. 3. Brocar Products, Inc. 4. General Accessory Manufacturing Co. (GAMCO). 5. Koala Corporation. 6. Safe-Strap Company, Inc. 7. Prior approved equal.

B. Diaper-Changing Station (BCS):

1. Description: Horizontal unit that opens by folding down from stored position and with child-protection strap.

a. Engineered to support a minimum of 250-lb (113-kg) static load when opened.

2. Mounting: Surface mounted, with unit projecting not more than 4 inches (100 mm) from wall when closed.

3. Operation: By pneumatic shock-absorbing mechanism. 4. Material and Finish: High-density polyethylene in manufacturer's standard color. 5. Liner Dispenser: Built in.

2.5 UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS


1. Plumberex Specialty Products, Inc. 2. TCI Products. 3. Truebro, Inc. 4. Prior approved equal.

B. Underlavatory Guard:

1. Description: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies, that prevent direct contact with and burns from piping, and allow service access without removing coverings.

2. Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded-plastic, white.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion-resistant backing plates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


Rotary PM Stamp




3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.

B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf (1112 N), when tested according to method in ASTM F 446.


A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items.

B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.

C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations.



Rotary PM Stamp






Rotary PM Stamp

Project P 1538(04) I229 & 26th Street - Rotary Park Improvements Sioux Falls, SD

October 6, 2017

PLAY FIELD EQUIPMENT AND STRUCTURES 116800 - 1

SECTION 116800 - PLAY FIELD EQUIPMENT AND STRUCTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Freestanding playground equipment and structures. 2. Swings.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for playground equipment and structures. The contractor shall submit construction documents for review and approval by the Owner. Construction documents may include drawings, specifications, and other documents and electronic data setting forth in detail the requirements for construction of the work and shall:

1. Be consistent with the intent of the of the Proposer’s intent.

2. Provide information for the use of those in the building trades.

3. Include documents customarily required for regulatory agency approvals.

4. Include documents that will provide the City with a clear written record of how the structural, mechanical, electrical, or special systems elements are constructed and part numbers for each component. This information is to be provided in disk form after the bid is awarded.

5. Include current catalog and page numbers/part numbers for each play component for review and approval by the Owner.

6. Include samples of resilient materials proposed for review and approval by the Owner.

7. Provide scaled two-dimensional drawings and colored three-dimensional drawings of the proposed concepts.

8. Each drawing/design shall be unique for each site.

9. Drawings shall provide three color choices per structure

C. Coordination Drawings: Plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:


October 6, 2017


1. Extent of surface systems and use zones for equipment. 2. Critical heights for playground surface, or fall heights for equipment.

D. Samples: For each type of exposed finish.

E. Product certificates.


A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by the manufacturer only.

1. The contractor shall employ a CPSI certified superintendent who shall be in attendance at the project site during performance of the work. The superintendent shall represent the contractor and be familiar with installing equipment from proposed manufacturer, and communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the contractor. Important communications shall be confirmed in writing. Other communications shall be similarly confirmed on written request in each case.

B. Safety Standards and Manufacturer Qualifications: Provide playground equipment complying with or exceeding current requirements in the following:

1. ADAAG/ABA 2. ASTM 3. IPEMA 4. Consumer Product Safety Guidelines

C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of playground equipment that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Structural failures. b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.

2. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each piece of playground equipment is based on the product named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified.


October 6, 2017


2.2 MATERIALS

A. All materials shall be structurally sound and suitable for safe play.

B. Any color options available for various parts of equipment shall be submitted for review and selection by the Owner.

C. Rotational Molded Polyethylene shall be low-density polyethylene produced from high performance U.V. stabilized rotational molding grade resins with a comprehensive additive package. These resins are tested in accordance with ASTM 1487-01 testing procedures. Resins properties shall exhibit a balance of toughness, rigidity, environmental stress crack resistance, and excellent low temperature impact performance. Wall thickness of molded components shall be 3/16 inch to 1/4 inch.

D. Posts: Aluminum Posts: The aluminum posts shall be fabricated of aluminum tubing which receives a wash with an oxidation inhibiting coating prior to painting. This 6061-T6 alloy and temper extruded aluminum tubing conforms to ASTM F1487-01 with yield strength of 36,500 PSI and minimum tensile strength of 39,000 PSI. End caps shall be mechanically fastened to the top end. Posts and end caps shall have a baked-on electrostatically applied finish. The posts used must be a minimum of 5-inch OD.

E. Fasteners: Bolts, nuts, screws, washers, and other hardware used in the assembly of units shall be stainless steel corrosion resistant 18-8 stainless steel or ASTM F1487-01 mechanically galvanized fastener. All necessary hardware shall be provided.

F. Tubing: General Structural (pipe) shall be 1010 lot rolled, galvanized pipe manufactured from steel, cold-formed, and high frequency induction welded continuously. It shall conform to ASTM F1487 and be tested in accordance with ASTM 1487. It shall have triple coat corrosion protection of a hot-dipped uniform zinc galvanized coating followed by a chromate conversion coating with a third coat of clear high performance organic polymer coating. The interior shall have an 81 percent minimum zinc rich primer applied, capable of providing excellent rust protection and fabrication characteristics. All coatings shall be applied inside and out after welding. The pipe shall exceed the test results of galvanized schedule 40 pipe in salt spray tests conducted in accordance with ASTM F1487.

2.3 FREESTANDING PLAYGROUND EQUIPMENT

A. Basis-of-Design Product: The following manufacturers or a comparable product by one of the following. The approved play structures/manufacturers are based on submittals as received for the “Request for Proposals for the Design and Installation of Playground Structures for the City of Sioux Falls” Request #17-0006 issued January 1, 2017, Part 3.02 “Site C – Meldrum Park” submittals received February 16, 2017 by the Owner, with the exception to remove one(1) freestanding play event and add a two-bay swing set.

1. Gametime Cunningham Recreation, Timothy Kisgen. [email protected]. 800-438-2780 ext. 178. Ankeny, IA 50023

2. Landscape Structures Dakota Fence, Ken Follman. [email protected] 701-237-6181 1110 25th Ave North, PO Box 1408, Fargo, ND 58107-1408

3. Little Tikes Commercial Crouch Recreation, Nathan Kirby. [email protected]. 605-691-1084. 2435 S 156th Circle, Omaha, NE 68130


October 6, 2017


4. Play & Park Play & Park Structures, Kyle Siedlik. [email protected] 507-838-2495. 1810 Coolidge Court, Northfield, MN 55057

B. Composite Structure: Fabricated from steel and opaque plastic.

1. Frame: Galvanized steel pipe or tubing sections connected with bolts and clamps.

a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2. Equipment/play elements: All components/elements must be accessible from the ground. The scope of the playgrounds will need to include the following features but not limited to:

a. Minimum of three climbers. A vertical ladder will not be considered a climber.

b. Minimum of one overhead event.

c. Minimum of two slides.

d. Minimum of one bridge component.

e. Minimum of two activity panels.

f. Minimum of two decks at least 47 inches across.

g. Minimum of one freestanding play event, such as a whirl, glider, track ride, etc.

h. A transfer point for structure accessibility. This transfer point must be adjacent to an accessible entry point.

i. A two-bay swing to accommodate four swings—one swing will be ADA accessible and one will be a tot swing.

j. Installer is to ensure all drainage is included. This would include all surface and subsurface drainage to ensure water is removed away from the structure.

k. Backfilling and grading around the structure is to be included.

l. Comply with ADA/ABA accessibility guidelines.

m. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

3. Surfacing:

a. Poured-in-place rubber resilient safety surface shall be used for the entire site of the play structure and swings. Transition from concrete to rubber must be ADA-compliant.

b. Playground Protective Surfacing: See Specification Section 321816: Playground Protective Surfacing for requirements.

4. Arrangement:


October 6, 2017


a. See site plans for area available for structure and play element development.

b. Some of the above listed approved structures may have to be modified to fit within the area indicated on the plans. The proposed play area will not be increased to accommodate elements that can’t fit within it. Architect will provide a .dwg format drawing of area upon request during or after bidding.

2.4 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

A. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 03 Section "Cast-In-Place Concrete".

B. Concrete Materials and Properties: Dry-packaged concrete mix complying with ASTM C 387.



PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Anchor playground equipment securely, positioned at locations and elevations indicated.

1. Maximum Equipment Height: Coordinate installed heights of equipment and components with finished elevations of protective surfacing. Set equipment so fall heights and elevation requirements for age group use and accessibility are within required limits.

2. Verify that playground equipment elevations comply with requirements for each type and component of equipment.

B. Post and Footing Excavation: Excavate holes for posts and footings as indicated in firm, undisturbed or compacted subgrade soil.

C. Post Set on Subgrade: Level bearing surfaces with drainage fill to required elevation.

D. Post Set with Concrete Footing: Comply with ACI 301 for measuring, batching, mixing, transporting, forming, and placing concrete.

1. Set equipment posts in concrete footing. 2. Embedded Items: Use setting drawings and manufacturer's written instructions to ensure

correct installation of anchorages for equipment.



October 6, 2017


This Page Intentionally Left Blank

TABLE OF CONTENTS - MECHANICAL DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING AND HEATING HYDRONICS

NO. OF SECTION TITLE PAGES

220100 GENERAL PROVISIONS 17 220400 PLUMBING 6 220700 INSULATION AND PIPING IDENTIFICATION 4

DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING

NO. OF SECTION TITLE PAGES 230100 GENERAL PROVISIONS 11 230800 VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING 5

PROJECT: ROTARY PARK SIOUX FALLS, SOUTH DAKOTA

ACEI PROJECT NO.: 117050 DATE: October 6, 2017 Project Manual sections prepared by or under the supervision of Ryan William Van Der Bill, Reg. No. 9407, include all sections of Division 22 & 23.

GENERAL PROVISIONS 220100 - 1

DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING AND HEATING SECTION 220100 - GENERAL PROVISIONS

1.01 SCOPE: The GENERAL, SUPPLEMENTAL and other CONDITIONS of the Contract and the GENERAL REQUIREMENTS (Division 1) are hereby made part of this Section. This Section pertains to general provisions and requirements for construction of work specified in all sections of Division 22 herein. "Contractor" referred to in this Section of the specification implies the Contractor, Subcontractor and/or Subcontractors which are responsible for all or any part of the mechanical installation specified in Division 22 and/or as shown on the Contract Drawings. Where the specifications in subsequent Sections of Division 22 conflict with requirements of this Section, the specifications in the subsequent Sections shall govern. The Contractor shall provide all items, articles, materials, operations or methods listed, mentioned or scheduled on the Drawings and/or herein specified, including all labor, materials, equipment, accessories, wiring and incidentals necessary to be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations except as otherwise approved.

1.02 PERMITS AND SERVICE CHARGES: All permits and service charges necessary for execution of the work under this Contract shall be obtained by and be paid for by the Contractor. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to determine the permit requirements of the local authorities and utility companies and the cost of required permits, service charges, tap fees and development fees shall be included in the Contractor's bid. All work shall be executed in accordance with all local, state and national rules, regulations, codes, etc., which are applicable and shall be subject to inspection by the proper authorities.

1.03 CODES AND STANDARDS: All work performed and all equipment furnished under this Division of the Contract shall be manufactured and installed in strict accordance with all applicable codes and standards, including the applicable provisions of the following codes and standards. 1. Local and State Codes, Standards and Regulations. 2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). 3. National Electric Code (NEC). 4. Underwriter's Laboratory (UL). 5. American Gas Association (AGA) Standards. 6. Uniform Plumbing Code. 7. International Mechanical Code. 8. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Codes. 9. State Boiler Safety Code. 10. American Waterworks Association (AWWA).


11. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF). 12. Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (OSHA). 13. International Building Code. 14. Life Safety Code. 15. State Energy Conservation Standards. 16. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). All materials installed shall have composite fire and smoke hazard ratings as tested by procedures ASTM 84, NFPA 255 and UL 723 not to exceed 25 Flame Spread and 50 Smoke Developed.

1.04 COMPLIANCE: Where specific requirements of any code vary with the requirements of another code, the higher standard as determined by the Architect/Engineer shall govern the installation. All equipment manufactured in accordance with the provisions of the above codes and standards shall bear the label of the respective association bureau thereon.

1.05 DRAWINGS: In general, the Drawings of the mechanical systems and equipment are to scale. However, to determine exact locations of walls and partitions, the Contractor shall consult the architectural and/or structural drawings which are dimensioned. Drawings shall not take precedence over field measurements. Drawings of piping and ductwork, although shown on scale drawings, are diagrammatic only. They are intended to indicate size and/or capacity where stipulated, approximate location and/or direction, and approximate general arrangement of one phase of work to another, but not the exact detail or exact arrangement of construction. If it is found, before installation of any or all construction phases, that a more convenient, suitable or workable arrangement of any or all phases of the project would result by varying or altering the arrangement indicated on the Drawings, the Architect/Engineer may require the Contractor to change the location or arrangement of the work without additional cost to the Owner. Such rearrangement shall be in accordance with directions from the Architect/Engineer. Where discrepancies are discovered after certain portions or phases of the work have been installed, the Architect/Engineer reserves the right to require the Contractor to make changes in pipe, duct, fixture or equipment locations or arrangements to avoid conflicts with work at no additional cost to the Owner. Because the Drawings are to a relatively small scale to show as large a portion as is practical, the fact that only certain features of the system are indicated does not mean that other similar or different features or details will not be required. The Contractor shall furnish all incidental labor, material or equipment for the systems so that each system is a complete and operating one unless otherwise specifically stipulated in the detailed body of the specifications. The Contractor, Subcontractor's and their respective trades shall cooperate in laying out their work so it will fit properly into the space provided. Promptly report to the Architect/Engineer any delay or difficulties encountered in the installation of this work which might prevent prompt and proper installation, or make it unsuitable to connect with or receive the work of others. Failure to so


report shall constitute an acceptance of the work of other trades as being fit and proper for the execution of this work.

1.06 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS: The Contractor and equipment suppliers shall read and familiarize themselves with articles concerning substitution of materials, as indicated in the Instructions to Bidders. Material and equipment substitutions will be handled as follows: Materials or equipment specified by name of manufacturer, brand, trade name or catalog reference, shall be furnished under the contract unless changed by Addenda or a Contract modification. Where two (2) or more materials are named, the choice of these shall be optional with the Contractor. Material or equipment followed by the phrase "or equal" shall establish a standard of required function, dimension, appearance and quality to be met by any proposed substitute. No substitution will be considered unless written request for substitution has been submitted by the bidder and has been received by the Architect/Engineer at least ten days prior to the date for receipt of bids. The Architect/Engineer's decision on a proposed substitute shall be final. If the Architect/Engineer considers any proposed substitution equal, such will be set forth in an Addendum. Bidders shall not rely upon substitutions made in any other manner. Should the Contractor wish to use materials or equipment other than those specified or listed as equal by Addenda, he shall attach his proposed substitution along with the appropriate add or deduct to the Contract amount, should the substitution be accepted. Substitutions proposed by the Contractor will not be considered in the award of the Contract.

1.07 SHOP DRAWINGS: Refer to the requirements of the General Conditions. Unless indicated otherwise in the General Conditions, submit to the Architect/Engineer one electronic copy of Shop Drawings for each item of equipment to be installed under this contract. Furnish additional Shop Drawings as required for coordination with General Contractor and other Subcontractors. To the extent practical, complete sets of shop drawings for each specification section shall be submitted. In the case that a particular item is required to be expedited, that particular item may be submitted individually.

Submit shop drawings punched in PDF format.

Furnish Shop Drawings as follows:

1. For all major items of equipment or materials, regardless of whether the item is to be furnished as specified.

2. For all equipment, systems or devices where Shop Drawings are specifically called for. 3. For all minor items of equipment or materials where the Contractor proposes to deviate

from the specified and/or scheduled manufacturer or material.

The Contractor shall check all Shop Drawing submittals for size, capacity, arrangement, connection locations, materials, finish, color, electrical characteristics, accessories, and shall so


note the Shop Drawings prior to submittal to the Architect/Engineer. Any deviation from the Drawings and Specifications shall be indicated. Shop Drawings will be reviewed by the Architect/Engineer, and copies of Shop Drawings will be returned to the Contractor. Shop Drawings shall be submitted sufficiently in advance of the construction schedule to allow time for checking Drawings, resubmittal and rechecking when necessary. Any equipment or material which is installed without authorization by properly processed Shop Drawings will be subject to removal by the Contractor and reinstallation as directed, without cost to the Owner. All cost for repair for damages as may be incurred to the structure as a result of the above correction shall be paid by this Contractor. Shop drawing material quantities will not be checked by the Architect/Engineer, and review of Shop Drawings by the Architect/Engineer shall not be construed to be verification of the material quantities and sizes shown on the Shop Drawings. Quantities, sizes, dimensions and locations shown on the Drawings and as specified shall determine material requirements.

1.08 CLEANING: The Contractor and/or Subcontractors for the various phases of the work shall clear away all debris, surplus materials, etc., resulting from their work or operations, leaving the job and equipment furnished under any or all contracts in a clean first class condition. Permanent heating and ventilating systems shall not be used during the construction period unless the project site is in a clean and dust free condition and shall be subject to the approval of the Architect/Engineer and Owner. Air surfaces of all coils, heaters, boilers, pumps and mechanical equipment shall be wiped clean or washed if required, leaving the installation in a first class condition. All throwaway filters used during construction shall be replaced. All plumbing fixtures shall be thoroughly cleaned of all plaster, stickers, rust stains, and other foreign matter or discoloration, leaving every part in a first class condition and ready for use. The surfaces of all floor drains, cleanouts and other equipment shall be cleaned, and each item shall be left in a first class condition.

1.09 PAINTING: Painting of materials and equipment furnished under the mechanical portion of the contract shall be as described in Division 9 - FINISHES. Contractor shall refinish and restore to the original condition and appearance, all mechanical equipment which has sustained damage to the manufacturer's prime and finish coats of enamel or paint. Materials and workmanship shall be equal to the requirements described in Division 9 - FINISHES.

1.10 RECORD DRAWINGS: The Contractor shall keep a complete set of all mechanical drawings in the jobsite office for purpose of showing the installation of mechanical systems and equipment. This set of drawings shall be used for no other purpose. Where any materials equipment or system components are installed different from that shown on the Architect/Engineer's drawings, such differences shall be


clearly and neatly shown on this set of drawings using ink or indelible pencil. At the completion of the project, the record set of drawings shall be turned over to the Architect/Engineer and shall become his property.

1.11 STERILIZATION OF WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM: All domestic water and site irrigation systems shall be sterilized with sufficient chlorine to provide a dosage of not less than 200 ppm with a contact period of not less than 3 hours, and with all valves in line opened and closed at least three times during the sterilized period. Following the contact period, the water is to be thoroughly flushed from the system until the residual chlorine content is not more than 0.20 ppm. A certificate of completion shall be provided.

1.12 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS: The Contractor shall furnish the Owner two (2) sets of complete catalog data, manufacturer's literature and detailed manuals covering the operation and maintenance of all equipment specified under this Division. All such literature shall be bound in an amply sized three-ring binder and submitted to the Architect/Engineer for approval and for eventual transmittal to the Owner. The manual shall have a Table of Contents at the front of the manual. The Contractor shall also supervise the initial operation of all equipment and instruct the operator selected by the Owner in such operation as required to acquaint him thoroughly with the equipment.

1.13 DELIVERY AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS: Make provisions for delivery and safe storage of materials on the jobsite and make arrangements with other Contractors for introduction into the building of equipment too large to pass through finished openings. Materials to be delivered at such stages of the work as will expedite the work as a whole and marked and stored in such a way as to be easily checked and inspected. All stored equipment shall be protected from the weather conditions and construction debris with a protective covering securely tied in place.

1.14 MECHANICAL PROVISIONS: Mechanical equipment shall operate without objectionable noise or vibration, as determined by the Architect/Engineer. If such noise or vibration should be produced and transmitted to occupied portions of the building by apparatus, piping, or other parts of the mechanical work, make necessary changes and additions, as approved, without extra cost to Owner. Provide oil level gauges, grease cups and grease gun fittings for machinery bearings as recommended by the manufacturer. Extend oil or grease fittings by copper tubing to readily accessible locations.

1.15 CONCRETE BASES: Concrete bases are required for floor mounted mechanical equipment inside buildings and are specified in Division 3 - CONCRETE. After bases are poured they shall set at least seven (7) days


before mounting equipment. The Contractor shall coordinate the setting of expansion bolts in the bases for attachment of equipment and/or isolators.

This Contractor shall verify and coordinate the exact location of the bases and the exact size requirements for specific items of equipment.

Water heaters, tanks, and other floor mounted mechanical equipment shall be mounted on four inch (or as required) high concrete bases.

1.16 COORDINATION OF WORK: The Contractor shall process shop drawings and order equipment and materials expeditiously after receiving the Contract and the mechanical installation shall be substantially complete when the general construction work is completed. This Contractor shall confer and cooperate with all other Contractors on this project and shall arrange his work in proper relation to the work of others. Each Contractor shall furnish, install, and maintain in place all anchors, inserts, sleeves, etc., required for his work. Each Contractor will also be held solely responsible for proper size and location of all anchors, inserts, sleeves, chases, recesses, openings, bases, etc., required for proper installation of his work. All cutting and patching made necessary by failure or neglect to coordinate with other Contractors shall be the responsibility of this Contractor. Any cutting or patching shall be subject to the direction and approval of the Architect/Engineer and all damage due to cutting or patching shall be repaired by this Contractor. After being instructed by this Contractor to do so, the General Contractor will leave all openings in roof, walls, floors, etc., for the passage of pipes, etc. The General Contractor shall also provide concrete bases and roof curbs where shown for mounting the mechanical equipment unless specified otherwise. This Contractor shall verify the exact size and location required for installation of his equipment with the General Contractor. In general, the Division 26 – Electrical Contractor will provide all power wiring and make one power connection to each item of mechanical equipment, as outlined under Electrical Section.

1.17 GUARANTEE: All mechanical equipment including equipment used during construction for temporary purposes shall be guaranteed for a period of one year after the time of final acceptance of this work and shall be in like new condition at time of final acceptance.

1.18 ELECTRICAL: Electric Motors: All electric motor driven equipment being furnished and installed under Division 22 of these specifications shall be complete with electric motors, unless specified otherwise. All electric motors shall be as manufactured by Westinghouse, Century, Wagner, Allis Chalmers, Reliance, General Electric, or equal. Bearings shall be ball type with alemite lubricating fittings extended to an easily accessible location for field servicing. Minimum service factors for all motors shall be 1.15. All motors shall conform to applicable NEMA standards and all motors specified for use in hazardous locations shall bear the stamp of approval of the Underwriter's Laboratories. All motors, except direct connected motors, shall be furnished complete with cast


iron or stamped steel adjustable slide rails. Single phase motors shall be capacitor start type, drip proof, unless specified otherwise. All motors shall be single speed and shall operate at 1,750 RPM, unless specified otherwise. Horsepower Rating: All electric motors shall be sized to meet the horsepower requirements of the driven unit at design characteristics including all V-belt and/or drive and coupling losses which are incurred without loading the motor beyond its nameplate horsepower rating. Where V-belt drives are employed, the motor horsepower nameplate ratings shall not be less than 120 percent of the driven unit brake horsepower requirements. Single Phase Motors: Unless specifically noted otherwise, all electric motors shall be designed for operation in an ambient temperature not exceeding 40 degrees C., continuous duty and shall be designed for use with voltage as scheduled on Drawings or specified, 60 cycle alternating current. Motors shall be thermally protected. Three Phase Motors: All electric motors shall be designed for operating in an ambient temperature not exceeding 40 degrees C., continuous duty and shall be designed for use with voltage as scheduled on Drawings or specified, 60 cycle alternating current. All motors less than 3/4 horsepower shall be 115 volt, single phase unless designated otherwise and all motors 3/4 horsepower and larger shall be as specified in the specific section or as noted on the Drawings. Motors shall be designed with special stator steel for reduced core losses. Windings shall be oversized copper placed for maximum efficiency. Stator and rotor shall be extra long to reduce flux losses. Frame shall be ODP (unless specified otherwise) of cast iron or cast aluminum construction. Motors shall be squirrel cage, horizontal base mount, ball bearing, NEMA B design, Class B design, Class B insulation, continuous duty, 1.15 SF, 40 degrees C. ambient. Minimum nominal full load motor efficiencies shall be based on ASHRAE Standard 90 (latest edition). Motors shall be similar to Louis Allis "Spartan" Series, Gould "E-Plus" Series, or Westinghouse "MAC II" Series. Manufacturer shall furnish proof of efficiency rating. Motor Starters: Except where specifically described as being furnished as a part of the equipment furnished and installed under Division 22 of these specifications, all motor starters will be furnished and installed under Division 26, ELECTRICAL. Electrical Wiring: Except where specifically described as being furnished as a part of the equipment furnished and installed under Division 22, all electric power wiring shall be furnished and installed in Division 26, ELECTRICAL. The Electrical Contractor will make one power connection to each item of mechanical equipment, unless specified otherwise.


Electrical wiring furnished and installed under these specifications shall conform to all applicable requirements of Division 26, ELECTRICAL. Unless otherwise indicated, all motors and controls shall be furnished, set in place and wired in accordance with the following schedule:

Division Division Set in Place Wired & Furnished or Mounted Connected

Item Under Under Under

Equipment Motors 22 22 26

Line voltage thermostats, time clocks, etc., not connected to control panel systems 22 26 26

Electric thermostats, time clocks, remote bulb thermostats, motor valves, float controls, etc., which are an integral part or directly attached to ducts, pipes, etc. 22 22 22

Temperature control panels and time switches mounted on temperature control

22 22 22

Motor valves, solenoid valves, EP and PE switches, etc. 22 22 22

Control circuit feeders 26 26 26

Low voltage controls, thermostats, valves, etc. 22 22 22 Disconnect switches, thermal overload switches, manual operating switches 26 26 26 Contactors 26 26 26


Control relays, transformers 22 26 26

NOTES:

(1) Wiring from alarm contacts to alarm system shall be by the Division 26 Contractor; control function wiring shall be by the Division 22 Contractor.

All control wiring and controls as noted on the Drawings and/or as specified in these specifications shall be provided by this Contractor, including items set in place and wired and connected by the Division 26 Contractor, unless specifically shown otherwise on the Drawings.

1.19 SLEEVES: Any pipe passing through building construction including walls, floors, roofs or masonry partitions or as noted on the Drawings shall be encompassed with sleeves in accordance with the following: All pipe sleeves through slabs, floors, masonry walls and masonry partitions shall be 1/2 inch greater in inside diameter than the external diameter of pipe passing through. Sleeves for insulated piping shall be large enough to accommodate the insulation without harming the insulation or vapor barrier. All sleeves shall be fabricated from new material cut square and reamed. Sleeves shall be provided in all masonry partition walls including locations above suspended ceilings where masonry partition walls extend from floor slab to slab above. Sleeves shall be Schedule 40 steel pipe finishing flush with the wall surface. Sleeves through exterior building walls shall be Schedule 40 steel pipe with welded flange in the middle of the sleeve and ends finishing flush with finished surfaces. Space between pipe and sleeve shall be packed to provide a watertight joint. Sleeves through roof slabs and floor slabs in concealed locations shall be No. 22 gauge galvanized steel or crete sleeves (linear polyethylene). Concealed sleeves shall be considered as pipe sleeves in shafts, pipe chases and within walls and partitions. Sleeves through floor slabs in exposed areas shall be Schedule 40 steel pipe and sleeves shall extend 1/4 inch above the finished floor surface. For slabs in equipment rooms and in other wet areas, sleeves shall be Schedule 40 steel pipe and shall extend 2 inches above finished floor surface. Floor sleeves in membraned floors shall be furnished with flashing rings and clamps. All sleeves in exposed locations, except equipment rooms, shall be set so plates specified will cover the sleeves. All pipe sleeves where wet conditions exist, except sleeves through exterior walls, shall be caulked with a plastic caulking, including sleeves in concealed locations. The space between the pipe and the sleeves shall be packed with oakum and approximately 1/2 inch depth of a polyisobutylene sealer shall be packed or caulked in both ends of sleeve, even with the ends of the sleeve. The sealer shall be suitable for temperatures from minus 50 degrees to 300 degrees, suitable for painting, non-corrosive and have good adhesion.


All sleeves required to provide the proper openings in masonry construction for the passage of ductwork, mechanical equipment, etc., shall be furnished and installed by this Contractor. These sleeves shall also be removed by this Contractor after the opening has been formed. The opening around all ductwork, equipment, etc., passing through slabs, floors, walls and partitions shall be sealed as specified above for piping. Fire/smoke dampers shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions. All sleeves shall be set and maintained in place by this Contractor during the progress of the work. This Contractor shall be responsible for locating all sleeves at the proper location. Sleeves are not required for core drilled masonry wall and floor holes, masonry wall and floor holes formed by polyethylene plastic (removable) sleeves, or for masonry holes made in another neat manner except in equipment rooms and other wet areas. Sleeves are not required in metal or wood stud wall construction. Rated systems shall be provided as required to provide the necessary rating of the penetration. Interior wall sleeves are only required on cold insulated piping (cold water, downspout, chilled water supply and return, etc.). All other steel or cast iron piping 4 inches and smaller shall be grouted directly into the wall as necessary to provide the required fire and smoke rating. Piping larger than 4 inch size and all non-rated piping shall be provided with a rated system. Firestopping materials shall be 3M, Hilti, MetaCaulk, Nelson or equal.

1.20 WALL, FLOOR AND CEILING PLATES: Furnish and install chrome-plated wall, floor and ceiling plates on all exposed pipes where they pass through walls, floors, or ceilings in finished areas. Finished areas shall be those areas which are painted or have special finishes within the room. The wall plates shall be a minimum of 3/32 inch thickness and shall have set screws or spring locks for clamping to the piping. Flush valves shall have set screw type wall plates. The plates shall be chrome-plated steel, cast iron or brass and shall set tight against the wall.

1.21 EQUIPMENT SUPPORT: Furnish and install all necessary wall backing, brackets, braces, plates, angles, closet carriers, lavatory carriers, urinal carriers, wall hangers, etc., required for properly supporting plumbing fixtures, mechanical equipment and mechanical appurtenances. All supports shall be securely anchored with lead inserts, expansion shields, through-going bolts, lag screws or other devices as required. All items of mechanical equipment hung from overhead structure shall be hung from 2-1/2 inches by 2-1/2 inches by 3/16 inch angles minimum which shall span at least 3 members, unless noted otherwise.

1.22 EXISTING SERVICES: The Contractor shall verify the exact location of all existing building services extended and/or relocated for this project. The Contractor shall also verify the exact location and take proper precautions to protect all services which may be encountered during construction.


All active services which are encountered shall be protected, braced and supported where required for proper execution of the work and without interruption of the service if possible. All inactive services which are encountered shall be protected or removed as directed by the Architect/Engineer, Owner, Utility Company or Municipal Agency having jurisdiction. The service shall also be plugged or capped as directed. When active services must be temporarily interrupted, the interruption shall be scheduled at night or at such time as approved by the Owner or authority having jurisdiction and so as to cause the minimum of interference with establishing operating routine. Arrangements shall be made to work continuously including overtime if required, to assure that services will be interrupted only as long as actually required to complete necessary work.

1.23 EXCAVATION: Trenching and excavation for all underground piping and equipment shall be excavated to the required depths. The bottom of the excavation shall be tamped hard and graded to secure the required fill. Bell holes shall be excavated so that pipe will rest on solid ground for its entire length. Rock, where encountered, shall be excavated to a depth of 6 inches below the bottom of pipe and before pipe is laid, the space between bottom of pipe and rock surface shall be filled with gravel. Sewer and water pipes shall be laid in separate trenches, except where otherwise noted and in accordance with applicable codes. After the piping and equipment have been tested, inspected and approved by the Architect/Engineer and prior to the backfilling, forms shall be removed and the excavation shall be cleaned of trash and debris. Materials for backfilling shall consist of the excavation, or borrow of sand or gravel, and shall be free of trash, lumber, or other debris. Backfill shall be placed in horizontal layers, not exceeding 9 inches in thickness, and properly moistened. Backfill inside the building and under any exterior slabs or other paved areas shall be compacted by hand or mechanical means to the density of 95 percent Proctor and areas outside the building not covered by concrete slabs or other structures or pavement shall be compacted to the density of the adjacent undisturbed soil. Any settling within the one (1) year guarantee period shall be repaired at no cost to the Owner.

1.24 ACCESS TO EQUIPMENT: Access shall be provided to all motors, valves, controls, specialties, etc., for maintenance purposes. All access doors, access panels, removable sections, etc., required for access shall be provided. The location of the access openings relative to the mechanical equipment shall be coordinated to assure proper access to the equipment. The door shall maintain any ratings of the wall, ceiling, etc. that it penetrates. Access openings are required for valves and other devices requiring access and shall be provided in the ductwork, plenums, housings, tanks, walls, ceilings, etc., under this portion of the Contract.

1.25 PROTECTIVE DEVICES: All sheaves, belts, drives, couplings, and moving parts shall be protected by approved permanent guards, shields, or railings, which shall be in place whenever the equipment is in operation and shall be in accordance with applicable safety standards.


All pressure and/or temperature relief valves shall have the discharge piped full size to within 6 inches of the floor or floor drain. The piping shall be securely anchored. All relief valves shall be ASME approved and proper size for the application.

1.26 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS: Furnish and install where shown on the Drawings and required to connect fixtures and equipment, pipe and fittings of type and material for the various services as noted below. At all exposed fixture supply connections, nipples are required between copper tubing and fixtures, such nipples shall be standard weight full iron pipe size chrome-plated brass pipe nipples with suitable brass or copper adapters. Steel or iron nipples will not be permitted in any location in copper lines where connections are made to brass fixtures, valves or trim. Compression stops may be used when fitted tight against the wall escutcheon with no exposed copper piping. Sweat adapters and chrome plated cover tubes may be used when the cover tube extends the entire pipe from the elbow in the wall or chase to the flush valve and fits tight. Piping that is not shown on the Drawings, which is obviously necessary for complete systems, shall be provided and shall be amply sized in accordance with applicable codes and standards. The piping for the various systems shall be as follows:

Cold, hot and recirculating hot water in buildings above ground, 3 inches and smaller shall be Type L, hard drawn copper tubing, ASTM B88 and Federal Specification WW-T-799. Fittings shall be wrought copper solder type, ANSI B16.22. Joints for pipe and fittings shall be made with No. 95-5 (tin-antimony) solder and No. 50 non-corrosive flux. Water in or outside of buildings underground shall be HDPE Plastic, or Type K copper. The copper shall be Type K soft drawn copper, ASTM B88 and Federal Specification WW-T-799 with wrought copper solder fittings, ANSI B16.22. Joints for pipe and fittings shall be made with No. 95-5 (tin-antimony) solder and No. 50 non-corrosive flux. Soil, waste, and vent piping in buildings underground shall be cast iron, ABS or PVC plastic.

Piping may be service weight cast iron soil pipe, Federal Specification WW-P-401 hub and spigot to 5 feet outside building walls, coated with asphaltum. Fittings shall be cast iron hub and spigot, coated with asphaltum. Piping may be hubless cast iron pipe and fittings.

Where codes permit, piping may be ABS or PVC Schedule 40 plastic piping and fittings. ABS piping and fittings shall meet ASTM D2661-68. PVC piping and fittings shall meet ASTM D2665-68 and Federal Specification L-P-320.

Soil, waste, and vent piping in building, above ground shall be galvanized steel, cast iron, ABS or PVC plastic, as follows:

Piping may be galvanized steel pipe, ASTM A120, Federal Specification WW-P-406, Schedule 40, screwed. After assembly of pipe and fittings, paint visible threads with aluminum paint. Fittings shall be standard weight, black cast iron (galvanized cast iron where required by code), screwed. For waste, soil, and


rainwater piping, drainage type (Durham) fittings of long pattern shall be used. For rainwater piping the Contractor may use grooved galvanized steel pipe, grooved fittings and mechanical couplings by written request to the Architect/Engineer including evidence that governing codes permit its use and naming the material manufacturer, pressure rating and other pertinent data. Piping may be standard weight screwed, or hubless cast iron pipe and fittings. If screwed cast iron is used, threads shall be painted after assembly. Where codes permit, piping may be ABS or PVC Schedule 40 plastic piping and fittings. ABS piping and fittings shall meet ASTM D2661-68. PVC piping and fittings shall meet ASTM D2665-68 and Federal Specification L-P-320. For 2 inch and larger pipe, piping may be standard weight, cast iron, hub and spigot soil pipe, Federal Specification WW-P-401. For 1-1/2 inch and smaller pipe, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, ASTM A120 and Federal Specification WW-P-406. Fittings for hub and spigot shall be long pattern. For 1-1/2 inch and smaller fittings shall be black cast iron, screwed, drainage fittings (Durham) long pattern. Hub and spigot joints shall be preformed molded rubber rings where codes permit. For sizes 1-1/2 inch and smaller, piping may be Schedule 40, galvanized Yoloy screwed pipe, ASTM A53 and Federal Specification WW-P-404.

Cooling coil condensate drains and louver drains in buildings above ground shall be Type L, hard drawn copper tubing, ASTM B88 and Federal Specification WW-T-799. Fittings shall be wrought copper solder type, ANSI B16.22. Joints for pipe and fittings shall be made with No. 95-5 (tin-antimony) solder and No. 50 non-corrosive flux.

1.27 VALVES:

Furnish and install valves in piping where so indicated on the Drawings. In addition, shut-off valves shall be provided in piping adjacent to each item of equipment, fixtures, etc., in the branch piping to each toilet group and at the base of all water risers. All cold water and chilled water valves shall have an extended operator stem and insulation sleeve to accommodate the pipe insulation and vapor barrier. All gate and globe valves shall be installed with stem in a vertical position wherever possible. Of the several manufacturers listed, the Contractor is to standardize on one make as much as practical but not to the extent of sacrificing quality listed. Valves shall be Milwaukee, Crane, Powell, Stockham, Walworth, Victaulic, Grinnell, Anvil Gruvlok, Watts, Nibco, Hammond or equal. The valves designated in the following schedule are fully described in the valve list following this schedule. Valve Service Valve Designation Shut-Off Valves For:


Cold, Hot and Recirculating Hot Water

Pipe sizes 2 in. and smaller V-l or V-2 Balancing Valves For: Recirculating Domestic Hot Water V-l Check Valves For:

Cold, Hot and Recirculating Hot Water

Pipe sizes 2 in. and smaller V-4

The following is a list of valves types from which valves for use on this project have been selected. See the valve service schedule preceding this list for types to be used on each service. (V-1) Ball Valves (Fed. Spec. WW-V-35b,): Bronze body ball valve, conventional port, lever handle, screwed or soldered and teflon seats and stem packing, 150 psi SWP, 400 psi WOG, Milwaukee BA-100 or BA-150, 1/2 inch through 2 inch size. Provide Memory Stop on all valves used for balancing purposes. (V-2) Gate Valves (Fed. Spec. WW-V-54c, Class A. Type II): Bronze body gate valve, rising stem, solid bronze wedge, screw-in bonnet, threaded or soldered ends, teflon packing, 125 psi SWP, 200 psi WOG, 1/4 inch through 2 inch size, Milwaukee 148 or 149. (V-4) Bronze Check Valve (Fed. Spec. WW-V-5ld, Class A, Type IV): Bronze check valve, horizontal swing regrinding type, Y-pattern, renewable disc, 125 psi SWP, 200 psi WOG, 1/4 inch through 2 inch size, Milwaukee 509 or 1509.

1.28 PIPING CONNECTIONS: Furnish and install unions or mating flanges at all connections to each piece of equipment, conveniently located to facilitate quick and easy disconnecting of equipment for replacement, tube cleaning or general maintenance. Flanged or union connections shall be used on both sides of equipment connections, pressure reducing valves, meters, tanks, pumps and the like. Unions or flanges shall be of the same material or finish as the piping systems in which they are installed. Unions are not required for grooved pipe systems. Dielectric unions, flanges, or waterways shall be installed in domestic hot, cold and recirculating water lines where copper or brass piping is connected to ferrous material such as steel piping, steel tanks, steel water heater, etc. Dielectric unions 2 inch size and smaller shall be steel body and nut with insulating gasket and copper connector, 250 psi rating at 190 degrees F., EBCO Model FX, FB, or EA. For 2-1/2 inch size and larger, the union shall be flanges, cast iron with insulated gasket and copper connector, 175 psi rating at 190 degrees F., EBCO Model GX or GA.


Grooved pipe and mechanical joint couplings may be utilized in certain piping systems with Architect/Engineer approval. See section on pipe and pipe fittings.

1.29 PIPE HANGERS, SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS: Anchors as shown and detailed on the Drawings and specified herein and/or as required. All support components shall conform to Manufacturer's Standardization Society Specification SP-58. The hangers shall adequately support the piping system. They shall be located near or at changes in piping direction and at concentrated loads. They shall provide vertical adjustment to maintain pitch required for proper drainage. They shall allow for expansion and contraction of the piping. On other than vapor barrier insulated lines, hangers shall bear directly on piping. Hangers shall be constructed of malleable or wrought iron unless noted otherwise, and hangers supporting copper pipe shall be copper plated. Hangers for pipe 3 inches and smaller shall be band and socket Michigan Model No. 100 or equal. For piping over 3 inches, hangers shall be adjustable, Clevis type, Michigan Model No. 400 or equal. Where groups of three or more pipes occur, they may be supported with trapeze hangers using two hangers as specified with a capped pipe cross member. Where clearance between pipe and overhead support is insufficient for the use of other hangers specified, use Michigan Model No. 605 or equal. Horizontal steel or cast iron piping shall be supported as follows: Rod Maximum Pipe Size Diameter Spacing Up to 1-1/4 inch 3/8 inch 8 feet 1-1/2 inch & 2 inch 3/8 inch 10 feet 2-1/2 inch & 3-1/2 inch 1/2 inch 15 feet 4 inch & 5 inch 5/8 inch 15 feet 6 inch 3/4 inch 17 feet 8 inch through 12 inch 7/8 inch 22 feet Horizontal copper piping shall be supported as follows: Rod Maximum Pipe Size Diameter Spacing Up to 1 inch 3/8 inch 6 feet 1-1/4 inch & 1-1/2 inch 3/8 inch 8 feet 2 inch 3/8 inch 9 feet 2-1/2 inch 1/2 inch 9 feet 3 inch & 4 inch 1/2 inch 10 feet For vertical piping, where supports are not indicated on the Drawings, support steel and copper pipe at every other floor. Pipe hangers shall not be attached to the roof deck. Hangers shall be attached to the structure with beam clamps, beam attachment and brackets bolted to joists and beams. Use Michigan Model No.


340 or equal, steel washer plates for pipe supported from steel joist. The Contractor shall endeavor to hang near joist panel joints wherever possible. Pipe hangers for cold piping and all insulated piping on trapeze hangers shall be large enough to encompass the insulation, using a metal shield so the vapor barrier jacket will not be broken. See Insulation Section. Pipe mounting brackets for cold piping shall be large enough to encompass the insulation B-Line Model B2417 or equal. This piping shall be anchored securely at the point of connection to plumbing fixtures. The last mounting bracket adjacent to fixtures and equipment may clamp directly onto the pipe. A short length (18 inches maximum) of piping between the last bracket and the connection is allowed without insulation. Hanging from one pipe to another is prohibited. Pipe Hangers shall be Michigan, Grinnell, PHD, B-Line or equal.

1.30 PIPING INSTALLATION: All pipes shall be round and straight, of required size. Cutting shall be done with proper tools and pipes shall be reamed to full size after cutting. Piping shall be properly enclosed, supported, guided, anchored, sway braced, connected, tested, cleaned and flushed out and shall be properly insulated and protected where required. All pipes shall be run with proper grade to provide for easy draining and in group runs where applicable and in a neat and orderly manner, to the satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer. Lines required to be enclosed in ceiling, chaseways or similar spaces shall be installed to permit such enclosure as intended. All pipe runs shall be carefully laid out and scheduled to avoid necessary interferences with other work. Pipe sizes shown on the Drawings are nominal pipe sizes and not outside diameters. Pipes shall be run substantially as indicated on the Drawings. However, the Architect/Engineer reserves the right to require this Contractor to make changes in pipe locations where conflicts occur with other trades. Such changes shall be made without extra cost to the Owner. Piping shall be installed with ample provisions for expansion and contraction to prevent injury to the same and to the building construction. Such provision shall be made by means of piping offsets, changes in direction, expansion loops and/or suitable expansion joints. Suitable anchors and guides shall be provided to permit proper deflection and compression of offset loops and expansion joints. Expansion joints shall not be used in lieu of offsets, changes in direction or loops, except where specified and/or indicated on the Drawings or where otherwise obviously necessary. Exposed piping shall be installed in a sanitary manner for ease in cleaning. Pipe shall be cut and threaded to fit the installation. Wherever possible, rough-in exposed pipe connections at the wall rather than the floor for ease in cleaning. Equipment piping shall also include wastes and drains which are safe-wasted without a direct connection.


Minimum grade for horizontal drainage piping shall be 1/4 inch per foot for 3 inch diameter piping or less, 1/8 inch per foot for 4 inch and 6 inch diameter piping and 1/16 inch per foot for drainage piping over 6 inch diameter.

1.31 THERMOMETERS: Furnish and install Weiss "Thriftline" TL5S2 or TS5A2 or equal thermometers in pipelines and equipment as tabulated and/or where shown on the Drawings. Thermometers shall have a minimum of 6 inch scale with separable socket, cast aluminum case, red reading mercury, industrial type complete with thermometer wells. The normal operating temperature of each thermometer shall be at 50-70 percent of full scale. The range of the scale shall be suitable for the application. Thermometer installation will not be accepted unless they can be easily read by an operator standing on the floor. Thermometers shall also be required on the outlet of all domestic water heaters and mixing valves. Thermometers shall be Weiss, Trerice, Weksler or equal. END OF SECTION 220100

PLUMBING 220400-1

SECTION 220400 – PLUMBING

1.01 SCOPE: The GENERAL, SUPPLEMENTAL and other CONDITIONS of the Contract and the GENERAL REQUIREMENTS (Division 1) are hereby made part of this Section. Section 220100, General Provisions, in its entirety, including references to the General Construction Specifications, are hereby adopted and made part of these Specifications. The work involved in this specification and the accompanying Drawings consists of performing all labor and furnishing of all materials, fixtures and equipment necessary to install complete sanitary sewer systems and potable hot and cold water systems, as described herein and/or shown on the Drawings. This includes all piping, wiring and materials obviously necessary for complete systems though not specifically mentioned or shown. See Section 220700 for insulation requirements.

1.02 SYSTEM OF PLUMBING: The continuous waste and vent method of plumbing shall be installed. Hot, tempered and cold water lines are to be installed where shown. All water piping in finished areas shall be concealed in joist spaces above ceilings, and in walls. Pipes run overhead shall be placed as close to the ceiling as possible, to maintain proper headroom and to present a neat appearance, all consistent with the pitching of pipes for drainage of the systems. The plumbing work shall be installed in strict accordance with the best plumbing practice, all subject to the Architect/Engineer's approval in accordance with all applicable local, state and national plumbing regulations.

1.03 PLUMBING VENT THRU ROOF (VTR): Vent stacks from sewer, soil, waste and drain pipes shall be extended at least 12 inches above the roof. The top of the vent shall be designed so as to permit the insertion therein of a testing plug of such form that it can be readily seen until removed, and said plug shall be removed at once after final inspection has been made and approved by the Architect/Engineer. The minimum size of any vent passing through roof shall be 4 inches. Vent pipe which extends thru the roof shall be black in color.

1.04 CLEANOUTS: Full size brass screw cleanout plugs shall be furnished and installed at the bottom of all soil and waste stacks and at all points where shown on the Drawings and where necessary to permit the entire drainage system to be rodded out easily. Floor drains located in branch lines shall have cleanouts adjacent to the drains.

PLUMBING 220400-2

Floor cleanouts shall be cast iron with inside caulk ferrule, brass plug, adjustable housing and round nickel brass secured frame and scoriated cover. Wade covers shall be heavy duty. In ceramic and quarry tile floor finishes the cover shall be square. Zurn Z-1425, Wade W-6010; Josam 58100; or equal. Flashing clamp and collar shall be furnished with all cleanouts installed in floors having waterproof membranes. Wall and ceiling plates shall be Zurn Z-1460-9, Wade W-8480-R, Josam 58600, or equal. Cleanouts shall be Wade, Zurn, Josam, Ancon, J. R. Smith, Mifab, Sioux Chief or equal.

1.05 FLOOR DRAINS:

Furnish and install floor drains where shown on the Drawings and as specified or equal. All floor drains installed in floors with waterproof membranes shall have flashing clamps. Floor drains except in mechanical rooms, garages and the like shall be Josam Series 30000-A, Wade W-1100 or equal with 5 inch diameter Nickaloy strainer having a minimum of 7.3 square inch free area. In ceramic and quarry tile floor finishes the floor drain strainer shall be square. Furnish and install a deep seal trap. Floor drains in mechanical rooms shall be Josam Series 36000, Wade W-1340 or equal with heavy duty 8 inch diameter grate. Furnish and install a deep seal trap with cleanout. Floor drains shall be Josam, Zurn, Wade, Smith, Ancon, Mifab, Sioux Chief or equal.

1.06 WASTE, VENT AND WATER CONNECTIONS TO FIXTURES: Rough-in for waste, vent and water connections at the various fixtures shall be as follows, unless noted otherwise:

Waste Vent Water

Water closet (tank) 4" 2" 1/2"

Water closet (flush) 4" 2" 1-1/4"

Urinal 2" 1-1/2" 1"

Lavatory 1-1/2" 1-1/2" 1/2"

Sink 2" 1-1/2" 1/2" Kitchen sink 2" 1-1/2" 1/2"

Service sink and receptor 3" 1-1/2" 1/2" Drinking fountain and EWC 1-1/4" 1-1/4" 1/2"

PLUMBING 220400-3

Waste, vent and water supply piping to plumbing fixtures and equipment which is not shown on the Drawings shall be provided and shall be amply sized in accordance with the above schedule. All plumbing fixtures, wastes, and drains shall be vented in accordance with all applicable Local, State and National Plumbing Regulations.

1.07 PLUMBING FIXTURES: Furnish and install all plumbing fixtures as specified hereinafter and as designated on the Drawings. Catalog numbers shown are used to designate the type of fixture desired. Special equipment included in this schedule is identified by brand name and number. Caulk around all floor and wall mounted fixtures. Caulking shall be done in a skilled manner with silicone based white acrylic latex caulk. Caulking shall be water tight, flexible, mildew and shrink resistant. All exposed flush, waste and supply pipes at the fixtures shall be chromium-plated brass pipe, iron pipe size. No steel nipples or cover tubes will be allowed. The stop valves, pop-up wastes, flush valves, etc., shall be heavy cast brass chromium-plated. Waterlines to all the individual fixtures, where exposed, shall be equipped with high grade, loose key chromium plated brass stop valves unless scheduled otherwise on the Drawings. All chromium plating shall be applied over a nickel plated base. Enameled fixtures shall be acid resistant. Provide backing in the wall to support the fixture. All water closets shall have bolt caps with retainer clips. Groups of fixtures shall be matched. The Schedule shown on the Drawings is given for the convenience of the Contractor who is to be responsible for exact quantities. Any fixtures indicated on the Drawings, but not specifically mentioned in the Specifications or scheduled, shall be furnished by the Contractor. Plumbing Fixtures shall be as scheduled, American Standard, Crane, Eljer, Briggs, Kohler, Sloan, Vitra, Zurn-One, Gerber, or equal. Fixture carriers shall be Josam, Wade, Zurn, Blake, Smith, Watts or equal. Brassware shall be the manufacturer's own brass, Chicago Faucet, T&S Brass, Speakman, Cambridge Brass, Zurn, Gerber, as scheduled or equal. Faucets shall meet NSF Standard 61, Section 9 for drinking water. Lavatory faucets shall have a five year minimum warranty against leaking and shall be equipped with temperature limit stops and vandal resistant aerators. Faucet bodies shall be chrome-plated zinc die-cast or solid cast brass (polished or chrome plated) as scheduled on the Drawings. Lavatory faucets shall be American Standard, Eljer, Delta, Moen, Zurn, Chicago/Geberit, Kohler, Sloan, Bradley, Speakman, T&S Brass, Cambridge Brass, Gerber, or equal. Mop sinks shall be Fiat, Stern Williams, Swan, Mustee, Zurn as scheduled or equal. Stainless Steel sinks shall be Elkay, Carlton, Just, as scheduled or equal. Water Closet seats shall be as scheduled, Centoco, Church, Bemis, Beneke, Sperzel, Olsonite, Gerber, or equal.

PLUMBING 220400-4

Flush Valves shall be as scheduled, Sloan , Zurn or equal.

1.08 SHOCK ABSORBERS: Piping shall be installed with proper safeguards to prevent water hammer. This will be done by installing a sufficient number of shock absorbers where indicated on the Drawings. Air cushion shall be same size as piping on which installed, 16 inches long, with removable cap wherever accessible. The commercial shock absorbers indicated on the Drawings shall be sized as follows: Size Fixture Units SA-1 1 -11 SA-2 12-32 SA-3 33-60 SA-4 61-113 SA-5 114-154 SA-6 155-330 Shock Absorbers shall be Josam, Wade, Zurn, Sioux Chief or equal.

1.09 WALL HYDRANTS: Furnish and install 3/4 inch freezeless type wall hydrants where shown on the Drawings. Wall hydrants shall be Woodford Model 65-C or equal, modular brass body with brushed chrome finish and self-draining vacuum breaker. Operating stem shall be hardened stainless steel with loose-key operator. Provide a key with each hydrant and unless stated otherwise, the hydrant shall be installed 24 inches above finished grade. Wall hydrants shall be Woodford, Zurn, Smith, Watts or equal.

1.10 HOSE BIBBS: Furnish and install Woodford Model No. 24P-3/4 or Model 24C or equal hose bibb where shown on the Drawings. Hose bibbs shall be female type with 3/4 inch thread inlet, 3/4 inch hose thread outlet, with integral vacuum breaker, and rough brass finish. Unless noted otherwise, the hose bibbs shall be installed 42 inches above finished floor. Hose Bibbs shall be Nibco, Watts, Woodford, Zurn or equal.

1.11 ELECTRIC WATER HEATER (RESIDENTIAL): Furnish and install an electric water heater where shown on the Drawings. Heater tank shall be glass lined steel, factory-insulated and jacketed, and shall include a 1 year guarantee. Heating element shall be single element type, complete with operating and high limit thermostat. Heaters shall be approved by UL and shall be so labeled.

PLUMBING 220400-5

The Contractor shall furnish and install a temperature and pressure relief valve at the hot water outlet from the heater, with discharge piped full size down to within 6 inches of the floor, or as shown on the Drawings. Water heaters shall be Crane, State, Rheem, Jackson, A. O. Smith, American, PVI, Lochinvar, Bradford White or equal.

1.12 WATER SERVICE AND METER: Furnish and install a water service as shown on the drawings. The water meter shall be purchased from the City or shall be of the type approved by the City. All outside water piping shall be installed at a minimum depth of 6'-0" below finished grade.

1.13 SANITARY SEWER SERVICE: Furnish and install sanitary sewer service as shown on the Drawings. The service within 5'-0" of the building and as designated on the Drawings shall be cast iron or PVC pipe and fittings. The service shall be extended at a uniform grade. The Contractor shall verify all invert elevations before beginning excavations. The complete installation shall be in accordance with all applicable, Local, State, and National plumbing regulations.

1.14 MIXING VALVE: Furnish and install a Lawler Model 570 or equal thermostatic mixing valve where shown on the Drawings. The valve shall have a range from 95 degrees F. to 115 degrees F. Temperature adjustment control shall be tamper-resistant. Water mixing valve shall be of the thermostatic type with liquid filled thermal motor. It shall have bronze body construction with replaceable corrosion resistant components. Valve construction shall employ a sliding piston control mechanism. Sliding piston and liner shall be of stainless steel material. Valve shall come equipped with union end stop and check inlets with removable stainless steel strainers. Valve shall provide protection against hot or cold supply line failure and thermostat failure. Valve capacity range shall be .5 gpm to 12 gpm at a maximum pressure differential of 30 psi. The valve shall control within +/- 3 of the setpoint throughout the adjustment range. Valves shall be MCC Powers, Lawler, Symmons, T & S Brass, Leonard or equal.

1.15 REDUCED PRESSURE BACKFLOW PREVENTER: Furnish and install Watts Regulator Co. Series No. 009-S, 909-S or equal reduced pressure backflow preventer. Where shown, the backflow preventer shall be a complete assembly including tight-closing shut-off valves before and after the device and also be protected by a strainer. The

PLUMBING 220400-6

design shall include test cocks and a pressure-differential relief valve located between two positive seating check valves. The device shall meet the requirements of A.S.S.E. Standard 1013 and A.W.W.A. Standard C506. Unit vent outlet shall have a suitable connection for an air gap and shall be provided with an air gap fitting piped to a floor drain. After installation the backflow preventer shall be tested and certified by a licensed technician. Reduced pressure backflow preventers shall be Watts, Hersey, Conbraco, Febco, Wilkins or equal.

1.16 THERMAL EXPANSION ABSORBER: Furnish and install a Thermal Expansion Absorber where shown on the Drawings. The steel tank shall have a flexible bladder separating air and water. The tank shall have a pressure rating of 150 psi and shall be non-asme. Thermal Expansion Absorber shall be Amtrol, Armstrong, Taco or equal.

1.17 TESTS: The following tests shall be performed on the respective systems. Tests shall be repeated until each system is proven acceptable. The Contractor is responsible for the following tests: Soil, waste, and vent piping and rain water conductors, etc., shall be tested in accordance with applicable state and local codes. Unless stated otherwise in the applicable codes, these systems shall be tested with 5 psi air pressure for a period of 15 minutes with a maximum drop of 1 psi during this period. Cold, hot and recirculating hot water shall be tested and proven watertight under a hydrostatic pressure of 100 psi. END OF SECTION 220400

INSULATION AND PIPING IDENTIFICATION 220700 - 1

SECTION 220700 – PLUMBING AND HEATING INSULATION AND PIPING IDENTIFICATION

1.01 SCOPE: The GENERAL, SUPPLEMENTAL and other CONDITIONS of the Contract and the GENERAL REQUIREMENTS (Division 1) are hereby made part of this Section. Section 220100, General Provisions, in its entirety, including references to the General Construction Specifications are hereby adopted and made part of these specifications. The work involved in this specification and the accompanying Drawings consists of performing all labor and furnishing of all labor, materials, fixtures, and equipment necessary to install complete piping, and equipment insulation as described herein and/or as shown on the Drawings. This includes all equipment and materials obviously necessary for complete systems though not specifically mentioned or shown.

1.02 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP: All covering and insulating materials used on this project must contain the manufacturer's name on the containers. All materials must be dry and in good condition, free of defects, mildew, rough ends, etc. Insulation materials shall be Certainteed, Owens-Corning, Johns Manville, Armstrong, Knauf or equal. All insulation work shall be performed by an Insulation Contractor who uses workers skilled in this type of work. Only first class workmanship will be acceptable. The Insulation Contractor shall submit shop drawings for all materials proposed to be installed in this project. All pipe covering shall have a density of not less than 3-1/2 pounds per cubic foot. All materials shall have composite fire and smoke hazard ratings as tested by procedures ASTM 84, NFPA 255, AND U.L. 723 not to exceed 25 Flame Spread and 50 Smoke Developed.

1.03 PIPING AND VESSELS INSULATION: All pipe covering shall be furnished with a factory-applied all service jacket. All-Service jacket shall have a polymer film exterior surface. All longitudinal joints shall be sealed with adhesive such as Benjamin Foster 30-35, or equal, or factory applied self-sealing laps. All end joints shall be sealed with 3 inches wide butt strips of material identical to pipe covering jackets, using adhesive or self-sealing jacket. No stapling will be permitted on any vapor-barrier jackets. No vapor-barrier work or self-sealing laps or lap work shall be installed when temperatures are below 40 degrees F. Insulation shall be continuous through properly sized wall and floor sleeves with no joints within 12 inches of the penetration. Where a fitting is adjacent to the wall a continuous section of insulation must extend from the fitting to 12 inches beyond the other side of the wall. Wrap pipe at penetrations of fire or smoke barriers with firestop pipe insulation, seal jacket seam and seal end joints to adjacent sections of insulation. Seal opening between insulation and pipe sleeve with firestopping material.


All plastic, fiberglass or other piping and fittings that are not rated for unprotected installation in return air plenums shall be wrapped with 3M Fire Barrier Plenum Wrap 5A+, or equal. The installation shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s written instructions. Wrap shall be a high temperature fiber blanket thermal insulation encapsulated in a fiberglass reinforced aluminum foil. Plenum wrap density shall be nominal 6 pcf and have a nominal ½ inch minimum thickness. The fiberglass blanket shall have a continuous use limit in excess of 1832 degrees F (1000 degrees C). Flame Spread Index and Smoke Developed Index of the foil encapsulated blanket shall be equal to or less than 25/50.

All insulation installations shall conform to ASHRAE Standard 90.

1.04 FITTING AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION: Insulate all fittings, valves, flanges and strainers with mitered segments of pipe insulation wired in place and premolded PVC plastic covers. Plastic covers shall be taped and sealed with a continuous vapor barrier on all cold systems. Plastic covers shall be Zeston or equal. The Contractor shall allow for the removal and replacement of four (4) fitting or joint covers selected by the Architect/Engineer for inspection purposes. If any of the removed covers reveal unsatisfactory installation as determined by the Architect/Engineer, four (4) additional covers may be removed and replaced. Fitting covers may be removed and replaced four (4) at a time until the system installation is satisfactory. For fittings where premolded PVC plastic covers are not available, coat each fitting with two 1/8 inch coats of an approved vapor-barrier mastic such as Childers CP-30 or equal. Reinforce each fitting by wrapping with glass fabric cloth extending 2 inches onto adjacent pipes and finish with additional coating of mastic worked into mesh of cloth to provide a smooth finish. Coat vapor barrier penetrations, including insulation end butts, piping brackets, valve operator stems, etc., with two 1/8 inch coats of an approved vapor-barrier mastic. Trim the insulation at valve handle operators to allow for valve operation without damaging the vapor barrier. Insulation mastic for cold systems shall be Childer's CP-30 or equal for cold system vapor barriers. Vapor barrier shall be rated at 0.02 perms or less in accordance with ASTM E96 procedures. Corner beads shall be used on all square corners. Insulation shall be cut or mitered where necessary to fit the contour of the fittings and equipment. All voids shall be packed with light density glass fiber insulation. Insulation sections shall be banded in place with 3/4 inch x 0.015 inch thick galvanized steel bands at 18 inch o.c. for all large equipment. Insulation shall be covered with one inch galvanized hexagonal wire mesh. Apply 1/2 inch of insulating cement such as OC-110 or equal in 2 layers over the wire mesh. On all cold systems, insulation shall be impaled over welding pins at 12 inches o.c. and secured in place with speed washers. The 3/4 inch steel bands will not be required. Each layer of insulation shall have a vapor barrier cover to provide complete airtight envelope. Vapor-barrier shall consist of one layer of Ludflow foil barrier paper smoothly adhered to the insulation cement surface with vapor-barrier lap adhesive. Lap all joints a minimum of 3 inch and seal with vapor-barrier lap adhesive.


1.05 HOT PIPING AND VESSELS: The following systems shall be insulated with the following minimum thicknesses of glass fiber insulation:

MINIMUM PIPE INSULATION – INTERNATIONAL ENERGY CONSERVATION CODE & ASHRAE 90.1 Based on thermal conductivity (k) of 0.23 btu-in./hour-ft2-°F on a flat surface at 75o F. mean

Fluid Insulation Thickness for Pipe Sizes Temp.

Piping System Range 1" & 1-1/4" 2” 2-1/2" 5 8" & Types Deg.F. Under to 1 1/2" to 4" to 6" Over Domestic Systems - HW, RHW Any 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 Do not insulate radiation runouts enclosed in radiation cover and risers between floor and radiation cover.

1.06 COLD PIPING AND VESSELS:

The following systems and services shall be insulated with the following thicknesses of glass fiber insulation including a factory-applied all service jacket and vapor barrier:

Pipe Sizes ½” through 2” 2-1/2” to 12”

Domestic CW, 1/2" 1" All rods for pipe hangers and metals having direct contact with cold water piping shall be insulated up to 8 inches and sealed same as fittings. Refer to Section 220100 for cold water pipe supports. Pipe hangers shall not be in direct contact with cold piping unless approved by the Architect/Engineer. Pipe mounting brackets for cold piping shall be large enough to encompass the insulation. This piping shall be anchored securely at the point of connection to plumbing fixtures. The last mounting bracket adjacent to fixtures and equipment may clamp directly onto the pipe. A short length (18 inches maximum) of piping between the last bracket and the plumbing fixture is allowed without insulation. Insulation thicknesses based on thermal conductivity (k) of 0.23 btu-in./hour-ft2-°F on a flat surface at 75oF. Insulation greater than 2 inch thickness shall be installed in layers with staggered joints.

1.07 PIPING IDENTIFICATION:


Identify all piping, insulated and uninsulated, except where concealed inside walls or below floors, with 1 inch high black letters designating the type of service and an arrow in the direction of flow. The lettering shall be applied after all painting of the piping is complete as specified in Division 9 - FINISHES. The lettering shall have an identifying word or phrase such as, cold water, gas, sprinkler, low pressure steam return, etc. Each pipe shall be identified in every room, at 30 feet intervals maximum and at each change in direction. To standardize the lettering and abbreviations, use the following listing:

Domestic Cold Water - (CW).

Hot Water - (HW). Recirculating Hot Water (RHW).

Vent (Vent).

Waste (W).



DIVISION 23 – VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING SECTION 230100 - GENERAL PROVISIONS

1.01 SCOPE: The GENERAL, SUPPLEMENTAL and other CONDITIONS of the Contract and the GENERAL REQUIREMENTS (Division 1) are hereby made part of this Section. This Section pertains to general provisions and requirements for construction of work specified in all sections of Division 23 herein. "Contractor" referred to in this Section of the specification implies the Contractor, Subcontractor and/or Subcontractors which are responsible for all or any part of the mechanical installation specified in Division 23 and/or as shown on the Contract Drawings. Where the specifications in subsequent Sections of Division 23 conflict with requirements of this Section, the specifications in the subsequent Sections shall govern. The Contractor shall provide all items, articles, materials, operations or methods listed, mentioned or scheduled on the Drawings and/or herein specified, including all labor, materials, equipment, accessories, wiring and incidentals necessary to be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations except as otherwise approved.

1.02 PERMITS AND SERVICE CHARGES: All permits and service charges necessary for execution of the work under this Contract shall be obtained by and be paid for by the Contractor. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to determine the permit requirements of the local authorities and utility companies and the cost of required permits, service charges, tap fees and development fees shall be included in the Contractor's bid. All work shall be executed in accordance with all local, state and national rules, regulations, codes, etc., which are applicable and shall be subject to inspection by the proper authorities.

1.03 CODES AND STANDARDS: All work performed and all equipment furnished under this Division of the Contract shall be manufactured and installed in strict accordance with all applicable codes and standards, including the applicable provisions of the following codes and standards. 1. Local and State Codes, Standards and Regulations. 2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). 3. National Electric Code (NEC). 4. Underwriter's Laboratory (UL). 5. American Gas Association (AGA) Standards. 6. Uniform Plumbing Code. 7. International Mechanical Code. 8. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Codes. 9. State Boiler Safety Code. 10. American Water Works Association (AWWA).


11. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF). 12. Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (OSHA). 13. International Building Code. 14. Life Safety Code. 15. State Energy Conservation Standards. 16. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). All materials installed shall have composite fire and smoke hazard ratings as tested by procedures ASTM 84, NFPA 255 and UL 723 not to exceed 25 Flame Spread and 50 Smoke Developed.

1.04 COMPLIANCE: Where specific requirements of any code vary with the requirements of another code, the higher standard as determined by the Architect/Engineer shall govern the installation. All equipment manufactured in accordance with the provisions of the above codes and standards shall bear the label of the respective association bureau thereon.

1.05 DRAWINGS: In general, the Drawings of the mechanical systems and equipment are to scale. However, to determine exact locations of walls and partitions, the Contractor shall consult the architectural and/or structural drawings which are dimensioned. Drawings shall not take precedence over field measurements. Drawings of piping and ductwork, although shown on scale drawings, are diagrammatic only. They are intended to indicate size and/or capacity where stipulated, approximate location and/or direction, and approximate general arrangement of one phase of work to another, but not the exact detail or exact arrangement of construction. If it is found, before installation of any or all construction phases, that a more convenient, suitable or workable arrangement of any or all phases of the project would result by varying or altering the arrangement indicated on the Drawings, the Architect/Engineer may require the Contractor to change the location or arrangement of the work without additional cost to the Owner. Such rearrangement shall be in accordance with directions from the Architect/Engineer. Where discrepancies are discovered after certain portions or phases of the work have been installed, the Architect/Engineer reserves the right to require the Contractor to make changes in pipe, duct, fixture or equipment locations or arrangements to avoid conflicts with work at no additional cost to the Owner. Because the Drawings are to a relatively small scale to show as large a portion as is practical, the fact that only certain features of the system are indicated does not mean that other similar or different features or details will not be required. The Contractor shall furnish all incidental labor, material or equipment for the systems so that each system is a complete and operating one unless otherwise specifically stipulated in the detailed body of the specifications. The Contractor, Subcontractor's and their respective trades shall cooperate in laying out their work so it will fit properly into the space provided. Promptly report to the Architect/Engineer any delay or difficulties encountered in the installation of this work which might prevent prompt and proper installation, or make it unsuitable to connect with or receive the work of others. Failure to so


report shall constitute an acceptance of the work of other trades as being fit and proper for the execution of this work.

1.06 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS: The Contractor and equipment suppliers shall read and familiarize themselves with articles concerning substitution of materials, as indicated in the Instructions to Bidders. Material and equipment substitutions will be handled as follows: Materials or equipment specified by name of manufacturer, brand, trade name or catalog reference, shall be furnished under the contract unless changed by Addenda or a Contract modification. Where two (2) or more materials are named, the choice of these shall be optional with the Contractor. Material or equipment followed by the phrase "or equal" shall establish a standard of required function, dimension, appearance and quality to be met by any proposed substitute. No substitution will be considered unless written request for substitution has been submitted by the bidder and has been received by the Architect/Engineer at least ten days prior to the date for receipt of bids. The Architect/Engineer's decision on a proposed substitute shall be final. If the Architect/Engineer considers any proposed substitution equal, such will be set forth in an Addendum. Bidders shall not rely upon substitutions made in any other manner. Should the Contractor wish to use materials or equipment other than those specified or listed as equal by Addenda, he shall attach his proposed substitution along with the appropriate add or deduct to the Contract amount, should the substitution be accepted. Substitutions proposed by the Contractor will not be considered in the award of the Contract.

1.07 SHOP DRAWINGS: Refer to the requirements of the General Conditions. Unless indicated otherwise in the General Conditions, submit to the Architect/Engineer one electronic copy of Shop Drawings for each item of equipment to be installed under this contract. Furnish additional Shop Drawings as required for coordination with General Contractor and other Subcontractors. To the extent practical, complete sets of shop drawings for each specification section shall be submitted. In the case that a particular item is required to be expedited, that particular item may be submitted individually.

Submit shop drawings punched in PDF format.

Furnish Shop Drawings as follows:

1. For all major items of equipment or materials, regardless of whether the item is to be furnished as specified.

2. For all equipment, systems or devices where Shop Drawings are specifically called for. 3. For all minor items of equipment or materials where the Contractor proposes to deviate

from the specified and/or scheduled manufacturer or material.

The Contractor shall check all Shop Drawing submittals for size, capacity, arrangement, connection locations, materials, finish, color, electrical characteristics, accessories, and shall so


note the Shop Drawings prior to submittal to the Architect/Engineer. Any deviation from the Drawings and Specifications shall be indicated. Shop Drawings will be reviewed by the Architect/Engineer, and copies of Shop Drawings will be returned to the Contractor. Shop Drawings shall be submitted sufficiently in advance of the construction schedule to allow time for checking Drawings, resubmittal and rechecking when necessary. Any equipment or material which is installed without authorization by properly processed Shop Drawings will be subject to removal by the Contractor and reinstallation as directed, without cost to the Owner. All cost for repair for damages as may be incurred to the structure as a result of the above correction shall be paid by this Contractor. Shop drawing material quantities will not be checked by the Architect/Engineer, and review of Shop Drawings by the Architect/Engineer shall not be construed to be verification of the material quantities and sizes shown on the Shop Drawings. Quantities, sizes, dimensions and locations shown on the Drawings and as specified shall determine material requirements.

1.08 CLEANING: The Contractor and/or Subcontractors for the various phases of the work shall clear away all debris, surplus materials, etc., resulting from their work or operations, leaving the job and equipment furnished under any or all contracts in a clean first class condition. Permanent heating and ventilating systems shall not be used during the construction period unless the project site is in a clean and dust free condition and shall be subject to the approval of the Architect/Engineer and Owner. Air surfaces of all coils, fan housings, fan wheels, fan motors, air unit plenums, all air filters, and mechanical equipment shall be wiped clean or washed if required, leaving the installation in a first class condition. All throwaway filters used during construction shall be replaced. The surfaces of all equipment shall be cleaned, and each item shall be left in a first class condition.

1.09 PAINTING: Painting of materials and equipment furnished under the mechanical portion of the contract shall be as described in Division 9 - FINISHES. Contractor shall refinish and restore to the original condition and appearance, all mechanical equipment which has sustained damage to the manufacturer's prime and finish coats of enamel or paint. Materials and workmanship shall be equal to the requirements described in Division 9 - FINISHES.

1.10 RECORD DRAWINGS: The Contractor shall keep a complete set of all mechanical drawings in the jobsite office for purpose of showing the installation of mechanical systems and equipment. This set of drawings shall be used for no other purpose. Where any materials equipment or system components are installed different from that shown on the Architect/Engineer's drawings, such differences shall be clearly and neatly shown on this set of drawings using ink or indelible pencil. At the completion of the project, the record set of drawings shall be turned over to the Architect/Engineer and shall become his property.


1.11 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS:

The Contractor shall furnish the Owner two (2) sets of complete catalog data, manufacturer's literature and detailed manuals covering the operation and maintenance of all equipment specified under this Division. All such literature shall be bound in an amply sized three-ring binder and submitted to the Architect/Engineer for approval and for eventual transmittal to the Owner. The manual shall have a Table of Contents at the front of the manual. The Contractor shall also supervise the initial operation of all equipment and instruct the operator selected by the Owner in such operation as required to acquaint him thoroughly with the equipment.

1.12 DELIVERY AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS: Make provisions for delivery and safe storage of materials on the jobsite and make arrangements with other Contractors for introduction into the building of equipment too large to pass through finished openings. Materials to be delivered at such stages of the work as will expedite the work as a whole and marked and stored in such a way as to be easily checked and inspected. All stored equipment shall be protected from the weather conditions and construction debris with a protective covering securely tied in place.

1.13 MECHANICAL PROVISIONS: Mechanical equipment shall operate without objectionable noise or vibration, as determined by the Architect/Engineer. If such noise or vibration should be produced and transmitted to occupied portions of the building by apparatus, ducts, or other parts of the mechanical work, make necessary changes and additions, as approved, without extra cost to Owner. Provide oil level gauges, grease cups and grease gun fittings for machinery bearings as recommended by the manufacturer. Extend oil or grease fittings by copper tubing to readily accessible locations.

1.14 COORDINATION OF WORK: The Contractor shall process shop drawings and order equipment and materials expeditiously after receiving the Contract and the mechanical installation shall be substantially complete when the general construction work is completed. This Contractor shall confer and cooperate with all other Contractors on this project and shall arrange his work in proper relation to the work of others. Each Contractor shall furnish, install, and maintain in place all anchors, inserts, sleeves, etc., required for his work. Each Contractor will also be held solely responsible for proper size and location of all anchors, inserts, sleeves, chases, recesses, openings, bases, etc., required for proper installation of his work. All cutting and patching made necessary by failure or neglect to coordinate with other Contractors shall be the responsibility of this Contractor. Any cutting or patching shall be subject to the direction and approval of the Architect/Engineer and all damage due to cutting or patching shall be repaired by this Contractor. After being instructed by this Contractor to do so, the General Contractor will leave all openings in roof, walls, floors, etc., for the passage of ducts, etc. The General Contractor shall also provide concrete bases and roof curbs where shown for mounting the mechanical equipment unless


specified otherwise. This Contractor shall verify the exact size and location required for installation of his equipment with the General Contractor. In general, the Division 26 – Electrical Contractor will provide all power wiring and make one power connection to each item of mechanical equipment, as outlined under Electrical Section.

1.15 GUARANTEE: All mechanical equipment including equipment used during construction for temporary purposes shall be guaranteed for a period of one year after the time of final acceptance of this work and shall be in like new condition at time of final acceptance.

1.16 ELECTRICAL: Electric Motors: All electric motor driven equipment being furnished and installed under Division 23 of these specifications shall be complete with electric motors, unless specified otherwise. All electric motors shall be as manufactured by Westinghouse, Century, Wagner, Allis Chalmers, Reliance, General Electric, or equal. Bearings shall be ball type with alemite lubricating fittings extended to an easily accessible location for field servicing. Minimum service factors for all motors shall be 1.15. All motors shall conform to applicable NEMA standards and all motors specified for use in hazardous locations shall bear the stamp of approval of the Underwriter's Laboratories. All motors, except direct connected motors, shall be furnished complete with cast iron or stamped steel adjustable slide rails. Single phase motors shall be capacitor start type, drip proof, unless specified otherwise. All motors shall be single speed and shall operate at 1,750 RPM, unless specified otherwise. Horsepower Rating: All electric motors shall be sized to meet the horsepower requirements of the driven unit at design characteristics including all V-belt and/or drive and coupling losses which are incurred without loading the motor beyond its nameplate horsepower rating. Where V-belt drives are employed, the motor horsepower nameplate ratings shall not be less than 120 percent of the driven unit brake horsepower requirements. Single Phase Motors: Unless specifically noted otherwise, all electric motors shall be designed for operation in an ambient temperature not exceeding 40 degrees C., continuous duty and shall be designed for use with voltage as scheduled on Drawings or specified, 60 cycle alternating current. Motors shall be thermally protected. Three Phase Motors: All electric motors shall be designed for operating in an ambient temperature not exceeding 40 degrees C., continuous duty and shall be designed for use with voltage as scheduled on Drawings or specified, 60 cycle alternating current. All motors less than 3/4 horsepower shall be 115 volt, single phase unless designated otherwise and all motors 3/4 horsepower and larger shall be as specified in the specific section or as noted on the Drawings. Motors shall be designed with special stator steel for reduced core losses. Windings shall be oversized copper placed for maximum efficiency. Stator and rotor shall be extra long to reduce flux losses. Frame shall be ODP (unless specified otherwise) of cast iron or cast aluminum construction.


Motors shall be squirrel cage, horizontal base mount, ball bearing, NEMA B design, Class B design, Class B insulation, continuous duty, 1.15 SF, 40 degrees C. ambient. Minimum nominal full load motor efficiencies shall be based on ASHRAE Standard 90 (latest edition). Motors shall be similar to Louis Allis "Spartan" Series, Gould "E-Plus" Series, or Westinghouse "MAC II" Series. Manufacturer shall furnish proof of efficiency rating. Motor Starters: Except where specifically described as being furnished as a part of the equipment furnished and installed under Division 23 of these specifications, all motor starters will be furnished and installed under Division 26, ELECTRICAL. Electrical Wiring: Except where specifically described as being furnished as a part of the equipment furnished and installed under Division 23, all electric power wiring shall be furnished and installed in Division 26, ELECTRICAL. The Electrical Contractor will make one power connection to each item of mechanical equipment, unless specified otherwise. Electrical wiring furnished and installed under these specifications shall conform to all applicable requirements of Division 26, ELECTRICAL. Unless otherwise indicated, all motors and controls shall be furnished, set in place and wired in accordance with the following schedule:

Division Division Set in Place Wired & Furnished or Mounted Connected

Item Under Under Under

Equipment Motors 23 23 26

Line voltage thermostats, time clocks, etc., not connected to control panel systems 23 26 26


Electric thermostats, time clocks, remote bulb thermostats, float controls, etc., which are an integral part or directly attached to ducts, etc. 23 23 23 Temperature control panels and time switches mounted on temperature control panels 23 23 23 Damper motors, solenoid valves, EP and PE switches, etc. 23 23 23 Control circuit feeders 26 26 26 Low voltage controls, thermostats, valves, dampers, etc. 23 23 23 Pushbutton stations, pilot lights 26 26 26 Disconnect switches, thermal overload switches, manual operating switches 26 26 26 Multi-speed switches 23 26 26 Contactors 26 26 26 Control relays, transformers 23 26 26 All control wiring and controls as noted on the Drawings and/or as specified in these specifications shall be provided by this Contractor, including items set in place and wired and connected by the Division 26 Contractor, unless specifically shown otherwise on the Drawings.

1.17 SLEEVES: Any pipe passing through building construction including walls, floors, roofs or masonry partitions or as noted on the Drawings shall be encompassed with sleeves in accordance with the following:


All pipe sleeves through slabs, floors, masonry walls and masonry partitions shall be 1/2 inch greater in inside diameter than the external diameter of pipe passing through. Sleeves for insulated piping shall be large enough to accommodate the insulation without harming the insulation or vapor barrier. All sleeves shall be fabricated from new material cut square and reamed. Sleeves shall be provided in all masonry partition walls including locations above suspended ceilings where masonry partition walls extend from floor slab to slab above. Sleeves shall be Schedule 40 steel pipe finishing flush with the wall surface. Sleeves through exterior building walls shall be Schedule 40 steel pipe with welded flange in the middle of the sleeve and ends finishing flush with finished surfaces. Space between pipe and sleeve shall be packed to provide a watertight joint. Sleeves through roof slabs and floor slabs in concealed locations shall be No. 22 gauge galvanized steel or crete sleeves (linear polyethylene). Concealed sleeves shall be considered as pipe sleeves in shafts, pipe chases and within walls and partitions. Sleeves through floor slabs in exposed areas shall be Schedule 40 steel pipe and sleeves shall extend 1/4 inch above the finished floor surface. For slabs in equipment rooms and in other wet areas, sleeves shall be Schedule 40 steel pipe and shall extend 2 inches above finished floor surface. Floor sleeves in membraned floors shall be furnished with flashing rings and clamps. All sleeves in exposed locations, except equipment rooms, shall be set so plates specified will cover the sleeves. All pipe sleeves where wet conditions exist, except sleeves through exterior walls, shall be caulked with a plastic caulking, including sleeves in concealed locations. The space between the pipe and the sleeves shall be packed with oakum and approximately 1/2 inch depth of a polyisobutylene sealer shall be packed or caulked in both ends of sleeve, even with the ends of the sleeve. The sealer shall be suitable for temperatures from minus 50 degrees to 300 degrees, suitable for painting, non-corrosive and have good adhesion. All sleeves required to provide the proper openings in masonry construction for the passage of ductwork, mechanical equipment, etc., shall be furnished and installed by this Contractor. These sleeves shall also be removed by this Contractor after the opening has been formed. The opening around all ductwork, equipment, etc., passing through slabs, floors, walls and partitions shall be sealed as specified above for piping. Fire/smoke dampers shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions. All sleeves shall be set and maintained in place by this Contractor during the progress of the work. This Contractor shall be responsible for locating all sleeves at the proper location. Sleeves are not required for core drilled masonry wall and floor holes, masonry wall and floor holes formed by polyethylene plastic (removable) sleeves, or for masonry holes made in another neat manner except in equipment rooms and other wet areas. Sleeves are not required in metal or wood stud wall construction. Rated systems shall be provided as required to provide the necessary rating of the penetration.


Interior wall sleeves are only required on cold insulated piping (refrigerant suction piping, etc.). All other steel or cast iron piping 4 inches and smaller shall be grouted directly into the wall as necessary to provide the required fire and smoke rating. Piping larger than 4 inch size and all non-rated piping shall be provided with a rated system. Firestopping materials shall be 3M, Hilti, MetaCaulk, Nelson or equal.

1.18 EQUIPMENT SUPPORT: Furnish and install all necessary wall backing, brackets, braces, plates, angles, wall hangers, etc., required for properly supporting mechanical equipment and mechanical appurtenances. All supports shall be securely anchored with lead inserts, expansion shields, through-going bolts, lag screws or other devices as required. All items of mechanical equipment hung from overhead structure shall be hung from 2-1/2 inches by 2-1/2 inches by 3/16 inch angles minimum which shall span at least 3 members, unless noted otherwise.

1.19 EXISTING SERVICES: The Contractor shall verify the exact location of all existing building services extended and/or relocated for this project. The Contractor shall also verify the exact location and take proper precautions to protect all services which may be encountered during construction. All active services which are encountered shall be protected, braced and supported where required for proper execution of the work and without interruption of the service if possible. All inactive services which are encountered shall be protected or removed as directed by the Architect/Engineer, Owner, Utility Company or Municipal Agency having jurisdiction. The service shall also be plugged or capped as directed. When active services must be temporarily interrupted, the interruption shall be scheduled at night or at such time as approved by the Owner or authority having jurisdiction and so as to cause the minimum of interference with establishing operating routine. Arrangements shall be made to work continuously including overtime if required, to assure that services will be interrupted only as long as actually required to complete necessary work.

1.20 ACCESS TO EQUIPMENT: Access shall be provided to all motors, valves, dampers, controls, specialties, etc., for maintenance purposes. All access doors, access panels, removable sections, etc., required for access shall be provided. The location of the access openings relative to the mechanical equipment shall be coordinated to assure proper access to the equipment. The door shall maintain any ratings of the wall, ceiling, etc. that it penetrates. Access openings are required for valves, manual, motorized, fire, and smoke dampers and other devices requiring access and shall be provided in the ductwork, plenums, housings, tanks, walls, ceilings, etc., under this portion of the Contract.


1.21 PROTECTIVE DEVICES: All sheaves, belts, drives, couplings, and moving parts shall be protected by approved permanent guards, shields, or railings, which shall be in place whenever the equipment is in operation and shall be in accordance with applicable safety standards. All pressure and/or temperature relief valves shall have the discharge piped full size to within 6 inches of the floor or floor drain. The piping shall be securely anchored. All relief valves shall be ASME approved and proper size for the application. END OF SECTION 230100

VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING 230800 - 1

SECTION 230800 - VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING

1.01 SCOPE: The GENERAL, SUPPLEMENTAL and other CONDITIONS of the Contract and the GENERAL REQUIREMENTS (Division 1) are hereby made part of this Section. Section 230100 General Provisions, in its entirety, including references to the General Construction Specifications are hereby adopted and made part of these specifications. The work involved in this specification and the accompanying Drawings consists of performing all labor and furnishing of all materials, fixtures and equipment necessary to install complete ventilation and air conditioning systems as described herein and/or as shown on the Drawings. This includes all ductwork, equipment, wiring and materials obviously necessary for complete systems though not specifically mentioned or shown. See Section 230700 for insulation requirements.

1.02 DUCTWORK: All ductwork is to be galvanized iron fabricated and erected in a workmanlike manner. Fabricate plenums and special fittings, as shown on the Drawings, or as required. Access doors to plenums shall be double wall construction with heavy hardware. All ductwork shall be of the gauges hereinafter specified and constructed to the best grade Inland, U.S. Steel, United Sheet Metal or equal brands, heavily galvanized. Metal gauges for low pressure duct systems shall be of metal gauges and reinforcing as recommended by SMACNA or as follows:

Maximum Dimension of Rectangular Ducts or Diameter of Round Low Galvanized Sheet Pressure Ducts Steel Gauge Number

Up thru 12" 26 Over 12" thru 30" 24 Over 30" thru 54" 22 Over 54" thru 84" 20 Over 84" 18

Ductwork shall be constructed, braced, reinforced and sealed as recommended by ASHRAE and SMACNA. Environmental air ductwork as defined by the International Mechanical Code shall be substantially air tight. Low pressure ductwork shall be suitable for pressures up to 2 inch w.g. All ductwork 18 inches and greater in width shall be cross-broken. See SMACNA requirements for proper sealing of ductwork. Non-proprietary T-24, proprietary TDC/TDF flanges and Ductmate 35/25 may be used for transverse joint construction where the longest side is 35 inches or smaller. Ductwork with the longest side 36 inches and over shall be constructed using Ductmate 35/25 or equal slide on systems, per Ductmate Industries Installation Procedures and Duct Construction Standards, latest edition. Proprietary TDC/TDF flanges may be used for transverse joint construction where the


longest side is 36 to 42 inches, if constructed to an additional 1 inch w. g. The non-proprietary SMACNA T-22 Flanged Connection may be used as defined on Page 1.63, 1.64 and 1.80, of the 1995 SMACNA Manual, Second Edition. Ductmate 440 Butyl Gasket, or equal, shall be used between all rectangular transverse flanged duct connections, Ductmate's 440 Butyl Gasket, shall be used with the Ductmate Systems. For rectangular ductwork located outdoors, exposed to weather, construct ductwork per, "Transverse Joints Rectangular" with a continuous metal cleat on top joints of ducts for added weather protection. Slide on systems shall be Ductmate, Ward Industries, Inc., or equal.

No obstruction shall be permitted in the ductwork to retard the flow of air. If it is necessary to run a pipe or conduit through a duct, the duct size shall be increased to compensate for the obstruction. Where space permits, duct turns shall be constructed with an inside radius equal to or greater than the duct width or duct turn vanes may be used. Where space does not permit duct turns as described above, duct turn vanes shall be used. Where space permits, duct offsets 30 degrees and greater shall be constructed with an inside radius equal to or greater than the duct width. Where interior duct insulation is required, increase the duct size to maintain the free area shown on the Drawings. Provide exterior insulated drip pans, 3 inches deep, under or adjacent to all roof and wall openings including but not limited to under all intake or relief hoods and louvers. Drip pans to be soldered watertight. Power operated dampers not furnished as a component of the ventilating machines will be furnished under the Temperature Control Specifications. They shall be installed in the ductwork under this specification. Caulk around all sides of high efficiency damper frames. Flexible connections shall be installed between suction and discharge openings in fan units and the ducts with which they are connected as shown on the Drawings, to prevent transmission of vibration noises. Material shall be watertight and fire retardant canvas weighing not less than 20 ounces per square yard, or shall be glass fabric on high temperature systems where fire hazard exists. Both materials shall be approved by Underwriter's Laboratories. The flexible material shall be furnished with all necessary angles, bolts, clips or other fasteners. Furnish and install access panels in the ductwork adjacent to all motorized dampers, fire dampers, louvers, reheat coils, and equipment which may require servicing or cleaning. Panels shall be tight fitting and shall be located so as to make them easily accessible. All panels installed in insulated ductwork shall be double wall, insulated type. Panels shall be Ruskin, Air Balance, Ventlok, ADCO, or equal. All ductwork visible through the face of a register or grille shall be painted with a flat black paint. All rigid and flexible ductwork materials installed shall have composite fire and smoke hazard ratings as tested by procedures ASTM 84, NFPA 255 and UL 723 not to exceed 25 Flame Spread and 50 Smoke Developed. Concealed low pressure round ductwork may be rigid spiral ductwork or snaplock type with adjustable elbows.


Round ductwork shall be supported at 6 feet o.c. where building framing does not provide such support. Support shall be minimum 3/4 inch metal strap suspended from the roof or framing. Flexible duct shall not exceed 8 feet in length or pass through walls. Flexible round ductwork may only be used for final connections to supply registers and diffusers in concealed locations. All round sheet metal supply air ductwork, except exposed, shall be insulated with 1 inch thick of Owens-Corning Fiberglass Faced Duct Wrap Series ED-100 FRK-25 or equal.

1.03 REGISTERS, GRILLES AND DIFFUSERS: Furnish and install all registers, grilles and diffusers as specified hereinafter and as designated on the Drawings. Opposed blade, heavy duty dampers shall be used on systems having two or more duct openings where balancing of air discharge or intake is required. Grilles may be used where there is only one opening and where balancing is not required. Diffusers, registers, and grilles shall be provided as listed in the schedule on the Drawings. All registers, grilles and diffusers shall be of size and capacity with special requirements, frames, dampers, blank-off baffles, etc., as listed in the schedule and as designated. Opposed blade, heavy duty dampers shall be provided on all units unless designated otherwise on the Drawings. Louver faced ceiling diffusers shall have a minimum of three (3) inner diffuser cones plus the outer shell unless scheduled otherwise. The installed location of all ceiling diffusers, registers, and grilles shall be as shown on the Reflected Ceiling Plans. The finish on all aluminum registers, grilles and diffusers shall be etched to a lustrous satin finish and coated with a clear acrylic lacquer, or white finish as noted below and/or on the Drawings. All steel units shall have white enamel finish, unless noted otherwise. Interior of perforated diffusers shall be painted black. All ceiling mounted registers, grilles and diffusers shall be white unless noted otherwise. All floor mounted registers, grilles and diffusers shall be satin anodized without mounting holes unless otherwise noted. Ceiling registers, grilles and diffusers in fire rated ceilings shall have an outer cone of 24 gauge (minimum) steel construction and shall have UL Fire Resistance Classified fire dampers with radiation shields. Registers, Grilles and Diffusers shall be Tuttle and Bailey, Carnes, Anemostat, Titus, J & J Register, Metal Industries, Grillmaster, Krueger, Price, Reliable, Nailor or equal.

1.04 SQUARE INLINE FAN:

Square Centrifugal In-Line Fans shall be centrifugal direct driven in-line type. The fan housing shall be constructed of heavy gauge galvanized steel and shall include duct mounting collars. Fan construction shall include two removable access panels located perpendicular to the motor mounting panel. The access panels must be of sufficient size to permit easy access to all interior components.


The fan wheel shall be centrifugal backward inclined, constructed of aluminum and shall include a wheel cone carefully matched to the inlet cone for precise running tolerances. Wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Motors shall be heavy duty ball bearing type, carefully matched to the fan load and furnished at the specified voltage, phase and enclosure. Motors and drives shall be mounted out of the airstream. Motors shall be readily accessible for maintenance. All fans shall bear the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal for both sound and air performance. Each fan shall bear a permanently affixed manufacturer's nameplate containing the model number and individual serial number for future identification. Square Centrifugal In-Line Fans shall be Carnes, Greenheck, Loren Cook, Twin City Fan, CoolAir/New York Blower, MK Plastics, or equal.

1.05 LOUVERS:

Furnish and install louvers where shown on the Drawings. Louvers shall be stationary drainable type with a drain gutter in each blade and downspouts in jambs and mullions. Blades shall be contained within a single 4" frame. Louver construction shall be 0.080 inch thick 6063 extruded aluminum alloy frame with integral caulking slots. Blades shall be 0.080 inch thick 6063 extruded aluminum alloy at 37-1/2 degree angle on approximately 4 inch centers. A birdscreen shall be contained within a removable frame. Louver components (heads, jambs, sills, blades, and mullions) shall be factory assembled by louver manufacturer. Louver sizes too large for shipping shall be built up by contractor from factory assembled louver sections to provide overall size required. Louver shall be finished with baked acrylic enamel in color selected by the Architect, from a standard “RAL” color chart. Louver shall bear the AMCA seal. All ratings shall be in accordance with AMCA Standard 500 and shall include the effect of the bird screen. Louvers are triangular shaped, see plans for dimensions, verify exact dimensions with the General Contractor. Louvers shall be Airolite, American Warming and Ventilating, Inc., Carnes, Louvers and Dampers, Inc., Arrow, United, Cesco, Ruskin, Dowco, Industrial Louvers, Greenheck, Pottorff, Construction Specialties or equal.

1.06 TESTS: General: The following tests shall be performed on the respective systems. Tests shall be repeated until each system is proven acceptable. Ventilation and Air Conditioning:


The Contractor shall make thorough tests of the following systems. Air Systems: The Contractor shall make a thorough test of all air systems. He shall properly balance the air flow to and from all openings and make any adjustments necessary in fan speeds, etc., to meet the required air volume. The Contractor shall furnish to the Architect/Engineer one electronic typewritten copy of tabulations of the air volumes. This tabulation shall include unit number, room number, supply, return, or exhaust CFM's for all openings, showing both required CFM and calculated CFM, and grille size. The Contractor shall also submit a tabulation of all fan RPM's, static pressure, CFM's and fan motor current and voltage readings taken after the terminals have been balanced. END OF SECTION 230800


October 6, 2017

DUPLEX GRINDER PUMP LIFT STATIONS 221343 - 1

SECTION 221343 – DUPLEX GRINDER PUMP LIFT STATION

1.01 GENERAL

The contractor shall provide labor, material, equipment, and incidentals required to provide two (2) (QTY)

centrifugal grinder pumps as specified herein. The pump models covered in this specification are Series

LSG/LSGX200 single phase grinder pumps. The pump furnished for this application shall be model LSG202 as

manufactured by Liberty pumps, or Engineered approved equal.

2.01 OPERATING CONDITIONS

Each submersible pump shall be rated at 2 hp 208/230 volts, single phase 60 Hz. 3450 RPM. The pump shall

produce 50 G.P.M. at 10 feet of total dynamic head.

The submersible pump shall be capable of handling residential and commercial sewage and grinding it to a fine

slurry enabling it to be pumped over long distances in pipelines as small as 1.25” in diameter. The single stage

submersible pump shall have a shut-off head of 110 feet and a maximum flow of 50 GPM @ 10 feet of total

dynamic head.

3.01 CONSTUCTION

Each centrifugal grinder pump shall be equal to the Series LSG/LSGX Grinder pumps as manufactured by Liberty

Pumps, or Engineered approved equal. The castings shall be constructed of class 25 cast iron. The motor housing

shall be oil filled to dissipate heat. Air filled motors shall not be considered equal. All mating parts shall be

machined and sealed with a Buna-N o-ring. All fasteners exposed to the liquid shall be stainless steel. The motor

shall be protected on the top side with sealed cord entry plate with molded pins to conduct electricity eliminating

the ability of water to enter internally through the cord. The motor shall be protected on the lower side with a

dual seal arrangement. The first seal is a double lip seal molded in FKM fluoroelastomer or Buna N. The

second/main seal shall be a unitized hard face silicon carbide seal with stainless steel housings and spring.

The upper and lower bearing shall be capable of handling all radial thrust loads. The lower bearing shall have the

additional ability to handle the downward axial thrust produced by the impeller and cutters by design of angular

contact roller races. The pump housing shall be of the concentric design thereby equalizing the pressure forces

inside the housing which will extend the service life of the seals and bearings. Additionally there shall be no

cutwater in the housing volute in order to discourage the entrapment of flowing debris The pump shall be

furnished with stainless steel handle have a nitrile grip.

4.01 ELECTRICAL POWER CORD

The submersible pump shall be supplied with 25 feet of multiconductor power cord. It shall be cord type SJOOW

(1-phase), SEOOW (3-phase), or SOOW (external capacitor models), capable of continued exposure to the pumped

liquid. The power cord shall be sized for the rated full load amps of the pump in accordance with the National

Electric Code. The power cable shall not enter the motor housing directly but will conduct electricity to the motor

by means of a water tight compression fitting cord plate assembly, with molded pins to conduct electricity. This

will eliminate the ability of water to enter internally through the cord, by means of a damaged or wicking cord.

5.01 MOTORS


October 6, 2017


All motors shall be oil filled and class B insulated NEMA B design, rated for continuous duty. Air filled motors shall

not be considered equal. At maximum load, the winding temperature shall not exceed 135 degrees C

unsubmerged. Single phase motors shall be capacitor start / capacitor run and have an integral thermal overload

switch in the windings for protecting the motor.

6.01 BEARINGS AND SHAFT

An upper radial and lower thrust bearing shall be required. The upper bearing shall be a single ball/race type

bearing. The lower bearing shall be an angular contact heavy duty ball/race type bearing, designed to handle axial

grinder pump thrust loads. Both bearings shall be permanently lubricated by the oil, which fills the motor housing.

The bearing system shall be designed to enable proper cutter alignment from shut off head to maximum load at

10’ of TDH. The motor shaft shall be made of 300 or 400 series stainless steel and have a minimum diameter of

.670”.

7.01 SEALS

The pump shall have a dual seal arrangement consisting of a lower and upper seal to protect the motor from the

pumping liquid. The lower seal shall be a FKM fluoroelastomer OR Buna N molded double lip seal, designed to

exclude foreign material away from the main upper seal. The upper seal shall be a unitized silicon carbide hard

face seal with stainless steel housings and spring equal to Crane Type T-6a. The motor plate/housing interface

shall be sealed with a Buna-N o-ring.

8.01 IMPELLER

The impeller shall be an investment cast stainless steel impeller, with pump out vanes on the back shroud to keep

debris away from the seal area. It shall be keyed and bolted to the motor shaft.

9.01 CUTTER MECHANISM

The cutter and plate shall consist of 440 stainless steel with Rockwell C hardness of 55-60. The stationary cutter

plate shall have specially designed orifices through it, which enable the slurry to flow through the pump housing at

an equalized pressure and velocity. The stationary cutter shall consist of V shapes to maximize cutting action and

arc shape exclusion slots to outwardly eject debris from under the rotary cutter. The rotary cutter shall have (4)

blades and be designed with a recessed area behind the cutting edge to prevent the accumulation and binding of

any material between rotary cutter and the stationary cutter. The cutting system must incorporate close

tolerances for optimum performance. Ring or radial cutters, or those that grind on the outside circumference of

shall not be considered equal.

10.01 CONTROLS

The pumps shall be controlled with a NEMA 4X outdoor duplex control panel with three float switches and a high-

water alarm or with optional IP Series NEMA 4X outdoor duplex control panel with transducer, adjustable set-

points, data logging, and a high-water alarm.

11.01 PAINT

The exterior of the casting shall be protected with Powder Coat paint.

12.01 SUPPORT

The pump shall have cast iron support legs, enabling it to be a free-standing unit. The legs will be high enough to

allow solids and long stringy debris to enter the cutter assembly.

13.01 SERVICEABLITY


October 6, 2017


Components required for the repair of the pump shall be shipped within a period of 24 hours.

14.01 FACTORY ASSEMBLED TANK SYSTEMS WITH GUIDE RAIL AND QUICK DISCNNECT DISCHARGE

Factory mounted guide rail system with pump suspended by means of bolt-on quick disconnect which is sealed by

means of nitrile grommets. The discharge piping shall be schedule 80 PVC and furnished with a check valve and

PVC shut-off ball valve. The tank shall be wound fiberglass, and an inlet hub shall be provided with the system.

15.01 TESTING

The pump shall have a ground continuity check and the motor chamber shall be Hi-potted to test for electrical

integrity, moisture content and insulation defects. The motor and volute housing shall be pressurized, and an air

leak decay test is preformed to ensure integrity of the motor housing. The pump shall be run, voltage current

monitored, and the tester checks for noise or other malfunction.

16.01 QUALITY CONTROL

The pump shall be manufactured in an ISO 9001 certified Facility.

17.01 WARRANTY

Standard limited warranty shall be 3 years.

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL

TABLE OF CONTENTS NO. OF SECTION TITLE PAGES

260100 COMMON ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 9

260500 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 9

260600 GROUNDING AND BONDING 5

261200 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 4

261300 RACEWAYS AND BOXES 10

261400 WIRING DEVICES 4

261450 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 4

264420 PANELBOARDS 5

265110 LIGHTING 6

PROJECT: ROTARY PARK SIOUX FALLS, SOUTH DAKOTA

ACEI NO: 117050 DATE: October 6, 2017 Project Manual sections prepared by or under the supervision of Kelly E. Loudenslager, Reg. No. 5605, include all sections of Division 26.

COMMON ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260100 - 1

SECTION 260100 – COMMON ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. In certain instances where the terms of this Division of the Specifications conflict with the terms of the General Conditions, or Special Conditions, this Division of the Specifications shall govern.

B. Note that the complete electrical installation for this project falls under two specification divisions: Division 26 and Division 27.

C. The project shall be bid as one complete package with the final electrical construction bid containing all costs for Divisions 26 and 27.

D. The general requirements shown in this section shall also apply to Divisions 26 and 27.

E. Where M.C. or Mechanical Contractor is referenced in Division 26 or 27 specifications or on the electrical drawings, it refers to the general trade. Coordinate in field with the proper Plumbing or HVAC Contractor based on the information in the specification or note.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section shall include everything in Divisions 26 and 27 of the Specifications and everything indicated on the Drawings that are complementary to these Divisions of the Specifications. Refer to the Index of Drawings to determine what Drawings apply directly to this section.

B. Where “Contractor” is referred to in this Division of the Specifications it shall mean Contractor and/or Sub-Contractors responsible for all or any part of the electrical installation specified in Divisions 26 and 27 and/or as shown on the Contract Drawings.

C. Where the specifications in subsequent Sections of Divisions 26 and 27 conflict with requirements of this Section, the specifications in the subsequent Sections shall govern.

D. The contractor shall provide all items, articles, materials, operations or methods listed, mentioned or scheduled on the Drawings and/or herein specified, including all labor, materials, equipment, accessories, wiring, and incidents necessary to be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations except as otherwise approved.

1.3 INTENT OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS

A. The intent of the plans and specifications are for the complete installation of the system described so that at the conclusion of the construction, the systems will be turned over to the owner complete and ready for safe and efficient operation. The plans and specifications cannot deal individually with the many incidental items which may be required by the nature of the systems. The contractor shall be obliged to furnish and install all such items normally included on systems of this type, which while not mentioned directly in the drawings and specifications


are obviously essential to the installation and operation of the system and which are normally furnished on quality installations of this type.

B. The contractor shall make a thorough inspection of the conditions and be familiar with all conditions affecting the extent and cost of this work. Claims for extra payments as a result to examine the conditions will not be allowed.

1.4 PERMITS AND SERVICE CHARGES

A. All permits and service charges necessary for execution of the work under this Contract shall be obtained by and be paid for by the Contractor. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to determine the permit requirements of the local authorities and utility companies and the cost of required permits, service charges, tap fees and development fees shall be included in the Contractor’s bid.

B. Any and all utility charges for electrical power service shall be obtained by and be paid for by the Contractor. These charges shall be included in the Contractor’s bid.

C. All work shall be executed in accordance with all local, state, and national rules, regulations, codes, etc., which are applicable and shall be subject to inspection by the proper authorities.

1.5 CODES AND STANDARDS

A. All work performed and all equipment furnished under this Division of the Contract shall be manufactured and installed in strict accordance with all applicable codes and standards, including the applicable provisions of the following codes and standards.

1. Local and State Codes, Standards, and Regulations.

2. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code, Current Addition.

3. National Board of Fire Underwriters (NBFU).

4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).

5. Underwriters Laboratories (UL).

6. Electrical Testing Laboratory (ETL).

7. Illuminating Engineering Society (IES).

8. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).

9. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).

10. International Building Code (IBC).

11. International Fire Code (IFC).

B. Compliance:

1. Where specific requirements of any code vary with the requirements of another code, the higher standard as determined by the Architect/Engineer shall govern the installation. Contractors shall familiarize themselves with local codes and regulations which affect their work in any way. Extra payment will not be allowed for changes required by local codes and regulations.

2. All equipment manufactured in accordance with the provisions of the above codes and standards shall bear the label of the respective association bureau thereon.


1.6 DRAWINGS AND MEASUREMENTS

A. In general, the Drawings of the electrical systems and equipment are to scale. However, to determine exact locations of walls and partitions, the Contractor shall consult the architectural and/or structural drawings which are dimensioned. Drawings shall not take precedence over field measurements.

B. Drawings of fixtures and devices, although shown on scale drawings, are diagrammatic only. They are intended to indicate size and/or capacity where stipulated, approximate location and/or direction, and approximate general arrangement of one phase of work to another, but not the exact detail or exact arrangement of construction. If it is found, before installation of any or all construction phases, that a more convenient, suitable or workable arrangement of any or all phases of the project would result by varying or altering the arrangement indicated on the Drawings, the Architect/Engineer may require the Contractor to change the location or arrangement of the work without additional cost to the Owner. Such rearrangement shall be in accordance with directions from the Architect/Engineer.

1. Install light fixtures and wiring devices at heights specified in the Electrical Symbol Legend or as shown on the drawings. All measurements are to center unless noted otherwise. Device heights indicated on architectural elevations shall take precedence over symbol legend.

C. Where discrepancies are discovered after certain portions or phases of the work have been installed, the Architect/Engineer reserves the right to require the Contractor to make changes in conduit, fixture or equipment locations or arrangements to avoid conflicts with work at no additional cost to the Owner.

D. Because the Drawings are to a relatively small scale to show as large a portion as is practical, the fact that only certain features of the systems are indicated does not mean that other similar or different features or details will not be required. The Contractor shall furnish all incidental labor, material or equipment for the systems so that each system is a complete and operating one unless otherwise specifically stipulated in the detailed body of the specifications.

E. The Contractor, Subcontractor's and their respective trades shall cooperate in laying out their work so it will fit properly into the space provided. Promptly report to the Architect/Engineer any delay or difficulties encountered in the installation of this work which might prevent prompt and proper installation, or make it unsuitable to connect with or receive the work of others. Failure to so report shall constitute an acceptance of the work of other trades as being fit and proper for the execution of this work.

1.7 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS

A. The Contractor and equipment suppliers shall read and familiarize themselves with articles concerning substitution of materials, as indicated in the Instructions to Bidders. Material and equipment substitutions will be handled as follows:

B. Materials or equipment specified by name of manufacturer, brand, trade name or catalog reference, shall be furnished under the contract unless changed by Addenda or a Contract modification. Where two (2) or more materials are named, the choice of these shall be optional with the Contractor.

C. Material or equipment followed by the phrase "or equal" shall establish a standard of required function, dimension, appearance and quality to be met by any proposed substitute. No


substitution will be considered unless written request for substitution has been submitted by the bidder and has been received by the Architect/Engineer at least seven days prior to the date for receipt of bids. The Architect/Engineer's decision on a proposed substitute shall be final. If the Architect/Engineer considers any proposed substitution equal, such will be set forth in an Addendum. Bidders shall not rely upon substitutions made in any other manner.

D. Whenever an item of material or equipment is identified on the drawings or specifications by reference to brand name or catalog number, it shall be understood that the reference is made for the purpose of defining the performance or other salient requirements and that other products of equal capacities, quality, or function may be considered.

E. The listing of any manufacturer preceded by the phrase “or equal by” does not imply automatic approval. It is the sole responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that any price quotations received and submittals made are for products which meet or exceed the specifications included herein. The Contractor must judge that such items of substitution are of equal quality and character to the specified items and it is physically adaptable for installation within the allotted space with all required service clearances. The cost of any changes to other trades as a result of use of the substitution material or equipment must be borne by the Contractor submitting such material or equipment.

F. Should the Contractor wish to use materials or equipment other than those specified or listed as equal by Addenda, he shall attach his proposed substitution along with full descriptive and technical data for the proposed item with the appropriate add or deduct to the Contract amount, should the substitution be accepted. Substitutions proposed by the Contractor will not be considered in the award of the Contract.

G. After the award of the Contract, any request for a substitution must be made in writing by the Contractor (not the material supplier or subcontractor). Such request shall state the name of the product specified, the name of the product proposed for substitution, the reason for requesting the substitution, and any change to the Contract amount resulting from the substitution. No such substitution shall be made until an appropriate Contract modification has been issued and approved.

1.8 SUBMITTALS

A. Schedule of Materials and Equipment:

1. The Contractor shall submit a complete list of proposed equipment manufacturers for major systems and a list of Sub-Contractors, for the Engineer’s review. This list shall be submitted for review within 15 days after the contract award and before ordering any material or equipment.

a. Review of the list shall in no way relieve the Contractor from the responsibility of submitting complete shop drawings nor shall it constitute approval should the shop drawings be found to be partially or completely not in full compliance with the specification requirements.

B. Schedule of Values:

1. The Contractor shall submit an itemized schedule of values for the various portions of the work, including separation of labor and materials for each item, to the Engineer before submission of the first Request for Payment. The schedule of values shall be divided so as to facilitate the Engineer’s analysis of the various costs for the purpose of approval of the payment requests. The submittal shall meet the approval of the Engineer before any


progress payment will be provided. The following are required categories for the cost breakdown.

a. Service and Distribution Equipment.

b. Lighting.

c. Wiring Devices.

d. Equipment Connections.

e. Basic Materials.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Refer to the requirements of the General Conditions. Unless indicated otherwise in the General Conditions, submit to the Architect/Engineer seven (7) copies (minimum) of Shop Drawings for each item of equipment to be installed under this contract with two (2) copies to be retained by the Architect/Engineer. Furnish additional Shop Drawings as required for coordination with General Contractor and other Subcontractors. Furnish Shop Drawings as follows:

a. For all major items of equipment or materials, regardless of whether the item is to be furnished as specified.

b. For all equipment, systems or devices where Shop Drawings are specifically called for.

c. For all minor items of equipment or materials where the Contractor proposes to deviate from the specified and/or scheduled manufacturer or material.

d. Shop drawings shall include manufacturer, catalog number, voltage and current characteristics, wire sizes, construction, and rough-in data of all materials to be used. Each product data sheet shall clearly indicate the proposed product.

e. Major components of Divisions 26, 27, and 28 shall be submitted at one time. All such literature shall be bound in amply sized three-ring binders with table of contents and tabbed sections separating and identifying the sections of the shop drawings. Tabbed sections shall correspond with Divisions 26, 27, and 28 specification sections.

2. The Contractor shall check all Shop Drawing submittals for compliance with Contract Documents, for size, capacity, arrangement, connection locations, materials, finish, color, electrical characteristics, accessories, and shall so note the Shop Drawings prior to submittal to the Architect/Engineer. Any deviation from the Drawings and Specifications shall be indicated.

a. Each shop drawing shall be certified as being checked and approved by the Contractor before submittal. Shop drawings not indicated as being approved by the Contractor will be returned without review.

3. Shop Drawings will be reviewed by the Architect/Engineer, and copies of Shop Drawings will be returned to the Contractor. Shop Drawings shall be submitted sufficiently in advance of the construction schedule to allow time for checking Drawings, resubmittal and rechecking when necessary.

4. Any equipment or material which is installed without authorization by properly processed Shop Drawings will be subject to removal by the Contractor and reinstallation as directed, without cost to the Owner. All cost for repair for damages as may be incurred to the structure as a result of the above correction shall be paid by this Contractor.


5. Shop drawing material quantities will not be checked by the Architect/Engineer, and review of Shop Drawings by the Architect/Engineer shall not be construed to be verification of the material quantities and sizes shown on the Shop Drawings. Quantities, sizes, dimensions and locations shown on the Drawings and as specified shall determine material requirements.

6. The Contractor shall maintain two (2) copies of approved shop drawings to be submitted with the Operating and Maintenance Manuals.


A. Materials and equipment shall be new and of the best quality, of the type best suited for the purpose intended, and be made by nationally recognized and substantially established manufacturers. The type and weight of material used for each purpose shall be as herein specified, and material shall conform to the requirements of the latest standard specifications of the “ASTM” for that particular material.

B. All materials and equipment shall be listed, labeled, or certified by a nationally recognized testing laboratory to meet Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., standards where test standards have been established.

1. Equipment and materials which are not covered by UL Standards will be accepted provided equipment and material is listed, labeled, certified, or otherwise determined to meet safety requirements of a nationally recognized testing laboratory.

2. Equipment of a class which no nationally recognized testing laboratory accepts, certifies, lists, labels, or determines to be safe, will be considered if inspected or tested in accordance with national industrial standards, such as NEMA, or ANSI. Evidence of compliance shall include certified test reports and definitive shop drawings.

C. The installation work included in this specification shall be performed in a neat workmanlike manner by persons experienced and skilled in the Electrical trade. Only the best quality workmanship will be accepted. All exposed parts of the electrical wiring systems such as exposed conduits, flush plates, cabinet trims, fixtures, etc., shall be square and true with the building construction.

1.10 COORDINATION OF WORK

A. The Mechanical and Electrical Contractors and their Subcontractors shall have coordination meetings to facilitate the installation of equipment, ducts, pipes, electrical panels and equipment, and other miscellaneous equipment. The Mechanical Contractor and Electrical Contractor shall coordinate the location of all equipment during the coordination meetings to prevent interferences between equipment of different systems. Any conflicts that may be discovered during the coordination meetings shall be brought to the immediate attention of the Engineer.

B. The Contractor shall order equipment and materials in a timely manner and shall be responsible for close correlation of the work with that of all other Contractors on this project so that it will not interfere with or delay the work of other Contractors. The Contractor shall confer and cooperate with all other Contractors on this project and shall arrange the work in proper relation to the work of others.


1.11 RECORD DRAWINGS AND OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Record Drawings:

1. The Contractor shall keep a complete set of all electrical drawings in the jobsite office for purpose of showing the installation of electrical systems and equipment. This set of drawings shall be used for no other purpose. Where any materials equipment or system components are installed different from that shown on the Architect/Engineer's drawings, such differences shall be clearly and neatly shown on this set of drawings using ink or indelible pencil. At the completion of the project, the record set of drawings shall be turned over to the Architect/Engineer and shall become his property.

a. Incorporate all changes made by addendum, shop drawing review, change order, and field orders.

B. Operating and Maintenance Manuals:

1. The Contractor shall furnish the Owner with two (2) sets of complete catalog data (approved shop drawings), manufacturer’s literature and detailed manuals covering the operation and maintenance of all equipment specified under this Division.

a. Comply with Division 1 requirements.

b. The manual shall indicate the Contractor’s name, address, and phone number and include a list of all Subcontractors, including company name, address, and telephone number.

c. The manual shall include, but not be limited to, the following: Installation instructions; maintenance and overhaul instructions; procedures for start, operation, and shut down of equipment and systems; complete wiring and control diagrams; cleaning of lighting fixtures lenses and other equipment; safety precautions; diagrams and illustrations; manufacturers’ name and catalog data; test procedures; name and address of authorized service organizations; and parts distributor for all material and equipment installed. Include all special warranty statements for all special warranties required by contract documents.

d. The manual shall include a complete inventory list of all extra materials which are specified to be provided in the Contract.

e. All such literature shall be bound in an amply sized three-ring binder with table of contents and tabbed sections separating and identifying the sections of the manual.

2. The Contractor shall supervise the initial operation of all equipment and instruct the Owner’s designated operator or maintenance representative in such operation as to acquaint the operator thoroughly with the equipment.

C. Testing:

1. Work which is required to be placed within the construction or concealed shall be carefully tested and inspected before being permanently concealed.

2. The Contractor shall provide all testing instruments, equipment, and all materials, connections, labor, etc., required to perform tests.

3. Test all circuits, fixtures, equipment, and systems for proper operation and freedom from grounds, shorts, and open circuits before acceptance is requested.

4. Provide complete operational sequence checkout to verify all modes of operation both normal and alarm for each system. Test all control systems that interact with each other


as a complete system to demonstrate that all interconnections and interactions are correct and that all interconnect wiring is functional.

5. Perform all tests required by local authorities, such as tests of life safety systems, in addition to tests specified herein. Perform tests required by other specification sections.

6. Tests shall be made in the presence of the Engineer and the Owner, and shall meet with their approval. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer at a time sufficiently prior to the performance of any test to allow time for the engineer to be present for the test.

7. The entire system shall be subject to a test at full operating and under normal usage conditions. This shall include voltage and current checks, resistance measurements, and equipment operation. Failure of any phase of system operation shall constitute failure of the system. Correct failures and retest system. Repeat until the system is operating to required specifications.

a. Submit dated “Electrical System Test Reports” indicating all tests performed and demonstrating conformance with the required system performance criteria in tabular form.

8. After testing the apparatus, the entire system shall be operated for one week under normal conditions.

9. The final testing shall be performed as soon as possible after the work is entirely completed.

1.12 FINAL INSPECTION

A. Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall notify the Architect and/or Engineer and make arrangements for a final inspection. The Contractor shall submit the operation and maintenance manuals prior to the final inspection; the Engineer will not schedule nor perform a final inspection without successful submittal of operating and maintenance manuals by the Contractor.

1. During the final inspection and subsequent follow-up final inspection, the Contractor and all major Sub-Contractors shall have the foreman of the project present.

B. After the Engineer’s final inspection is made, the Contractor will receive a list of items requiring adjustment, correction, replacement, or completion.

C. The Contractor shall comply completely with all the listed requirements within thirty (30) days of receipt of the list. Should the Contractor fail to perform within this time limit, the Owner reserves the right to have the work completed by others and the cost deducted from the contract price.

D. The Contractor shall notify the Architect and/or Engineer once all listed requirements are completed, that the Contractor is ready for a follow-up final inspection. The written notice shall contain explanations for those known items not completed and a schedule for completing them.

E. The Architect and/or Engineer shall schedule a follow-up final inspection to confirm completion of all listed requirements. Repeated inspection trips required of the Engineer due to the Contractor’s inability to complete the project satisfactorily will require the Contractor to reimburse the engineer for all incurred costs after the follow-up final inspection.


1.13 GUARANTEE

A. The Contractor shall assume responsibility for any defects which may develop in any part of his work caused by faulty workmanship, material or equipment, and agrees to replace, repair, or alter, at the Contractors expense, any such faulty workmanship, material, or equipment that has been brought to the Contractors attention during a period of one year from the date of the final certificate for payment. Acceptance of the work shall not waive this guarantee.

1. Refer to Divisions 26 and 27 Specifications for additional special equipment warranties.


BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 260500 - 1

SECTION 260500 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. In certain instances where the terms of this Division of the Specifications conflict with the terms of the General Conditions, or Special Conditions, this Division of the Specifications shall govern.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Supporting devices for electrical components.

2. Electrical identification.

3. Firestopping

4. Cutting and patching for electrical construction.

5. Touchup painting.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include manufacturer product data sheets for underground warning tape, electric metering equipment, and fire-stopping materials to be utilized on this project.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate chases, slots, inserts, sleeves, and openings with general construction work and arrange in building structure during progress of construction to facilitate the electrical installations that follow.

1. Set inserts and sleeves in poured-in-place concrete, masonry work, and other structural components as they are constructed.


B. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the work. Coordinate installing large equipment requiring positioning before closing in the building.

C. Coordinate electrical service connections to components furnished by utility companies and the owner.

1. Coordinate installation and connection of exterior underground utilities and services, including provision for electricity-metering components.

2. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and of utility company providing electrical power and other services.

D. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are concealed by finished surfaces. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 8 Section "Access Doors."

E. Where electrical identification devices are applied to field-finished surfaces, coordinate installation of identification devices with completion of finished surface.

F. Where electrical identification markings and devices will be concealed by acoustical ceilings and similar finishes, coordinate installation of these items before ceiling installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORTING DEVICES

A. Material: Cold-formed steel, with corrosion-resistant coating acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Metal Items for Use Outdoors or in Damp Locations: Hot-dip galvanized steel.

C. Slotted-Steel Channel Supports: Flange edges turned toward web, and 9/16-inch- (14-mm-) diameter slotted holes at a maximum of 2 inches (50 mm) o.c., in webs.

1. Channel Thickness: Selected to suit structural loading.

2. Fittings and Accessories: Products of the same manufacturer as channel supports.

D. Raceway and Cable Supports: Manufactured clevis hangers, riser clamps, straps, threaded C-clamps with retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets, and spring-steel clamps or click-type hangers. Wire hangers shall not be utilized for supporting raceway or boxes (except for supporting raceways installed within steel stud walls where raceways are supported from the studs).

E. Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.

F. Cable Supports for Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug for non-armored electrical cables in riser conduits. Plugs have number and size of conductor gripping holes as required to suit individual risers. Body constructed of malleable-iron casting with hot-dip galvanized finish.

G. Expansion Anchors: Carbon-steel wedge or sleeve type.


H. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.

2.2 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION

A. Identification Devices: A single type of identification product for each application category. Use colors prescribed by ANSI A13.1, NFPA 70, and these Specifications.

B. Colored Adhesive Marking Tape for Raceways: Self-adhesive vinyl tape, not less than 1 inch wide by 3 mils thick (25 mm wide by 0.08 mm thick).

C. Underground Warning Tape: Permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed, vinyl tape with the following features:

1. Not less than 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick (150 mm wide by 0.102 mm thick).

2. Compounded for permanent direct-burial service.

3. Embedded continuous metallic strip or core.

4. Printed legend that indicates type of underground line.

D. Tape Markers for Wire and Cables: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive, wraparound type with preprinted numbers and letters.

E. Color-Coding Cable Ties: Type 6/6 nylon, self-locking type. Colors to suit coding scheme.

F. Engraved-Plastic Labels, Signs, and Instruction Plates: Engraving stock, melamine plastic laminate punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners 1/16-inch (1.6-mm) minimum thickness for signs up to 20 sq. in. (129 sq. cm) and 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) minimum thickness for larger sizes. Engraved legend in black letters on white background.

G. Interior Warning and Caution Signs: Comply with 29 CFR, Chapter XVII, Part 1910.145. Preprinted, aluminum, baked-enamel-finish signs, punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners, with colors, legend, and size appropriate to the application.

H. Exterior Warning and Caution Signs: Comply with 29 CFR, Chapter XVII, Part 1910.145. Weather-resistant, non-fading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396-inch (1-mm), galvanized-steel backing, with colors, legend, and size appropriate to the application. 1/4-inch (6-mm) grommets in corners for mounting.

I. Fasteners for Nameplates and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or No. 10/32 stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

2.3 FIRE-STOPPING

A. Conduit, cable penetrations, and any other electrical equipment penetrations of fire rated construction, equipment rooms, and/or where designated on the Drawings shall be sealed with a fire retardant sealant similar to:

1. Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI) SpecSeal Series SSS Intumescent Sealant.

2. STI SpecSeal Series LCI Intumescent Sealant.

3. STI SpecSeal Series SST Firestop Putty.


4. STI SpecSeal Series SSB Firestop Pillows.

5. STI Pensil 200 Silicone Foam.

6. STI EZ-PATH Fire Rated Pathway.

B. Fire sealants shall be Specified Technologies, Inc., 3M Fire Protection Products, A/D Fire Protection Systems, Inc., Nelson Firestop Products, or equal.

1. Firestopping materials shall be low VOC.

C. Obtain through-penetration firestop systems from a single manufacturer with experienced installers having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer’s products per project requirements.

2.4 TOUCHUP PAINT

A. For Equipment: Equipment manufacturer's paint selected to match installed equipment finish.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Zinc-rich paint recommended by item manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. The installation shall be in accordance with the latest requirements of the NEC, State, and Local Codes, ordinances and regulations of any other governing body having jurisdiction

B. All equipment shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner and to the satisfaction of the Project Engineer.

C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom.

D. Equipment Rooms: Line walls where electrical equipment is to be mounted with ¾” plywood backboards. Paint backboards with two coats of low VOC gray fire retardant paint.

1. Where equipment is installed in rooms being used as return air plenums, electrical equipment shall be mounted to Hoover Treated Wood Products Pyro-Guard backboards.

E. Mount panelboards, contactors, and other electrical equipment on backboards, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Materials and Components: Install level, plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other installations.

H. Right of Way: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope.


3.2 ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING DEVICE APPLICATION

A. Damp Locations and Outdoors: Hot-dip galvanized materials or nonmetallic, U-channel system components.

B. Dry Locations: Steel materials.

C. Support Clamps for PVC Raceways: Click-type clamp system.

D. Selection of Supports: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Strength of Supports: Adequate to carry present and future loads, times a safety factor of at least four; minimum of 200-lb (90-kg) design load.

3.3 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Install support devices to securely and permanently fasten and support electrical components.

1. Wire hangers are not an acceptable support component for supporting raceways and boxes (except for supporting raceways installed within steel stud walls where raceways are supported from the studs).

2. Nothing shall rest on, or depend for support on, suspended ceilings (tiles, lath, plaster, as well as splines, runners, bars, and the like in the plane of the ceiling).

3. Support raceways at intervals no greater than ten feet and with one support within three feet of each coupling, box, fitting, or outlet box. Provide one support within three feet of each elbow or bend.

B. Install individual and multiple raceway hangers and riser clamps to support raceways. Provide U-bolts, clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary for hanger assemblies and for securing hanger rods and conduits.

C. Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze- or bracket-type hangers.

D. Size supports for multiple raceway installations so capacity can be increased by a 25 percent minimum in the future.

E. Support individual horizontal raceways with separate, malleable-iron pipe hangers or clamps.

F. Install 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) diameter or larger threaded steel hanger rods, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Spring-steel fasteners specifically designed for supporting single conduits or tubing may be used instead of malleable-iron hangers for 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) and smaller raceways serving lighting and receptacle branch circuits above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to slotted channel and angle supports.

H. Arrange supports in vertical runs so the weight of raceways and enclosed conductors is carried entirely by raceway supports, with no weight load on raceway terminals.

I. Simultaneously install vertical conductor supports with conductors.


J. Separately support cast boxes that are threaded to raceways and used for fixture support. Support sheet-metal boxes directly from the building structure or by bar hangers. If bar hangers are used, attach bar to raceways on opposite sides of the box and support the raceway with an approved fastener not more than 24 inches (610 mm) from the box.

K. Install metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices unless components are mounted directly to structural elements of adequate strength.

L. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of concrete slabs and walls unless core-drilled holes are used. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of masonry and fire-rated gypsum walls and of all other fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Install sleeves during erection of concrete and masonry walls.

M. Securely fasten electrical items and their supports to the building structure, unless otherwise indicated. Perform fastening according to the following unless other fastening methods are indicated:

1. Wood: Fasten with wood screws or screw-type nails.

2. Masonry: Toggle bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion bolts on solid masonry units.

3. New Concrete: Concrete inserts with machine screws and bolts.

4. Existing Concrete: Expansion bolts.

5. Steel: Welded threaded studs or spring-tension clamps on steel.

a. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.

6. Welding to steel structure may be used only for threaded studs, not for conduits, pipe straps, or other items.

7. Light Steel: Sheet-metal screws.

8. Fasteners: Select so the load applied to each fastener does not exceed 25 percent of its proof-test load.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS AND DEVICES

A. Install at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

B. Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations used for electrical identification with corresponding designations indicated in the Contract Documents or required by codes and standards. Use consistent designations throughout Project.

C. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before applying. Self adhesive identification products are not approved for electrical equipment enclosure labels.

D. Tag and label circuits. Identify source and circuit numbers in each cabinet, pull and junction box, and outlet box. Color-coding may be used for voltage and phase identification. Neatly mark junction box covers with voltage, source and circuit numbers with permanent black marker.


1. Feeder and Power Circuit Identification: Use plasticized card stock for cables, feeders, and power circuits in pull boxes and electrical rooms.

a. Legend: ¼” steel letter and number stamping or embossing with legend corresponding to indicated circuit designations.

b. Fasten tags with nylon cable ties, fasten bands using integral ears.

2. Apply identification to conductors as follows:

a. Multiple Power or Lighting Circuits in the Same Enclosure: Identify each conductor with source, voltage, circuit number, and phase. Use color coding for voltage and phase indication of secondary circuit.

b. Multiple Control or Communications Circuits in the Same Enclosure: Identify each conductor by its system and circuit designation. Use a consistent system of tags, color coding, or cable marking type.

E. Equipment Identification: Apply equipment identification labels of engraved plastic laminate on each major piece of equipment. This includes communication, signal, and alarm systems, unless units are specified with their own self-explanatory identification. Provide labels for the following types of equipment.

1. Switchboards, distribution panels, panelboards, and electrical enclosures.

2. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items.

3. Enclosed controllers, indicate which motor or piece of equipment the unit is serving.

4. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers, indicate which motor or piece of equipment the unit is serving.

5. Service Equipment: Service equipment in other than dwelling units shall be legibly marked in the field with the maximum available fault current. The field marking(s) shall include the date the fault current calculation was performed.

6. Lighting control panels and contactors.

7. Transformers.

8. Fire alarm control panel.

9. Paging Intercom and Sound system equipment racks.

F. Install continuous underground warning tape during trench backfilling, for exterior underground power, control, signal, and communication lines, locate marker directly above power and communication lines. Locate approximately 8 inches below finished grade. If width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope does not exceed 16 inches (400 mm), overall, use a single line marker.

G. Color-code 208/120-V system secondary service, feeder, and branch-circuit conductors throughout the secondary electrical system as follows:

1. Phase A: Black.

2. Phase B: Red.

3. Phase C: Blue.

H. Color-code 480/277-V system secondary service, feeder, and branch-circuit conductors throughout the secondary electrical system as follows:


1. Phase A: Brown.

2. Phase B: Orange.

3. Phase C: Yellow.

I. Install warning, caution, and instruction signs where required to comply with 29 CFR, Chapter XVII, Part 1910.145, and where needed to ensure safe operation and maintenance of electrical systems and of items to which they connect. Install engraved plastic-laminated instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation. Install metal-backed butyrate signs for outdoor items.

J. Install engraved-laminated emergency-operating signs with white letters on red background with minimum 3/8-inch- (9-mm-) high lettering for emergency instructions on power transfer, load shedding, and other emergency operations.

3.5 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to cable and raceway penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to achieve fire-resistance rating of the assembly.

3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces required to permit electrical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved.

B. Repair and refinish disturbed finish materials and other surfaces to match adjacent undisturbed surfaces. Install new fireproofing where existing firestopping has been disturbed. Repair and refinish materials and other surfaces by skilled mechanics of trades involved.


A. Inspect installed components for damage and faulty work, including the following:

1. Supporting devices for electrical components.

2. Electrical identification.

3. Electricity-metering components.

4. Concrete bases.

5. Firestopping materials.

6. Cutting and patching for electrical construction.

7. Touchup painting.

3.8 REFINISHING AND TOUCHUP PAINTING

A. Refinish and touch up paint. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."

1. Clean damaged and disturbed areas and apply primer, intermediate, and finish coats to suit the degree of damage at each location.


2. Follow paint manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation and for timing and application of successive coats.

3. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.

4. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer.


A. On completion of installation, including outlets, fittings, and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, paint spots, and construction debris.

B. Protect equipment and installations and maintain conditions to ensure that coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.


GROUNDING AND BONDING 260600 - 1

SECTION 260600 - GROUNDING AND BONDING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes grounding of electrical systems and equipment. Grounding requirements specified in this Section may be supplemented by special requirements of systems described in other Sections.



1. Comply with UL 467.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Grounding Conductors, Cables, Connectors, and Rods:

a. Chance/Hubbell.

b. Copperweld Corp.

c. Erico Inc.; Electrical Products Group.

d. ILSCO.

e. O-Z/Gedney Co.; a business of the EGS Electrical Group.

f. Raco, Inc.; Division of Hubbell.

g. Superior Grounding Systems, Inc.

h. Thomas & Betts, Electrical.

2.2 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

A. For insulated conductors, comply with Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."


B. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Insulated with green-colored insulation.

C. Grounding Electrode Conductors: Stranded copper cable, #4 AWG minimum.

D. Underground Conductors: Bare, tinned, stranded copper, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Bare Copper Conductors: Comply with the following:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.

2. Assembly of Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.

3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.

F. Copper Bonding Conductors: As follows:

1. Bonding Cable: Minimum size of 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG copper conductor, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) in diameter.

2. Bonding Conductor: Minimum size of No. 6AWG, stranded copper conductor.

3. Bonding Jumper: Bare copper tape, braided bare copper conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; minimum size of 1-5/8 inches (42 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) thick.

G. Grounding Bus: Bare, annealed copper bars of rectangular cross section, with insulators.

2.3 CONNECTOR PRODUCTS

A. Comply with IEEE 837 and UL 467; listed for use for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and connected items.

B. Bolted Connectors: Bolted-pressure-type connectors, or compression type.

C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welded type, in kit form, and selected per manufacturer's written instructions.

2.4 GROUNDING ELECTRODES

A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel.

1. Size: 5/8 by 120 inches.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Multiple Disconnecting Means Enclosures: Comply with NEC article 250.64(D).

B. Use only copper conductors for both insulated and bare grounding conductors in direct contact with earth, concrete, masonry, crushed stone, and similar materials.

C. In raceways, use insulated equipment grounding conductors.


D. Exothermic-Welded Connections: Use for connections to structural steel and for underground connections.

E. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Use bolted pressure clamps.

F. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical and telephone equipment rooms, in rooms housing service equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.

1. Use insulated spacer; space 1 inch (25.4 mm) from wall and support from wall 6 inches (150 mm) above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Underground Grounding Conductors: Use copper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG minimum. Bury at least 24 inches (600 mm) below grade or bury 12 inches (300 mm) above duct bank when installed as part of the duct bank.

3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

A. Comply with NFPA 70, Article 250, for types, sizes, and quantities of equipment grounding conductors, unless specific types, larger sizes, or more conductors than required by NFPA 70 are indicated.

B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors in all feeders and branch circuits.

1. Bond the grounding conductor to each pullbox, junction box, outlet box, cabinets, and other enclosure through which the ground conductor passes.

C. Signal and Communication Systems: For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other communication systems, provide No. 6 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and central equipment location.

1. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate grounding conductor on a 1/4-by-2-by-12-inch (6.4-by-50-by-300-mm) grounding bus.

2. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Ground Rods: Install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod length from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes.

1. Drive ground rods until tops are 2 inches (50 mm) below finished floor or final grade, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductors. Use exothermic welds, except at test wells and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging copper coating.

B. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise indicated. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

C. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install so vibration by equipment mounted on vibration isolation hangers and supports is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. Use exothermic-welded


connectors for outdoor locations, unless a disconnect-type connection is required; then, use a bolted clamp. Bond straps directly to the basic structure taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. Install straps only in locations accessible for maintenance.

D. Electrical Utility Service: Provide grounding and bonding at Utility Company’s metering equipment and transformer in accordance with Utility Company’s requirements.

E. Metal Water Service Pipe: Provide insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes by grounding clamp connectors. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor to street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.

F. Water Meter and Filter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters, filters or other serviceable equipment. Connect to pipe with grounding clamp connectors.

G. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system upstream from equipment shutoff valve.

H. Bond the grounding electrode system to the structural steel of building, if any, using exothermic weld. Coordinate work with the General Contractor.

I. Ufer Ground (Concrete-Encased Grounding Electrode): Fabricate according to NEC Article 250, using a minimum of 20 feet (6 m) of bare copper conductor not smaller than No. 4 AWG. If concrete foundation is less than 20 feet (6 m) long, coil excess conductor within the base of the foundation. Bond grounding conductor to reinforcing steel in at least four locations and to anchor bolts. Extend grounding conductor below grade and connect to building grounding grid or to a grounding electrode external to concrete. Coordinate work with the General Contractor.

J. To ensure proper grounding, a separate, green #6 copper stranded wire shall be provided from the TTB ground buss bar to the main electrical service entrance central ground reference location. Grounding and bonding shall conform to requirements and TIA/EIA-607 standard.

K. A ground buss bar shall be installed at the telephone termination board. It shall have insulated standoffs and be pre-drilled with an array of ¼” holes. The buss bar size shall be ¼” x 2” x 8”. All connections to the buss bars shall be made via non-reversible crimp style one or two hole connectors.

L. See grounding detail on the drawings.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. General: Make connections so galvanic action or electrolysis possibility is minimized. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible.

1. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to make contact points closer to order of galvanic series.

2. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact. Remove all point from points of contact prior to making connections.


3. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces.

B. Exothermic-Welded Connections: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Welds that are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable.

C. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: For No. 8 AWG and larger, use pressure-type grounding lugs. No. 10 AWG and smaller grounding conductors may be terminated with winged pressure-type connectors.

D. Noncontact Metal Raceway Terminations: If metallic raceways terminate at metal housings without mechanical and electrical connection to housing, terminate each conduit with a grounding bushing. Connect grounding bushings with a bare grounding conductor to grounding bus or terminal in housing. Bond electrically noncontinuous conduits at entrances and exits with grounding bushings and bare grounding conductors, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A.

F. Compression-Type Connections: Use hydraulic compression tools to provide correct circumferential pressure for compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended by connector manufacturer. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make a visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on grounding conductor.

G. Moisture Protection: If insulated grounding conductors are connected to ground rods or grounding buses, insulate entire area of connection and seal against moisture penetration of insulation and cable.


A. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing:

1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, and at ground test wells. Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after the last trace of precipitation, and without the soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance. Perform tests, by the fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.

3. Measure ground resistance from the system neutral connection at the service entrance to convenient ground reference point using suitable ground testing equipment. Resistance shall not exceed 5 ohms.

4. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.


CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 261200 - 1

SECTION 261200 - CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes building wires and cables and associated connectors, splices, and terminations for wiring systems rated 600 V and less.


A. Listing and Labeling: Provide wires and cables specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.

1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in NFPA 70, Article 100.



A. Deliver wires and cables according to NEMA WC 26.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of cables with other installations.

B. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated, as required to suit field conditions and as approved by Architect.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Wires and Cables:

a. American Insulated Wire Corp.; Leviton Manufacturing Co.

b. BICC Brand-Rex Company.

c. Carol Cable Co., Inc.

d. Senator Wire & Cable Company.


e. Southwire Company.

2. Connectors for Wires and Cables:

a. AMP Incorporated.

b. General Signal; O-Z/Gedney Unit.

c. Square D Co.; Anderson.

d. 3M Company; Electrical Products Division.

2.2 BUILDING WIRES AND CABLES

A. UL-listed building wires and cables with conductor material, insulation type, cable construction, and rating as specified in Part 3 "Wire and Insulation Applications" Article.

B. Thermoplastic Insulation Material: Comply with NEMA WC-70 (ICEA S-95-658).

C. Cross-Linked Polyethylene Insulation Material: Comply with NEMA WC-70 (ICEA S-95-658).

D. Ethylene Propylene Rubber Insulation Material: Comply with NEMA WC-70 (ICEA S-95-658).

E. Conductor Material: Copper.

F. Stranding: Solid conductor for No. 12 AWG and smaller; stranded conductor for No. 8 AWG and larger. No. 10 AWG to be either solid or stranded (contractor’s option).

2.3 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES

A. UL-listed, factory-fabricated wiring connectors of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated. Comply with Project's installation requirements and as specified in Part 3 "Wire and Insulation Applications" Article.

B. All branch circuit wiring connections shall be made using wire nut connectors which provide direct wire to wire contact. Connectors which utilize insulation displacement, intermediate metal or spring compression connection are not acceptable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine raceways and building finishes to receive wires and cables for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of wires and cables. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 WIRE AND INSULATION APPLICATIONS

A. Service Entrance: Type XHHW or THWN, in raceway.

B. Feeders: Type THHN/THWN, in raceway.


C. Branch Circuits: Type THHN/THWN, in raceway.

1. Type NM/NMC cable, concealed in building finishes, where allowed by the NEC and local AHJ.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install wires and cables as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and NECA's "Standard of Installation."

B. Unless otherwise noted or shown on the drawings, a maximum of three circuits (three phase conductors, neutrals, and ground) shall be allowed in a single home run raceway.

C. Multi-wire Branch Circuits: Sharing of neutrals is not allowed, provided dedicated neutral for each branch circuit.

D. Rooftop Circuits: Where conduits are installed exposed on rooftops, apply additional temperature adjustments listed in the NEC table 310.15(B)(2)(c) to ambient temperature correction factors listed in NEC table 310.16.

E. Wire size on 120 volt, 20 ampere branch circuit home run conductors over 75 feet in length (from the closest wiring device at the home run designation to the associated panelboard shown on the electrical drawing sheets), shall be increased to No. 10 AWG (minimum) to limit excessive voltage drop.

F. All corridor lighting branch circuits shall be increased to No. 10 AWG (minimum) through-out to limit excessive voltage drop.

G. All exterior lighting branch circuits shall be increased to No. 10 AWG (minimum) through-out to limit excessive voltage drop.

H. All lighting branch circuit home run conductors shall be increased to No. 10 AWG (minimum) (from the last light fixture at the home run designation shown on the electrical drawing sheets to the associated panelboard) to limit excessive voltage drop.

I. Pull Conductors: Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

J. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.

K. Install exposed cables, parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.

L. Support cables according to Division 26 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."

M. Seal around cables penetrating fire-rated elements according to 260500 and Division 7 Section "Firestopping."

N. Identify wires and cables according to Division 26 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."


3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Conductor Splices: Keep to minimum.

B. Install splices and tapes that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than conductors being spliced.

C. Use splice and tap connectors compatible with conductor material.

D. Wiring at Outlets: Install pigtail conductor at each outlet, with at least 8 inches of slack. Where multiple sets of conductors enter a box, provide 8” pigtails to devices and make connections such that the continuity of the branch circuit conductors is not dependent upon device connections and the continuing load is not routed through the device. All unused device terminal screws shall be turned completely in, provide two full wraps of electrical tape around all device terminals. On 20 amp circuits where #10 AWG conductors are required for home runs, provide #12 AWG solid pigtails for connection to device.

E. Connect outlets and components to wiring and to ground as indicated and instructed by manufacturer.

F. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A.


A. Testing: On installation of wires and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements.

1. Procedures: Perform each visual and mechanical inspection test stated in NETA ATS, Section 7.3.

B. Correct malfunctioning conductors and cables at Project site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units and retest.


RACEWAYS AND BOXES 261300 - 1

SECTION 261300 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.




1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of raceways, boxes, enclosures, cabinets, and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products one of the following:

1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.

2. Alflex Inc.

3. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose.


4. Electri-Flex Co.

5. Grinnell Co./Tyco International; Allied Tube and Conduit Div.

6. LTV Steel Tubular Products Company.

7. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex.

8. O-Z Gedney; Unit of General Signal.

9. Wheatland Tube Co.

B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.

C. IMC: ANSI C80.6.

D. PVC Coated Rigid Steel Conduit: NEMA RN 1.

E. EMT and Fittings: ANSI C80.3.

1. Fittings: Steel, set-screw or compression type with insulated bushings for protection of conductors. Diecast fittings are not approved.

F. FMC: Zinc-coated steel.

G. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.

H. MCC: Metal Clad Cable. Type MC, NEMA WC 70.

2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING


1. American International.

2. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose.

3. Arnco Corp.

4. Cantex Inc.

5. Certainteed Corp.; Pipe & Plastics Group.

6. Condux International.

7. ElecSYS, Inc.

8. Electri-Flex Co.

9. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.

10. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex.


11. RACO; Division of Hubbell, Inc.

12. Spiralduct, Inc./AFC Cable Systems, Inc.

13. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

B. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Schedule 40 and Schedule 80 PVC.

C. RNC Fittings: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.

D. LFNC: UL 1660.

2.3 METAL WIREWAYS


1. Hoffman.

2. Square D.

3. Mono Systems, Inc.

B. Material and Construction: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 1.

C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

D. Select features, unless otherwise indicated, as required to complete wiring system and to comply with NFPA 70.

E. Wireway Covers: Screw-cover type.

F. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

2.4 SURFACE RACEWAYS

A. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers. Finish with manufacturer's standard prime coating.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Airey-Thompson Sentinel Lighting; Wiremold Company (The).

b. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

c. Mono-Systems, Inc.

d. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The).

e. Wiremold Company (The); Electrical Sales Division.


B. Types, sizes, and channels as indicated and required for each application, with fittings that match and mate with raceways.

2.5 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS


1. Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc.

2. Emerson/General Signal; Appleton Electric Company.

3. Erickson Electrical Equipment Co.

4. Hoffman.

5. Hubbell, Inc.; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co.

6. O-Z/Gedney; Unit of General Signal.

7. RACO; Division of Hubbell, Inc.

8. Robroy Industries, Inc.; Enclosure Division.

9. Scott Fetzer Co.; Adalet-PLM Division.

10. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Co.

11. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

12. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The).

13. Woodhead, Daniel Company; Woodhead Industries, Inc. Subsidiary.

B. Outlet boxes shall be galvanized steel standard electrical type with knockout openings as required.

C. Outlet boxes shall be at least 1-1/2” deep, single or gang style type of sized to accommodate devices noted. Outlet boxes in masonry walls may be special masonry type. Outlet boxes on exposed conduit runs in unfinished areas and equipment rooms shall be 4” square or multi-gang boxes with matching raised covers. Outlet boxes on exposed conduit runs in finished areas or where indicated, shall be cast FS type.

D. Exterior outlet boxes shall be cast aluminum type with weatherproof cover and gasket. Outlet boxes for receptacle devices shall be provided with grounding lead lug or screw.

E. Outlet boxes installed in plaster, plasterboard, acoustic tile, or paneled surfaces shall be provided with plaster rings, except 4” octagonal ceiling boxes. Outlet boxes installed in masonry, tile, or concrete surfaces shall be provided with square corner type extension rings where special masonry boxes are not used.

F. Outlet boxes noted as WP (weatherproof) shall be a flush or surface (as noted) FS type box with at least 4 machine screw connections for a gasketed device or cover.


G. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

H. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, with gasketed cover.

I. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

J. Cast-Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast aluminum with gasketed cover.

K. Provide wall plates for all unused outlet and device boxes. Wall plates shall comply with section 261400.

L. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous hinge cover and flush latch.

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Provide backplate and grounding as required by the authority having jurisdiction for installation of indicated equipment.

M. Cabinets: NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. Key latch to match panelboards. Include metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage and include accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.

2.6 FACTORY FINISHES

A. Finish: For raceway, enclosure, or cabinet components, provide manufacturer's standard color paint applied to factory-assembled surface raceways, enclosures, and cabinets before shipping.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors:

1. Exposed: Rigid steel or IMC.

2. Concealed: Rigid steel or IMC.

3. Underground, Single Run: RNC, see installation for additional requirements.

4. Underground, Grouped: RNC, see installation for additional requirements.

5. Underslab: RNC, see installation for additional requirements.

6. Embedded in slab: Rigid steel.

7. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.

8. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 3R.


B. Indoors:

1. Exposed: EMT.

2. Concealed: EMT.

3. Underslab: RNC, see installation for additional requirements.

4. Embedded in slab: Rigid steel.

5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC; except use LFMC in damp or wet locations.

6. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit.

7. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except as follows:

a. Damp or Wet Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4, nonmetallic.

C. Minimum Raceway Size: ½-inch trade size (DN16), except home runs from the closest wiring device or light fixture at the home run designation to the associated panelboard shown on the electrical drawing sheets shall be ¾-inch trade size (DN21).

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

1. Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings with insulated bushings, unless otherwise indicated.

2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings approved for use with that material. Patch all nicks and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install raceways, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets as indicated and in accordance to manufacturer’s written instruction.

1. Keep raceways at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

2. Install raceways level and square and at proper elevations. Provide adequate headroom.

3. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

4. Support raceways as specified in Division 26 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."

5. Install temporary closures to prevent foreign matter from entering raceways.

6. Protect stub-ups from damage where conduits rise through floor slabs. Arrange so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab. Install a metal sleeve or concrete curb to provide a 4 inch high watertight barrier.


7. Make bends and offsets so ID is not reduced. Keep legs of bends in the same plane and keep straight legs of offsets parallel, unless otherwise indicated.

8. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.

a. Install concealed raceways with a minimum of bends in the shortest practical distance, considering type of building construction and obstructions, unless otherwise indicated.

9. Exterior raceways:

a. Install a minimum 24 inches below grade.

b. Where multiple conduit runs are indicated, they shall be installed in the same trench.

c. Where raceways stub into sub-grade levels, utilize installation methods to prevent migration of water into the building interior spaces.

d. All 90 degree ells must be rigid steel conduit.

e. Transition to rigid steel conduit before the conduit is exposed.

f. Metallic conduit exterior or within building limits, that is in contact with earth, shall be galvanized rigid conduit with factory applied vinyl plastic coating or galvanized rigid conduit painted with heavy coat of bitumastic paint. Couplings shall be painted after assembly. Nicks in plastic coated conduit shall be painted with plastic material as recommended by the manufacturer. Where bitumastic paint is applied, the paint must be thoroughly dry prior to backfilling.

g. Provide warning tape in accordance with specification section 260500.

10. Raceways underground or under slabs:

a. All 90 degree ells must be rigid steel conduit.

b. Transition to rigid steel conduit before the conduit is exposed.

c. Metallic conduit exterior or within building limits, that is in contact with earth, shall be galvanized rigid conduit with factory applied vinyl plastic coating or galvanized rigid conduit painted with heavy coat of bitumastic paint. Couplings shall be painted after assembly. Nicks in plastic coated conduit shall be painted with plastic material as recommended by the manufacturer. Where bitumastic paint is applied, the paint must be thoroughly dry prior to backfilling.

d. Provide expansion fittings where conduits cross building expansion joints or where a wide temperature differential exists.

11. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: Install in middle 1/3 of slab thickness where practical and leave at least 1 inch (25 mm) of concrete cover.

a. Secure raceways to reinforcing rods to prevent sagging or shifting during concrete placement.

b. Space raceways laterally to prevent voids in concrete.

c. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size (DN 27) parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support.


d. Provide expansion fittings where conduits cross building expansion joints or where a wide temperature differential exists.

12. Install raceways parallel or at right angles to nearby surfaces or structural members and follow surface contours as much as possible.

a. Run parallel or banked raceways together on common supports.

b. Make parallel bends in parallel or banked runs. Use factory elbows only where elbows can be installed parallel; otherwise, provide field bends for parallel raceways.

13. Outlet boxes shall be concealed except where shown or noted otherwise. Outlet boxes, plaster rings or extension rings shall be installed flush with the finished surface.

14. Where applicable, outlet boxes for controls and operating mechanisms shall be installed to comply with ADA mounting height requirements.

15. Junction and Pull Boxes

a. Where necessary to terminate, tap-off, or redirect multiple conduit runs, provide and install appropriately sized junction boxes. Furnish and install pull boxes where necessary in the raceway system to facilitate conductor installation. Provide pull boxes to limit conduit runs to less than 150 feet and to contain no more than the equivalent of three right angle bends.

b. Use outlet boxes as junction boxes and pull boxes wherever possible and allowed by applicable codes. Make all boxes accessible and do not install boxes in finished areas. Mount all boxes plumb and level. Use flush mounted boxes with concealed conduits and make edges of boxes flush with the final surface.

c. Install boxes supported independently of conduit by attachment to the building structure or a structural member.

16. Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for that purpose and make joints tight.

a. Make raceway terminations tight. Use bonding bushings or wedges at connections subject to vibration. Use bonding jumpers where joints cannot be made tight.

b. Use insulating bushings to protect conductors.

17. Tighten set screws of threadless fittings with suitable tools.

18. Terminations:

a. Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings, align raceways to enter squarely and install locknuts with dished part against box. Use two locknuts, one inside and one outside box.

b. Where raceways are terminated with threaded hubs, screw raceways or fittings tightly into hub so end bears against wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used, align raceways so coupling is square to box; tighten chase nipple so no threads are exposed.

19. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each end of pull wire.


20. Stub-up Connections: Extend conduits through concrete floor for connection to freestanding equipment. Install with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs set flush with finished floor. Extend conductors to equipment with rigid steel conduit; FMC may be used 6 inches (150 mm) above the floor. Install screwdriver-operated, threaded plugs flush with floor for future equipment connections.

21. Flexible Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches (48 inches in ducts and plenums) of flexible conduit for recessed and semi-recessed lighting fixtures; for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for all motors. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations. Install separate ground conductor across flexible connections.

22. Surface Raceways: Install a separate, green, ground conductor in raceways from junction box supplying raceways to receptacle or fixture ground terminals.

23. Set floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.

24. Install hinged-cover enclosures and cabinets plumb. Support at each corner.

25. Direct Buried Conduit Backfill: Comply with Division 2 requirements.

B. Location of Outlets and Equipment.

1. Outlets shall be installed at the heights and approximate designated positions as shown on the Drawings and symbol legend, unless otherwise directed. Outlets in similar rooms shall be installed in the same relative location in each room. Outlets shall not be installed back to back but shall be offset approximately 6 inches.

2. Outlets shall be located to clear piping, ductwork, and other obstructions. Switch outlets shall be on the latch side of door except where type of construction dictates otherwise. Outlets in masonry or tile shall be located as far as practical adjacent to horizontal and vertical mortar joints to minimize cutting.

3. Verify locations and dimensions of electrical equipment, particularly in the case of door swings, heights of cabinets and counters, shelves, and location of equipment installed by the Owner or other trades.

4. Mounting heights indicated on the drawings shall be to center line of outlet unless indicated otherwise. Heights may be adjusted to align with mortar joints as specified above, however, all similar outlets in a given area shall be adjusted to the same height unless specifically noted at the outlet.

5. Receptacle outlets indicated to be installed “A.C.” (above counter) shall be mounted not less than 3 inches higher than the top of the counter backsplash or at heights indicated.

6. All similar equipment such as panelboards, motor starters, disconnect switches, etc., shall be installed at the same heights throughout the building.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.


1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.

2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer.

3.4 CLEANING

A. After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished raceways and boxes, inspect exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes.


WIRING DEVICES 261400 - 1

SECTION 261400 - WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes receptacles, connectors, switches, and finish plates.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each product specified.

B. Maintenance Data: For materials and products to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Comply with NEMA WD 1.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations.

1. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Wiring Devices:

a. Bryant Electric, Inc.

b. Eagle Electric Manufacturing Co., Inc.

c. GE Company; GE Wiring Devices.


d. Hubbell, Inc.; Wiring Devices Div.

e. Killark Electric Manufacturing Co.

f. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.

g. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices Div.

h. Pyle-National, Inc.; an Amphenol Co.

2.2 RECEPTACLES

A. Straight-Blade and Locking Receptacles: Hard use (heavy duty) specification grade, minimum 20A rating, side wired.

B. Tamper Resistant Straight-Blade Receptacles: Minimum 20A rating, side wired, with either internal sliding-shutter barrier system requiring the presence of an object on both sides of the shutter to allow access to contacts or internal switching requiring the presence of an object in both contacts to energize the device.

C. Ranges and Clothes Dryers: Receptacles for ranges and clothes dryers shall be 3 pole, 4 wire grounding type.

D. GFCI Receptacles: Feed-through type, with integral NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R duplex receptacle arranged to protect connected downstream receptacles on same circuit. Design units for installation in a 2-3/4-inch- (70-mm-) deep outlet box without an adapter.

2.3 PENDANT CORD/CONNECTOR DEVICES

A. Description: Matching, locking type, plug and receptacle body connector, NEMA WD 6, Configurations L5-20P and L5-20R, Heavy-Duty grade.

1. Body: Nylon with screw-open cable-gripping jaws and provision for attaching external cable grip.

2. External Cable Grip: Woven wire-mesh type made of high-strength galvanized-steel wire strand, matched to cable diameter, and with attachment provision designed for corresponding connector.

2.4 CORD AND PLUG SETS

A. Description: Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of equipment being connected.

1. Cord: Rubber-insulated, stranded-copper conductors, with type SOW-A jacket. Green-insulated grounding conductor, and equipment-rating ampacity plus a minimum of 30 percent.

2. Plug: Nylon body and integral cable-clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle type for connection.


2.5 SWITCHES

A. Snap Switches: Heavy-duty, quiet type, 20 amp, 120-277 volt – AC, with back and side wired screw terminals; Pass & Seymour PS20AC-1 or equal. Single-pole or three-way to suit connections.

2.6 WALL PLATES

A. Single and combination types match corresponding wiring devices.

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.

2. Material for Finished Spaces: 0.04-inch-thick, Type 302, satin-finished stainless steel.

3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel.

4. Material for Wet Locations: Heavy duty die-cast zinc.

a. Receptacle cover shall be provided with spring loaded self closing lift cover. Duplex receptacle covers shall be similar to Steel City WR series. Duplex GFCI receptacle covers shall be similar to Steel City WGF series.

1) Where required by the authority having jurisdiction, receptacle covers shall be “While in Use” type, equal to Intermatic WP1010MC, or WP1010HMC, or WP1030MC series, consisting of heavy duty die cast construction with lockable hasp.

b. Switch covers shall be similar to Steel City SW series.

2.7 WIRING DEVICE FINISHES

A. Color: Gray, unless otherwise indicated or required by Code.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Switches shall be installed so that the handle is down when the switch in the off position.

B. Receptacle and switch branch circuit wiring shall be terminated on the side wired screw terminals.

C. In storage, mechanical, and electrical equipment rooms where the receptacle is located adjacent to the light switch at 46” AFF, the devices shall be installed in a combination cover-plate and back-box assembly.

D. GFI Receptacles: Ground fault circuit-interruption for personnel shall be provided as required in the NEC 210.8(A) through (C). The ground-fault circuit-interrupter shall be installed in a readily accessible location.

E. Wet Locations: All 15- and 20-ampere 125- and 250-volt non-locking receptacles shall be listed weather-resistant type.

F. Install devices and assemblies’ level, plumb, and secure.


G. Where applicable, devices for controls and operating mechanisms shall be installed to comply with ADA mounting height requirements.

H. Provide tamper resistant receptacles as required by NEC articles 210.52 and 406.12.

I. Install wall plates when painting is complete.

J. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates.

1. Exterior receptacles shall be installed with long dimension horizontal, mounting height of approximately 25” above finish grade.

K. Orientation of Receptacles: Install with grounding terminal of receptacles on the bottom.

L. Protect devices and assemblies during painting.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."

1. Switches: Where three or more switches are ganged, and elsewhere as indicated, identify each switch with approved legend engraved on wall plate.

2. Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served. Use durable wire markers or tags within outlet boxes.

3. Where receptacles are supplied through a GFCI breaker or connected “downstream” of a GFCI receptacle, the receptacle shall be marked “GFCI Protected”.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch-circuit equipment grounding conductor.

B. Where multiple sets of conductors terminate at a box, provide pigtails to devices such that the continuity of the branch circuit conductors is not dependent upon device connections and the continuing load is not routed through the device. See section 261200 – Conductors and Cables.


A. Test wiring devices for proper operation, polarity and ground continuity.

B. Test GFCI operation with both local and remote fault simulations according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Replace damaged or defective components.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Internally clean devices, device outlet boxes, and enclosures. Replace stained or improperly painted wall plates or devices.


LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 261450 - 1

SECTION 261450 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes photoelectric relays and multi-pole lighting contactors.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include dimensions and data on features, components, and ratings for lighting control devices.

B. Maintenance Data: For lighting control devices to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, for their indicated use and installation conditions by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.


1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate features of devices specified in this Section with systems and components specified in other Sections to form an integrated system of compatible components. Match components and interconnections for optimum performance of specified functions. Include coordination with the following:

1. Division 26 Section “Interior Lighting.”

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Photoelectric Relays:

a. Allen-Bradley/Rockwell Automation.

b. GE Lighting Controls


c. Intermatic, Inc.

d. Paragon Electric Co., Inc.

e. Tork, Inc.

2. Multi-pole Lighting Contactors:

a. Automatic Switch Co.

b. Cutler-Hammer Products; Eaton Corporation.

c. Furnas Electric Co.

d. GE Lighting Controls.

e. Hubbell Lighting, Inc.

f. Siemens Energy and Automation, Inc.

g. Square D Co.; Power Management Organization.

2.2 PHOTOELECTRIC RELAYS

A. Description: Contacts rated to operate connected contactor coils and complying with UL 773A.

B. Light-Level Monitoring Range: 0 to 500 fc, with an adjustment for turn-on/turn-off levels.

C. Fail mode shall be on.

D. Time Delay: Prevents false operation.

E. Outdoor Sealed Units: Weathertight housing, resistant to high temperatures and equipped with sun-glare shield and ice preventer.

2.3 MULTIPOLE CONTACTORS AND RELAYS

A. Description: Electrically operated and mechanically held, and complying with UL 508 and NEMA ICS 2.

1. Current Rating for Switching: UL listing or rating consistent with type of load served, including tungsten filament, inductive, and high-inrush ballast (ballasts with 15 percent or less total harmonic distortion of normal load current).

2. Control Coil Voltage: Match control power source.

3. Two Wire Operation: Provide additional control relays as required for two wire operation associated with photocell and switching applications.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install equipment level and plumb and according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Mount lighting control devices according to manufacturer's written instructions and requirements in Division 26 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."


C. Mounting heights indicated are to bottom of unit for suspended devices and to center of unit for wall-mounting devices.

3.2 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Install wiring between sensing and control devices according to manufacturer's written instructions and as specified in Division 26 Section "Conductors and Cables".

B. Wiring Method: Install all wiring in raceway as specified in Division 26 Section "Raceways and Boxes".

C. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.

D. Ground equipment.

E. Connections: Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Lighting Control Enclosure Nameplates: Label each lighting contactor with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate mounted with corrosion-resistant screws.


A. Schedule visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests with at least seven days' advance notice.

B. The lighting control system shall be programmed to execute and perform all functions required to effectively operate the site according to the owner and engineer requirements. Coordinate control system operation with engineer during shop drawing review.

C. Inspect control components for defects and physical damage, testing laboratory labeling, and nameplate compliance with the Contract Documents.

D. Check tightness of electrical connections with torque wrench calibrated within previous six months. Use manufacturers recommended torque values.

E. Verify settings of photoelectric devices with photometer calibrated within previous six months.

F. Electrical Tests: Perform the following according to manufacturer's written instructions:

1. Continuity tests of circuits.

2. Operational Tests: Set and operate devices to demonstrate their functions and capabilities in a methodical sequence that cues and reproduces actual operating functions.

a. Include testing of devices under conditions that simulate actual operational conditions. Record control settings, operations, cues, and functional observations.


G. Correct deficiencies, make necessary adjustments, and retest. Verify that specified requirements are met.

H. Test Labeling: After satisfactory completion of tests and inspections, apply a label to tested components indicating test results, date, and responsible agency and representative.

I. Reports: Written reports of tests and observations. Record defective materials and workmanship and unsatisfactory test results. Record repairs and adjustments.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Cleaning: Clean equipment and devices internally and externally using methods and materials recommended by manufacturers, and repair damaged finishes.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Coordinate training for the lighting control system as specified herein.

B. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel as specified below:

1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on troubleshooting, servicing, adjusting, and preventive maintenance. Provide a minimum of four hours' training.

2. Training Aid: Use the approved final version of maintenance manuals as a training aid.

3. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance notice.


PANELBOARDS 264420 - 1

SECTION 264420 - PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes load centers and panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, and associated auxiliary equipment rated 600 V and less for the following types:

1. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, overcurrent protective device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.

1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following:

a. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.

b. Bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.

c. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.

d. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components.

2. Wiring Diagrams: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring and differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

C. Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. In addition to requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout," include the following:

1. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions.

a. Copies of panelboard schedules shall be provided in the operation and maintenance manuals in case circuit directories in the panelboards are lost.

2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices.

3. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.


D. Panelboard Overcurrent Protection Device Arrangement: To the extent possible, coordinate with panelboard supplier for correct arrangement of overcurrent protection devices (OCPD’s) within panelboards to match panelboard schedules shown on the electrical drawings. The contractor shall rearrange OCPD’s if necessary to match the schedules shown on the electrical drawings.



B. Comply with NEMA PB 1.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, and encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements.

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Keys: Four spares of each type of panelboard cabinet lock.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Panelboards, Overcurrent Protective Devices, Controllers, Contactors, and Accessories:

a. Eaton Corp.; Cutler-Hammer Products.

b. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Div.

c. Schneider Electric (Square D Co.)

d. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.

2.2 FABRICATION AND FEATURES

A. Enclosures: Flush- and surface-mounted cabinets. NEMA PB 1, Type 1, to meet environmental conditions at installed location.

B. Covers:

1. Provide hinged front trim cover with front trim hinged to box with standard circuit breaker access door within hinged trim cover. Provide flush latch with tumbler lock for circuit breaker access door.


C. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish over corrosion-resistant treatment or primer coat.

D. Directory Card: With transparent protective cover, mounted inside metal frame, inside panelboard door.

E. Bus: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.

F. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material.

G. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment ground conductors; bonded to box.

H. Service Equipment Label: UL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards with main service disconnect switches.

I. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices.

J. Feed-through Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device.

2.3 PANELBOARD SHORT-CIRCUIT RATING

A. Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals.

2.4 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS

A. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units.

2.5 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

2. 100% Rated Electronic Trip Unit Main Circuit Breaker: RMS sensing; field-replaceable rating plug; with the following field-adjustable settings:

a. Instantaneous trip.

b. Long- and short-time pickup levels.

c. Long- and short-time time adjustments.

3. GFCI Circuit Breakers for Personnel Protection: Single- and two-pole configurations with 5-mA trip sensitivity.

4. GFCI Circuit Breakers for Equipment Protection: Single- and two-pole configurations with 30-mA trip sensitivity.


B. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker Features and Accessories. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.

1. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and material of conductors.

2. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HACR for heating, air-conditioning, and refrigerating equipment.

3. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 55 percent of rated voltage.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.

B. Mounting Heights: Top of trim 74 inches (1880 mm) above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Mounting: Surface mount panelboards shall be mounted to ¾” plywood backboards. Paint backboards with two coats of grey fire retardant paint.

D. Mounting: Plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish.

E. Circuit Directory: Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.

1. Room names or Owner’s room numbers shall be used. Do not use plan room numbers unless approved by the owner.

2. Spare circuit breakers shall be identified as such.

F. Install filler plates in unused spaces.

G. Provision for Future Circuits at Flush Panelboards: Stub four 1-inch (27-GRC) empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in the future. Stub four 1-inch (27-GRC) empty conduits into raised floor space or below slab not on grade.

H. Wiring in Panelboard Gutters: Arrange conductors into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing load balancing.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs as specified in Division 26 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."

B. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate mounted with corrosion-resistant screws.


1. Lighting and Appliance Panelboards: Each lighting and appliance panelboard label shall indicate the panelboard name, voltage and phase, and where the panel is fed from.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Install equipment grounding connections for panelboards with ground continuity to main electrical ground bus.

B. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A.


A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:

1. Test continuity of each circuit.

B. Testing: After installing panelboards and after electrical circuitry has been energized, demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements.

1. Procedures: Perform each visual and mechanical inspection test indicated in NETA ATS Section 7.6 for molded-case circuit breakers.

2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.

3.6 CLEANING

A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of panelboards. Remove paint splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish.


LIGHTING 265110 - 1

SECTION 265110 - LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes interior lighting fixtures, lighting fixtures mounted on exterior building surfaces, lamps, ballasts, and accessories.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture indicated, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, and the following:

1. Dimensions of fixtures.

2. Certified results of laboratory tests for fixtures and lamps for photometric performance.

3. Fluorescent ballasts.

4. Types of lamps.

B. Shop Drawings: Show details of nonstandard or custom fixtures. Indicate dimensions, weights, method of field assembly, components, features, and accessories.

C. Maintenance Data: For lighting fixtures to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.


A. Fixtures, Emergency Lighting Units, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.


C. NFPA 101 Compliance: Comply with visibility and luminance requirements for exit signs.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Fixtures, Mounting Hardware, and Trim: Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures with ceiling system and other construction.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in

LIGHTING 265110 - 2

addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Special Warranties for Fluorescent Ballasts: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer agreeing to replace fluorescent ballasts that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Special Warranty Period for Electronic Ballasts: Five years from date of manufacture, but not less than four years from date of Substantial Completion.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Lamps: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.

2. Plastic Diffusers and Lenses: 1 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.

3. Ballasts: 1 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products indicated for each designation in the Lighting Fixture Schedule.

2.2 FIXTURES AND FIXTURE COMPONENTS, GENERAL

A. Metal Parts: Free from burrs, sharp corners, and edges.

B. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging. All parts shall be painted after fabrication to facilitate installation, increase efficiency, and inhibit rusting.

C. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free from light leakage under operating conditions, and arranged to permit re-lamping without use of tools. Arrange doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other pieces to prevent accidental falling during re-lamping and when secured in operating position.

D. Reflecting Surfaces: Minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated:

1. White Surfaces: 90 percent.

2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent.

3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.

4. Laminated Silver Metallized Film: 90 percent.

LIGHTING 265110 - 3

E. Lenses, Diffusers, Covers, and Globes: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic or annealed crystal glass, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Plastic: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and ultraviolet radiation.

2. Lens Thickness: 0.125 inch (3 mm) minimum, unless greater thickness is indicated.

2.3 LIGHTING FIXTURES

A. See the “Lighting Fixture Schedule” on plans.

1. Upper case letter at fixture outlet symbol or in note on Drawings indicated the fixture type. Lower case letter at fixture symbol indicated switching circuit. Any outlets not specifically labeled shall be equipment with fixture similar to those in rooms used for like purposes.

2. Fixtures requiring plaster frames or other special frames shall be furnished with these frames as required for type of construction. Fixtures requiring additional accessible outlet connection boxes and additional wiring from outlet box to fixture, shall be furnished with this wiring per the N.E.C. and Local Code requirements. Frames of all recessed fixtures shall be tight to the ceiling to eliminate light leaks. Gasketing shall be used to eliminate all light leaks.

2.4 FLUORESCENT LAMP BALLASTS

A. Electronic type ballast as manufactured by Advance, Energy Savings Inc., Howard Industries, Universal Lighting Technologies, or Sylvania.

B. General Requirements: Unless otherwise indicated, features include the following:

1. Designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated at full light output.

2. Type: Instant start, energy saving. Ballasts shall qualify for utility rebates. A list of qualified ballasts can be found at www.cee1.org.

3. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent.

4. Power Factor: 95 percent, minimum.

5. Ballast Factor: .88, unless noted otherwise.

6. Sound Rating: A.

7. Operating Voltage: Match connected circuits.

8. Multi-lamp Ballasts: Utilize 1, 2, 3, or 4 lamp ballast as required to accommodate switching shown on the drawings.

9. Fixtures Controlled By Occupancy Sensors: Ballasts which are controlled by occupancy sensors at locations where frequent switching will occur shall be programmed-start type equal to Magnetek AccuStart series wired for parallel lamp operation.

C. Electronic Ballasts for Linear Lamps: Unless otherwise indicated, features include the following, besides those in "General Requirements" Paragraph above:

1. Certified Ballast Manufacturer Certification: Indicated by label.

LIGHTING 265110 - 4

2. Encapsulation: Without voids in potting compound.

3. Parallel Lamp Circuits: Multiple lamp ballasts connected to maintain full light output on surviving lamps if one or more lamps fail.

4. Minimum Starting Temperature: 0°F.

D. Ballasts for Compact Lamps: Unless otherwise indicated, additional features include the following:

1. Type: Electronic, fully encapsulated in potting compound.

2. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher.

3. Flicker: Less than 5 percent.

4. Lamp Current Crest Factor: Less than 1.7.

5. Transient Protection: Comply with IEEE C62.41 for Category A1 locations.

6. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR, Chapter 1, Part 18, Subpart C for limitations on electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment.

E. Ballasts for Low-Temperature Environments: As follows:

1. Temperatures 0 Deg F (Minus 17 Deg C) and Above: Electronic type rated for 0 deg F (minus 17 deg C) starting temperature.

2. Temperatures Minus 20 Deg F (Minus 29 Deg C) and Above: Electromagnetic type designed for use with high-output lamps.

F. Ballasts for Low Electromagnetic Interference Environments: Comply with 47 CFR, Chapter 1, Part 18, Subpart C for limitations on electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for consumer equipment.

2.5 LAMPS

A. Lamps as manufactured by Osram Sylvania, Phillips Lighting, or General Electric.

B. Fluorescent lamps shall qualify for utility rebates. A list of qualified lamps can be found at www.cee1.org.

C. Linear Fluorescent T-8 lamps:

1. Type: Rapid start.

2. Life: 30,000 hrs rated average at 3 hours per start.

3. Color Temperature: 4100K.

4. Color Rendering Index (CRI): 82 minimum.

5. Minimum Initial Lumens: 2725 (48”), 2225 (36”), 1400 (24”).

6. Power Rating: 28 watts (48”), 25 watts (36”), 17 watts (24”).

D. Linear Fluorescent T-5 High Output High Performance lamps:

1. Life: 30,000 hrs rated average.


LIGHTING 265110 - 5


4. Initial lumens: 4850 minimum.

5. Nominal length: 48 inches.

6. Power rating: 54 watts.

E. Compact Fluorescent lamps:

1. Life: 10,000 hrs rated average.



4. Amalgam Technology: Lamps shall utilize amalgam technology to maintain stable light output over a wide range of temperatures.

2.6 FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods," for channel- and angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.

B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch (12-mm) steel tubing with swivel ball fitting and ceiling canopy. Finish same as fixture.

C. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch (12-mm) steel tubes with single canopy arranged to mount a single fixture. Finish same as fixture.

D. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch- (5-mm-) minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.

E. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.

F. Aircraft Cable Support: Use cable, anchorages, and intermediate supports recommended by fixture manufacturer.

2.7 FINISHES

A. Fixtures: Manufacturer's standard, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Paint Finish: Applied over corrosion-resistant treatment or primer, free of defects, after fabrication.

2. Metallic Finish: Corrosion resistant.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceiling and walls, and secure according to manufacturer's written instructions and approved submittal materials. Install lamps in each fixture.

LIGHTING 265110 - 6

1. Where specific lamp designations are not indicated or specified, lamp fixtures according to manufacturer’s recommendations.

2. Square fluorescent light fixtures shall be orientated so all lamps run in the same direction in the same room, corridor, or definable space.

B. Fire Rated Ceilings:

1. Lighting fixtures that are not fire rated for the ceiling they are to be installed in shall be provided with a fire rated enclosure. Enclosure shall be suitable for the application as approved by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Contractor shall review architectural plans to determine which ceilings, if any, are to be constructed as fire rated assemblies and shall include the protection of any and all light fixtures installed in these ceilings in his/her bid.

C. Suspended Fixture Support: As follows:

1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches (1200 mm), brace to limit swinging.

2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers.

3. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end.

4. Continuous Rows: Suspend from cable or chain installed according to fixture manufacturer's written instructions and details on Drawings.

D. Emergency Lighting Fixtures: Provide un-switched normal building power to all fixtures provided with generator transfer device for local power failure indication. The un-switched power connection shall be from a branch circuit serving the lighting in the space in which the emergency lighting is located.


A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.

B. Tests: As follows:

1. Verify normal operation of each fixture after installation.

2. Emergency Lighting: Interrupt electrical supply to demonstrate proper operation.

3. Verify normal transfer to battery source and retransfer to normal.

3.3 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING

A. Clean fixtures internally and externally after installation. Use methods and materials recommended by manufacturer.

B. Aim adjustable fixtures to provide required light intensities.



October 6, 2017

PLAYGROUND PROTECTIVE SURFACING 321816 - 1

SECTION 321816 – PLAYGROUND PROTECTIVE SURFACING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Resilient Rubber Playground Surface - Unitary synthetic seamless surface.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

1. Critical Height: Standard measure of shock attenuation. According to CPSC No. 325, this means “the fall height below which a life-threatening head injury would not be expected to occur.”


A. Impact Attenuation: According to ASTM F 1292.

B. Accessibility of Surface Systems: According to ASTM F 1951.

C. ASTM Surfacing Guide F 2223

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Show the following:

1. Color of surfaces. 2. Installation details for curbs, ramps, and accessories. 3. Location of drainage accessories.

C. Samples: For each type of playground surface system indicated.

D. Product certificates.

E. Maintenance data.

F. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.


October 6, 2017



A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by the manufacturer.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of playground surface systems with installation of playground equipment specified in Division 11 Section “Play Field Equipment and Structures.”

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of playground surface system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Reduction in impact attenuation. b. Deterioration of surface and other materials beyond normal weathering.

2. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each product is based on the products named. Subject to compliance with requirements. Provide listed product or Architect approved equal.

2.2 RESILIENT RUBBER PLAYGROUND SURFACE - UNITARY SYNTHETIC SEAMLESS SURFACE

A. Seamless Surface: Dual-density, poured-in-place system with wearing course over cushion course. Provide manufacturer's standard thickness for each layer as required for overall thickness indicated, tested for impact attenuation according to ASTM F 1292 and for accessibility according to ASTM F 1951.

1. Basis-of-Design Product(s): a. PlayBound Poured-in-Place by Surface America. Contact: 800-999-0555. PO Box

157, Williamsville, NY 1423 b. Dura Turf Pour-in-Place by Sport Surface Specialties Contact: 716-652-2039. PO

Box 577, East Aurora, NY 14052 c. No Fault Safety Surface by No Fault Sports Group. Contact: 866-637-7678 3112

Valley Creek Drive, Suite C, Baton Rouge Louisiana, 70808 2. Critical Height: a minimum of 8 feet (2.4 m) – Critical Height To Be Verified by Selected

Play Structure Provider.


October 6, 2017


3. Overall Thickness: Not less than as required for critical height indicated and as verified by Play Structure Provider. a. Minimum:

1) 1/2” thick wear course of MDI polyurethane and EPDM rubber granules, mixed 22% binder to rubber ratio.

2) 4” impact attenuation layer of MDI polyurethane and SBR rubber buffings, mixed 14% binder to rubber ratio.

4. Primer/Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard primer and weather-resistant, moisture-cured polyurethane adhesive suitable for unit, substrate, and location indicated.

5. Wearing Course Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. a. Pattern: As indicated on Drawings. b. Color: 50% Black, 50% color as selected by Architect from Manufacturers full

range of colors. 6. Filler/Sealant: Manufacturer's standard clear silicone or polyurethane filler/sealant

suitable for exterior use.

B. Leveling and Patching Material: Portland cement-based grout or epoxy- or polyurethane-based formulation suitable for exterior use and approved by playground surface system manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RESILIENT RUBBER - GENERAL

A. Prepare substrates to receive surfacing products according to playground surface system manufacturer's written instructions. Verify that substrates are sound and without high spots, ridges, holes, and depressions.

B. Concrete Substrates: Provide sound surface free of laitance, efflorescence, curing compounds, and other contaminants incompatible with playground surface system. 1. Repair unsatisfactory surfaces and fill holes and depressions. 2. Mechanically scarify or otherwise prepare concrete substrates to achieve recommended

degree of roughness. 3. Saw cut concrete for terminal edges of playground surface systems as indicated. 4. Treat control joints and other nonmoving substrate cracks to prevent telegraphing

through playground surface system.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF SEAMLESS PLAYGROUND SURFACE SYSTEMS

A. Seamless Surface: Mix and apply components of playground surface system according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent traffic over system for not less than 48 hours after installation.



October 6, 2017


This Page Intentionally Left Blank


APPENDIX: GEOTECHNICAL EXPLORATIONS REPORT

GEOTEK ENGINEERING & TESTING SERVICES, INC. 909 East 50th Street North Sioux Falls, South Dakota 57104 Phone 605-335-5512 Fax 605-335-0773

June 1, 2017 Confluence 524 N. Main Avenue, Suite 201 Sioux Falls, South Dakota 57104 Attn: Chad Kucker, PLA, CID, LEED AP, ASLA Subj: Geotechnical Exploration Proposed Rotary Park E. 26th Street Sioux Falls, South Dakota GeoTek #17-539 This correspondence presents our written report of the geotechnical exploration program for the referenced project. Our work was performed in accordance with your authorization. We are transmitting an electronic copy of our report for your use. We thank you for the opportunity of providing our services on this project and look forward to continued participation during the design and construction phases. If you have any questions regarding this report, please contact our office at (605) 335-5512. Respectfully Submitted, GeoTek Engineering & Testing Services, Inc. Jared Haskins Jared Haskins, PE Geotechnical Manager

Proposed Rotary Park Page 2 of 21 Sioux Falls, South Dakota GeoTek #17-539

GeoTek Engineering & Testing Services, Inc.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION......................................................................................................................... 4

PROJECT INFORMATION ............................................................................................................... 4 SCOPE OF SERVICES ..................................................................................................................... 4

SITE & SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS ..................................................................................... 5

SITE LOCATION & DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................. 5 GROUND SURFACE ELEVATIONS & TEST BORING LOCATIONS .................................................... 5 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS ........................................................................................................... 5 WATER LEVELS ........................................................................................................................... 6

ENGINEERING REVIEW & RECOMMENDATIONS .......................................................... 6

OVERALL PROJECT DESIGN DATA ............................................................................................... 6 RESTROOM BUILDING .................................................................................................................. 7

Design Data ............................................................................................................................. 7

Discussion ................................................................................................................................ 7 Site Preparation ........................................................................................................................ 7

Surcharge ................................................................................................................................. 8 Foundation Loads & Settlement .............................................................................................. 9 Floor Slab................................................................................................................................. 9

Frost Protection – Footings ...................................................................................................... 9 Frost Protection – Floor Slab ................................................................................................... 9

Coefficient of Friction ............................................................................................................. 9 SHELTER .................................................................................................................................... 10

Design Data ........................................................................................................................... 10

Discussion .............................................................................................................................. 10 Site Preparation ...................................................................................................................... 10

Time Delay ............................................................................................................................ 11 Foundation Loads & Settlement ............................................................................................ 11 Frost Protection – Concrete Piers .......................................................................................... 11 Frost Protection – Concrete Slab ........................................................................................... 11

PARKING LOT & ACCESS ROAD ................................................................................................. 12 Design Data ........................................................................................................................... 12 Discussion .............................................................................................................................. 12 Initial Subgrade Preparation .................................................................................................. 12 Subgrade Reinforcement – Parking Lot ................................................................................ 12

Normal Subgrade Preparation – Access Road ....................................................................... 13 Pavement Section Thicknesses .............................................................................................. 13

SOIL DISTURBANCE & EXCAVATION ......................................................................................... 14 MATERIAL TYPES & COMPACTION LEVELS ............................................................................... 14 DRAINAGE ................................................................................................................................. 17

CONSTRUCTION CONSIDERATIONS ................................................................................ 17

GROUNDWATER & SURFACE WATER ......................................................................................... 17 DISTURBANCE OF SOILS ............................................................................................................. 17



COLD WEATHER PRECAUTIONS ................................................................................................. 17 EXCAVATION SIDESLOPES ......................................................................................................... 18 OBSERVATIONS & TESTING ....................................................................................................... 18 EXCAVATION ............................................................................................................................. 18

TESTING ..................................................................................................................................... 19

SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION PROCEDURES ................................................................ 19

TEST BORINGS ........................................................................................................................... 19 SOIL CLASSIFICATION ................................................................................................................ 20 WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENTS ................................................................................................ 20

LABORATORY TESTS .................................................................................................................. 20

LIMITATIONS ........................................................................................................................... 21

STANDARD OF CARE ............................................................................................................. 21

APPENDIX A FIGURE 1 – SITE MAP FIGURE 2 – SURCHARGE CROSS-SECTION – RESTROOM BUILDING BORING LOGS SOILS CLASSIFICATION SYMBOLS & DESCRIPTIVE TERMINOLOGY



GEOTECHNICAL EXPLORATION PROPOSED ROTARY PARK E. 26TH STREET SIOUX FALLS, SOUTH DAKOTA GEOTEK #17-539

INTRODUCTION

Project Information

This report presents the results of the recent geotechnical exploration program for Rotary Park

along the north side of E. 26th Street in Sioux Falls, South Dakota.

Scope of Services

Our work was performed in accordance with the authorization of Chad Kucker with Confluence.

The scope of work as presented in this report is limited to the following:

1. To perform six (6) test borings to gather data on the subsurface conditions at the project site. Of the six (6) test borings, five (5) were performed using a drill rig and one (1) was performed using hand-operated equipment.

2. To perform laboratory tests that include moisture content and dry density. 3. To prepare an engineering report that includes the results of the field and laboratory tests

as well as our earthwork and foundation recommendations for design and construction.

The scope of our work was intended for geotechnical purposes only. This scope of work did not

include determining the presence or extent of environmental contamination at the site or to

characterize the site relative to wetlands status. Also, our scope of work did not include a slope

stability analysis of the site.



SITE & SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS

Site Location & Description

The project site is located along the north side of E. 26th Street (between Interstate 229 and the

Big Sioux River) in Sioux Falls, South Dakota. The current site features include the following:

gravel surfaced areas, a canoe launching area, grass covered areas and numerous trees.

Ground Surface Elevations & Test Boring Locations

The ground surface elevations at the test boring locations were determined by using the concrete

slab of the existing shelter on the east side of the Big Sioux River as a benchmark. An elevation

of 1,395.7 feet was used for the benchmark. Based on the benchmark datum, the ground surface

elevations at the test boring locations varied from 1,391.3 feet at test boring 6 to 1,394.3 feet at

test boring 4. A site map is attached at the conclusion of this report showing the relative location

of the test borings.

Subsurface Conditions

Six (6) test borings were performed at the project site on May 23, 2017. Of the six (6) test

borings, one (1) was performed for the restroom building, one (1) was performed for the shelter

and four (4) were performed for the parking lot and access road. The subsurface conditions

encountered at the test boring locations are illustrated by means of the boring logs included in

Appendix A.

The subsurface profile at the test boring locations consisted of the following layers: topsoil

materials, existing fill materials, fine alluvium soils, mixed alluvium soils, coarse alluvium soils

and highly weathered Sioux Quartzite. The highly weathered Sioux Quartzite was only

encountered at test boring 2. Refusal was encountered at depths of 11.2 feet (elevation 1,382.9

feet) and 10.8 feet (elevation 1,381.2 feet) at test borings 1 and 2. The refusal is likely the Sioux

Quartzite bedrock.

The topsoil materials consisted of lean clay soils. The existing fill materials consisted of lean

clay soils and lean clay with sand soils. The fine alluvium soils consisted of lean clay soils and



lean clay with sand soils. The mixed alluvium soils consisted of sandy lean clay soils and silty

sand soils. The coarse alluvium soils consisted of sand with silt soils and sand soils. The highly

weathered Sioux quartzite consisted of lean clay soils.

The consistency or relative density of the soils is indicated by the standard penetration resistance

(“N”) values as shown on the boring log. A description of the soil consistency or relative density

based on the “N” values can be found on the attached Soil Boring Symbols and Descriptive

Terminology data sheet.

We wish to point out that the subsurface conditions at other times and locations at the site may

differ from those found at our test boring location. If different conditions are encountered during

construction, then it is important that you contact us so that our recommendations can be

reviewed.

Water Levels

Measurements to record the groundwater levels were made at the test boring locations. The time

and level of the groundwater readings are recorded on the boring logs. Groundwater was

measured at depths varying from 2 ½ feet to 4 feet (elevation 1,391.1 feet to 1,388.6 feet) at the

test boring locations.

The seasonal and yearly fluctuations of the groundwater table should be taken into account along

with the water level in the adjacent Big Sioux River.

ENGINEERING REVIEW & RECOMMENDATIONS

Overall Project Design Data

We understand that the project will consist of constructing a new park. The new park will consist

of the following: a restroom building, a shelter, a parking lot and an access road.



Restroom Building

Design Data

The restroom building will be a one-story slab-on-grade structure. We understand that the

finished floor of the restroom building will be at elevation 1,407.4 feet. Based on the finished

floor elevation and ground surface elevation at test boring 1, approximately 13 feet of fill will be

needed to reach the finished floor elevation. We assume that foundation support for the restroom

building will be provided by footings resting below frost depth. Light foundation loads are

expected for the restroom building. We anticipate that the restroom building will not be heated

during the winter months.

Discussion

It is our opinion that a spread footing foundation system can be used for support of the restroom

building after the recommended site preparation has been performed.

Test boring 1 was performed for the restroom building. The subsurface conditions encountered at

test boring 1 consisted of 2 feet of topsoil materials overlying fine alluvium soils, mixed

alluvium soils and coarse alluvium soils.

It is our opinion that the topsoil materials are not suitable for support of the restroom building.

Regarding the underlying fine alluvium soils and mixed alluvium soils, it is our opinion that the

fine alluvium soils and mixed alluvium soils are moderately compressible. The fine alluvium

soils and mixed alluvium soils will likely consolidate under the weight of the fill materials and

footing loads, resulting in settlements. Prior to the construction of the restroom building, we

recommend “preloading” the fine alluvium soils and mixed alluvium soils with a temporary

surcharge that covers the footprint of the restroom building.

Site Preparation

The site preparation for the entire footprint of the restroom building should consist of removing

the topsoil materials in order to expose the fine alluvium soils, mixed alluvium soils or coarse

alluvium soils. Following the removals, we recommend placing and compacting granular



structural fill up to the bottom-of-footing/bottom-of-floor elevation. The final 6 inches of fill

beneath the floor slab could consist of select granular fill. Please refer to Table 1 for a summary

of the anticipated minimum excavation depth to remove the unsuitable soils encountered at test

boring 1. The depth of the excavation will likely vary within the footprint of the restroom

building.

Table 1. Estimated Excavation Depths – Footprint of the Restroom Building

Test Boring Ground Surface Elevation, ft

Anticipated Excavation Depth, ft

Approximate Excavation Elevation, ft

1 1,394.1 2 1,392.1

If groundwater or saturated soils are encountered at the bottom of the excavation, then we

recommend placing a layer (6 inches to 12 inches) of drainage rock at the bottom of the

excavation prior to the placement of the granular structural fill.

Where granular structural fill or drainage rock is needed below the footings, the bottom of the

excavation should be laterally oversized 1 foot beyond the edges of the footings for each vertical

foot of granular structural fill or drainage rock required below the footings (1 horizontal : 1

vertical). Based on our estimations, the bottom of the excavation will likely need to be laterally

oversized approximately 8 feet beyond the edges of the footings.

Surcharge

Once the design elevations have been achieved, a surcharge should be placed over the footprint

of the restroom building prior to the placement of any footings or floor slab. The surcharge fill

should extend up to a level of 6 feet above the finished floor elevation. The top edges of the

surcharge should extend a minimum of 5 feet outside the edge of the restroom building. The

surcharge material could consist of any on-site soils. Figure 2 represents a cross-section of the

surcharge for the restroom building.

Several settlement plates should be installed at the beginning stages of the earthwork activities to

monitor the rate of settlement after the surcharge has been in place. The estimated time frame for

the surcharge is three (3) weeks to four (4) weeks. After the majority of the settlement has

occurred, the surcharge fill can be removed and construction of the restroom building can begin.



Foundation Loads & Settlement

If our recommendations are followed during site preparations, then it is our opinion that the

footings of the restroom building can be sized for a net allowable soil bearing pressure of up to

1,500 pounds per square foot (psf). If the area is surcharged, then total settlement of the restroom

building should be less than 1 inch and differential settlement should be less than ½ inch. Total

settlement of over 1 inch could occur if the area is not surcharged. Unknown soil conditions at

the site that are different from those depicted at test boring 1 could increase the amount of

expected settlement.

Floor Slab

If our recommendations are followed during site preparations, then it is our opinion that the floor

slab of the restroom building can be designed using a soil modulus of subgrade reaction (k value)

of 100 psi/inch.

Frost Protection – Footings

We recommend that all footings be placed at a sufficient depth for frost protection. Footings for

unheated areas and canopies, or footings that are not protected from frost during freezing

temperatures, should be placed such that the bottom of the footing is a minimum of 5 feet below

the finished exterior grade.

Frost Protection – Floor Slab

With our site preparation recommendations, a significant amount of granular structural fill will

be provided beneath the floor slab. In our opinion, this layer of granular structural fill will

provide adequate frost protection for the floor slab.

Coefficient of Friction

It is our opinion that a friction factor of 0.45 can be used between the granular structural fill and

the bottom of the concrete. The friction value is considered an ultimate value. We recommend

applying a theoretical safety factor of at least 2.0.



Shelter

Design Data

The finished grade around the shelter will be near elevation 1,397.0 feet. Based on the finished

grade and ground surface elevation at test boring 2, approximately 5 feet of fill will be needed to

reach the finished grade. We understand that the shelter will be supported by concrete piers.

Discussion

It is our opinion that concrete piers can be used for support of the shelter after the recommended

site preparation has been performed.

Test boring 2 was performed for the shelter. The subsurface conditions encountered at test boring

2 consisted of 2 feet of topsoil materials overlying fine alluvium soils, mixed alluvium soils,

coarse alluvium soils and highly weathered Sioux Quartzite.

It is our opinion that the topsoil materials are not suitable for support of the shelter. Regarding

the underlying fine alluvium soils and mixed alluvium soils, it is our opinion that the fine

alluvium soils and mixed alluvium soils are moderately compressible. The fine alluvium soils

and mixed alluvium soils will likely consolidate under the weight of the fill materials, resulting

in settlements. Prior to the construction of the shelter, we recommend that a time delay be

applied to the area to allow the underlying soils to compress/settle under the weight of the fill

materials.

Site Preparation

The site preparation for the entire footprint of the shelter should consist of removing the topsoil

materials in order to expose the fine alluvium soils, mixed alluvium soils, coarse alluvium soils

or highly weathered Sioux Quartzite. Following the removals, we recommend placing and

compacting general structural fill up to the design elevation. The final 6 inches of fill beneath the

concrete slab could consist of select granular fill.



Time Delay

As previously stated, we recommend that a time delay be applied to the area to allow the

underlying soils to compress/settle under the weight of the fill materials. The site filling should

extend up to a level near the design elevation. We recommend waiting three (3) to four (4) weeks

to allow the majority of the settlement to take place within the area of the shelter. The concrete

piers and concrete slab should not be placed until the majority of the settlement has occurred.

Several settlement plates or rods could be installed at the beginning stages of earthwork activities

to monitor the rate of settlement after the fill has been in place.

Foundation Loads & Settlement

If our recommendations are followed during site preparations, then it is our opinion that the

concrete piers of the shelter can be sized for a net allowable soil bearing pressure of up to 1,500

psf. For bearing purposes, we recommend extending the concrete piers down to a minimum

depth of 7 feet. If a time delay is applied, then total settlement of the shelter should be less than 1

inch and differential settlement should be less than ½ inch. Total settlement of over 1 inch could

occur if a time delay is not used. Unknown soil conditions at the site that are different from those

depicted at test boring 2 could increase the amount of expected settlement.

Frost Protection – Concrete Piers

As stated above, the concrete piers should extend down to a minimum depth of 7 feet. For frost

protection, sonotubes will be needed to a minimum depth of 5 feet.

Frost Protection – Concrete Slab

With our site preparation recommendations, some movement of the concrete slab should be

expected during the winter months. If movement of the concrete slab cannot be tolerated, then

we recommend placing 3 feet to 4 feet of granular structural fill beneath the concrete slab. The

concrete slab should be independent of the concrete piers.



Parking Lot & Access Road

Design Data

Minimal grade changes are expected for the parking lot, while significant filling will be needed

for the access road. Numerous trees will need to be removed for the parking lot. We understand

that the pavement will be asphalt. The vehicle traffic will consist of automobiles and buses.

Discussion

Varying subgrade conditions should be expected for the project. For the parking lot, where

minimal grade changes are expected, we estimate California Bearing Ratio (CBR) values of 0.5

to 1.0, which are considered very low CBR values. In addition, shallow groundwater will likely

cause issues during construction of the parking lot. Conversely, a CBR value of 3.0 to 5.0 could

be expected for the access road where significant filling is needed. With all this said, subgrade

reinforcement will be needed for the parking lot and normal subgrade preparation could be

expected for the access road (similar to the parking lot).

Initial Subgrade Preparation

The initial subgrade preparation for the parking lot and access road should consist of removing

the highly organic portion of the topsoil materials (likely to vary from 6 inches near the canoe

launching area to 18 inches within the trees). Following the removals, the subgrade should be

prepared by cutting or filling to the design elevations.

Subgrade Reinforcement – Parking Lot

For the subgrade reinforcement, it should consist of granular subbase overlying a geotextile

fabric. The granular subbase material should consist of a material detailed in the section entitled:

Material Types & Compaction Levels. Regarding the geotextile fabric, we recommend using

Mirafi HP 370, Propex Geotex 3x3 HF, Huesker Comtrac P 45/45 or approved alternative. The

thickness of the granular subbase is shown in Table 2.



Normal Subgrade Preparation – Access Road

Following the removal of highly organic portion of the topsoil materials, the normal subgrade

preparation should consist of placing and compacting subgrade fill up to the design elevations.

Areas of unstable subgrade may be encountered within the access road. The soils within the

unstable area should be removed, and either moisture-conditioned and recompacted, or replaced

with suitable subgrade fill. If the unstable area will not stabilize using this method, alternative

stabilization methods may be used such as a modified cross-section involving a geotextile fabric

and granular subbase.

We recommend that a time delay be applied to the access road to allow the underlying soils to

compress/settle under the weight of the fill materials. The site filling should extend up to a level

near the design elevation. We recommend waiting three (3) to four (4) weeks to allow the

majority of the settlement to take place. The asphalt and curb/gutter should not be placed until

the majority of the settlement has occurred. Several settlement plates or rods could be installed at

the beginning stages of earthwork activities to monitor the rate of settlement after the fill has

been in place.

Pavement Section Thicknesses

Table 2 shows the recommended pavement section thicknesses based on the subsurface conditions,

subgrade reinforcement and subgrade preparation. The geotextile fabric should consist of a product

discussed on the previous page.

Table 2. Pavement Section Thicknesses – Parking Lot & Access Road

Area Asphalt

Pavement Thickness, in

Aggregate Base Course

Thickness, in

Granular Subbase

Thickness, in

Subgrade Reinforcement

Parking Lot 4 4 12* Geotextile Fabric

Access Road 5 8 - - *May need to be increased based on the condition of the subgrade.

The asphalt pavement should meet the requirements of sections 320 and 321 for Class G. It

should be noted that routine maintenance such as crack filling, localized patching and seal



coating should be expected with all pavements in our recommendations. The sections on the

previous page could be reduced if the owner is willing to assume additional maintenance costs or

potentially shorter pavement life.

Soil Disturbance & Excavation

The on-site soils are susceptible to disturbance and can experience strength loss caused by

construction traffic and/or additional moisture. The on-site soils should also be considered highly

erodible. Precautions will be required during earthwork activities in order to reduce the risk of

soil disturbance.

All excavations within the restroom building and shelter should be performed with an excavator

with a smooth-edged bucket. Low-ground pressure construction equipment (excavator or

bulldozer) will likely be needed for the parking lot. For the access road, conventional scrapers

could be used.

Material Types & Compaction Levels

Granular Structural Fill – The granular structural fill should consist of a pit-run or processed

sand or gravel having a maximum particle size of 3 inches with less than 10 percent by weight

passing the #200 sieve. The granular structural fill should be placed in lifts of up to 1 foot in

thickness..

Drainage Rock – The drainage rock should be crushed, washed and meet the gradation

specifications shown in Table 3.

Table 3. Drainage Rock Gradation Specifications Sieve Size Percent Passing

1-inch 100

½-inch 25 – 60

#8 0 – 5

Select Granular Fill – The select granular fill should consist of a medium to coarse grained,

free-draining sand or rock having a maximum particle size of 1 inch with less than 5 percent by



weight passing the #200 sieve. The select granular fill should be placed in lifts of up to 1 foot in

thickness.

General Structural Fill – The general structural fill should consist of either a granular or clay

material. If a granular material is used, then it should consist of a pit-run or processed sand or

gravel having a maximum particle size of 3 inches. The granular material can be placed in lifts of

up to 1 foot in thickness. If a clay material is selected, then it should consist of a non-organic

clay having a liquid limit less than 45. Scrutiny on the material’s moisture content should be

made prior to the acceptance and use. The clay material should be placed in maximum 6-inch

lifts. Some of the on-site soils could be used as general structural fill. We would like to point out

that the majority of the on-site soils will likely require drying prior to their use. The on-site

topsoil materials should not be used as general structural fill.

Exterior Foundation Wall Backfill for Slab-on-Grade Structures – The exterior foundation

wall backfill for slab-on-grade structures should consist of a similar material as described for the

general structural fill. If granular soils are used in areas that will not have asphalt or concrete

surfacing, then we recommend capping the granular soils with at least 1 foot to 2 feet of clay

soils to minimize infiltration of surface water. The exterior backfill should be placed in lifts of up

to 1 foot in thickness.

Granular Subbase – The granular subbase should consist of crushed quartzite, recycled

concrete or a crushed pit-run material meeting the gradation specifications shown in Table 4.

Table 4. Granular Subbase Gradation Specifications

Sieve Size Percent Passing

4-inch 100

1-inch 40 – 80

#4 10 – 50

#40 5 – 20

#200 0 – 5



Subgrade Fill – The subgrade fill should consist of a similar material as described for the

general structural fill.

Aggregate Base Course Material – We recommend that the aggregate base course materials

meet the requirements of Sections 260 and 882 of the SDDOT Standard Specifications.

Recommended Compaction Levels – The recommended compaction levels listed in Table 5 are

based on a material’s maximum dry density value, as determined by a standard Proctor (ASTM:

D698) test.

Table 5. Recommended Compaction Levels Placement Location Compaction Specifications

Below Footings (Restroom Building) 95%

Below Slabs (Restroom Building & Shelter) 95%

Exterior Foundation Wall Backfill for Slab-on-Grade Structures 95%

Subgrade Fill (Parking Lot & Access Road) 95%

Base Course (Parking Lot & Access Road) 97%

Granular Subbase (Parking Lot & Access Road) 97%*

Non-Structural Areas 90% *Compaction testing may not be practical for the granular subbase due to the large aggregate.

Recommended Moisture Levels – The moisture content of the clay backfill materials, when

used as backfill around the exterior of a foundation should be maintained within a range of plus 1

percent to minus 4 percent of the materials’ optimum moisture content. When the clay backfill

materials are used below a pavement area, or as site grading, the materials’ moisture content

should be maintained within a range of minus 1 percent to minus 4 percent of the materials’

optimum moisture content. The optimum moisture content should be determined using a

standard Proctor (ASTM: D698) test.

The moisture content of the granular backfill materials should be maintained at a level that will

be conducive for vibratory compaction.



Drainage

Proper drainage should be maintained during and after construction. The general site grading

should direct surface run-off waters away from the excavations. Water which accumulates in the

excavations should be removed in a timely manner.

Finished grades around the perimeter of the structures should be sloped such that positive

drainage away from the structures is provided. Also, a system to collect and channel roof run-off

waters away from the structures is suggested.

CONSTRUCTION CONSIDERATIONS

Groundwater & Surface Water

Water may enter the excavations due to subsurface water, precipitation or surface run off. Any

water that accumulates in the bottom of the excavations should be immediately removed and

surface drainage away from the excavations should be provided during construction.

Disturbance of Soils

The soils encountered at the test boring locations are susceptible to disturbance and can

experience strength loss caused by construction traffic and/or additional moisture. Precautions

will be required during earthwork activities in order to reduce the risk of soil disturbance.

Cold Weather Precautions

If site preparation and construction is anticipated during cold weather, we recommend all

foundations, slabs and other improvements that may be affected by frost movements be insulated

from frost penetration during freezing temperatures. If filling is performed during freezing

temperatures, all frozen soils, snow and ice should be removed from the areas to be filled prior to

placing the new fill. The new fill should not be allowed to freeze during transit, placement and

compaction. Concrete should not be placed on frozen subgrades. Frost should not be allowed to

penetrate below the footings. If floor slab subgrades freeze, we recommend the frozen soils be

removed and replaced, or completely thawed, prior to placement of the floor slab. The subgrade



soils will likely require reworking and recompacting due to the loss of density caused by the

freeze/thaw process.

Excavation Sideslopes

The excavations must comply with the requirements of OSHA 29 CFR, Part 1926, Subpart P,

“Excavations and Trenches”. This document states that the excavation safety is the responsibility

of the contractor. Reference to this OSHA requirement should be included in the project

specifications.

Observations & Testing

This report was prepared using a limited amount of information for the project and a number of

assumptions were necessary to help us develop our conclusions and recommendations. It is

recommended that our firm be retained to review the geotechnical aspects of the final design

plans and specifications to check that our recommendations have been properly incorporated into

the design documents.

The recommendations submitted in this report have been made based on the subsurface

conditions encountered at the test boring locations. It is possible that there are subsurface

conditions at the site that are different from those represented by the test borings. As a result, on-

site observation during construction is considered integral to the successful implementation of

the recommendations. We believe that qualified field personnel need to be on-site at the

following times to observe the site conditions and effectiveness of the construction.

Excavation

We recommend that a geotechnical engineer or geotechnical engineering technician working

under the direct supervision of a geotechnical engineer observe all excavations for foundations,

slabs and pavements. These observations are recommended to determine if the exposed soils are

similar to those encountered at the test boring locations, if unsuitable soils have been adequately

removed and if the exposed soils are suitable for support of the proposed construction. These

observations should be performed prior to placement of fill or foundations.



Testing

After the subgrade is observed by a geotechnical engineer/technician and approved, we

recommend a representative number of compaction tests be taken during the placement of the

structural fill and backfill placed below foundations, slabs and pavements, beside foundation

walls and behind retaining walls. The tests should be performed to determine if the required

compaction has been achieved. As a general guideline, we recommend at least one (1) test be

taken for every 2,000 square feet of structural fill placed in building and pavement areas, at least

one (1) test for every 75 feet to 100 feet in trench fill, and for every 2-foot thickness of fill or

backfill placed. The actual number of tests should be left to the discretion of the geotechnical

engineer. Samples of proposed fill and backfill materials should be submitted to our laboratory

for testing to determine their compliance with our recommendations and project specifications.

SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION PROCEDURES

Test Borings

We performed six (6) test borings on May 23, 2017. The standard penetration test (SPT) borings

were performed in accordance with the procedures described in ASTM:D1586. Using this

procedure, a 2-inch O.D. split barrel sampler is driven into the soil by a 140-pound weight falling

30 inches. After an initial set of 6 inches, the number of blows required to drive the sampler an

additional 12 inches is known as the penetration resistance, or “N” value. The “N” value is an

index of the relative density of cohesionless soils and the consistency of cohesive soils. In

addition, thin walled tube samples were obtained according to ASTM:D1587, where indicated by

the appropriate symbol on the boring logs.

The test borings were backfilled with on-site materials and some settlement of these materials

can be expected to occur. Final closure of the holes is the responsibility of the client or property

owner.

The soil samples collected from the test boring locations will be retained in our office for a

period of one (1) month after the date of this report and will then be discarded unless we are

notified otherwise.



Soil Classification

As the samples were obtained in the field, they were visually and manually classified by the crew

chief according to ASTM:D2488. Representative portions of all samples were then sealed and

returned to the laboratory for further examination and for verification of the field classification.

In addition, select samples were then submitted to a program of laboratory tests. Where

laboratory classification tests (sieve analysis and Atterberg limits) have been performed,

classifications according to ASTM:D2487 are possible. Logs of the test borings indicating the

depth and identification of the various strata, the “N” value, the laboratory test data, water level

information and pertinent information regarding the method of maintaining and advancing the

drill holes are also attached in Appendix A. Charts illustrating the soil classification procedures,

the descriptive terminology and the symbols used on the boring logs are also attached in

Appendix A.

Water Level Measurements

Subsurface groundwater levels should be expected to fluctuate seasonally and yearly from the

groundwater readings recorded at the test boring locations. Fluctuations occur due to varying

seasonal and yearly rainfall amounts and snowmelt, as well as other factors. It is possible that the

subsurface groundwater levels during or after construction could be significantly different than

the time the test borings were performed.

Laboratory Tests

Laboratory tests were performed on select samples to aid in determining the index properties of

the soils. The index tests consisted of moisture content and dry density. The laboratory tests were

performed in accordance with the appropriate ASTM procedures. The results of the laboratory

tests are shown on the boring logs opposite the samples upon which the tests were performed or

on the data sheets included in the Appendix.

1

2

3

4

5

27

25

87

HSA

SPT

SPT

SPT

SPT

7

3

3

35

2

5

7

9½

11.2

TOPSOIL

FINEALLUVIUM

MIXEDALLUVIUM

FINEALLUVIUM

COARSEALLUVIUM

LEAN CLAY: very dark brown, moist, (CL)

LEAN CLAY: dark brown, moist, firm, (CL)

SILTY SAND: fine grained, dark brown,waterbearing, very loose, (SM)

LEAN CLAY: a trace of gravel, grayishbrown, wet, soft, a few lenses of sand (CL)

SAND WITH SILT: a little gravel, medium tocoarse grained, brown, waterbearing, verydense, (SP-SM)

Refusal at 11.2 feet.Bottom of borehole at 11.2 feet.

--------

LABORATORY TESTS

DATE TIME SAMPLEDDEPTH

GEOTECHNICAL TEST BORING LOG

11.2------

CASINGDEPTH

CAVE-INDEPTH

5------

WATERLEVEL

BORING NO. 1 (1 of 1)

5-23-17------

11:53 am------

3------

PROJECT Proposed Rotary Park, E. 26th Street, Sioux Falls, SD

NO. WC D PL QULLTYPEN

GE

OTE

CH

NIC

AL

TEST

BO

RIN

G 1

7-53

9.G

PJ

GE

OTE

KEN

G.G

DT

6/1

/17

GEOTEK # 17-539

WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENTSMETHOD3.25" ID Hollow Stem Auger

SURFACE ELEVATION 1394.1 ft

DEPTHin

FEET

COMPLETE 5-23-17 11:53 amSTART 5-23-17

909 E. 50th St. N.Sioux Falls SD 57104605-335-5512 Fax 605-335-0773www.geotekeng.com

GEOLOGICORIGIN

CREW CHIEF Mike Wagner

SAMPLE

GEOTEK ENGINEERING& TESTING SERVICES, INC.

DESCRIPTION OF MATERIALWL

1

2

3

4

5

32

26

82

HSA

SPT

SPT

SPT

SPT

3

3

27

50/0.8'

2

5

7

9½

10.8

TOPSOIL

FINEALLUVIUM

FINEALLUVIUM

COARSEALLUVIUM

SIOUXQUARTZITE


LEAN CLAY: dark brown, moist, soft, (CL)

LEAN CLAY: dark brown, wet, soft, withlenses of sand (CL)

SAND: a trace of gravel, fine to mediumgrained, brown, waterbearing, dense, (SP)

HIGHLY WEATHERED QUARTZITE -LEAN CLAY: very light brown and light pink,moist, a few pieces of quartzite (CL)

Refusal at 10.8 feet.Bottom of borehole at 10.8 feet.

--------

LABORATORY TESTS



10.8------

CASINGDEPTH

CAVE-INDEPTH

6------

WATERLEVEL


5-23-17------

1:14 pm------

3------



GE

OTE

CH

NIC

AL

TEST

BO

RIN

G 1

7-53

9.G

PJ

GE

OTE

KEN

G.G

DT

6/1

/17

GEOTEK # 17-539



DEPTHin

FEET

COMPLETE 5-23-17 1:14 pmSTART 5-23-17


GEOLOGICORIGIN


SAMPLE



1

2

3 30 86

SPT

SPT

SPT

8

3

2

1

2

4½

6

FILL

MIXEDALLUVIUM

MIXEDALLUVIUM

FINEALLUVIUM

FILL, MOSTLY LEAN CLAY WITH SAND:with gravel, brown, moist

SANDY LEAN CLAY: dark brown, moist,firm, (CL)

SILTY SAND: fine grained, dark brown, wet,very loose, (SM)

LEAN CLAY: dark grayish brown, wet, soft,with lenses of sand (CL)

Bottom of borehole at 6 feet.

--------

LABORATORY TESTS



6------

CASINGDEPTH

CAVE-INDEPTH

4.5------

WATERLEVEL


5-23-17------

1:17 pm------

4------



GE

OTE

CH

NIC

AL

TEST

BO

RIN

G 1

7-53

9.G

PJ

GE

OTE

KEN

G.G

DT

6/1

/17

GEOTEK # 17-539



DEPTHin

FEET



GEOLOGICORIGIN


SAMPLE



1

2

3

13 113SPT

SPT

SPT

7

5

6

2

6

FILL

COARSEALLUVIUM

FILL, MOSTLY LEAN CLAY: with gravel,brown, moist

SAND: medium to coarse grained, darkbrown, moist, loose, (SP)


--------

LABORATORY TESTS



6------

CASINGDEPTH

CAVE-INDEPTH

4------

WATERLEVEL


5-23-17------

9:13 am------

4------



GE

OTE

CH

NIC

AL

TEST

BO

RIN

G 1

7-53

9.G

PJ

GE

OTE

KEN

G.G

DT

6/1

/17

GEOTEK # 17-539



DEPTHin

FEET

COMPLETE 5-23-17 9:13 amSTART 5-23-17


GEOLOGICORIGIN


SAMPLE



1

2

3

11

16

26

SPT

SPT

SPT

19

2

2

2

4½

6

FILL

MIXEDALLUVIUM

FINEALLUVIUM

FILL, MOSTLY LEAN CLAY: a little gravel,brown, moist

SANDY LEAN CLAY: dark brown, wet, soft,(CL)

LEAN CLAY WITH SAND: grayish brown,soft, (CL)


--------

LABORATORY TESTS



6------

CASINGDEPTH

CAVE-INDEPTH

4.5------

WATERLEVEL


5-23-17------

1:19 pm------

4------



GE

OTE

CH

NIC

AL

TEST

BO

RIN

G 1

7-53

9.G

PJ

GE

OTE

KEN

G.G

DT

6/1

/17

GEOTEK # 17-539



DEPTHin

FEET



GEOLOGICORIGIN


SAMPLE



1

2

3

29

30

HA

HA

HA

2

5

TOPSOIL

FINEALLUVIUM


LEAN CLAY WITH SAND: dark grayishbrown, wet, (CL)


--------

LABORATORY TESTS



5------

CASINGDEPTH

CAVE-INDEPTH

5------

WATERLEVEL


5-23-17------

1:21 pm------

2.5------



GE

OTE

CH

NIC

AL

TEST

BO

RIN

G 1

7-53

9.G

PJ

GE

OTE

KEN

G.G

DT

6/1

/17

GEOTEK # 17-539

WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENTSMETHOD4" Hand Auger


DEPTHin

FEET



GEOLOGICORIGIN


SAMPLE



SILTY GRAVELS, GRAVEL - SAND -SILT MIXTURES

ORGANIC CLAYS OF MEDIUM TO HIGHPLASTICITY, ORGANIC SILTS

PEAT, HUMUS, SWAMP SOILS WITHHIGH ORGANIC CONTENTS

LETTERGRAPHSYMBOLSMAJOR DIVISIONS

COARSEGRAINED

SOILS

TYPICALDESCRIPTIONS

GRAVELAND

GRAVELLYSOILS POORLY-GRADED GRAVELS, GRAVEL

- SAND MIXTURES, LITTLE OR NOFINES

FINEGRAINED

SOILS

CLEANGRAVELS

GRAVELS WITHFINES

CLEAN SANDS

(LITTLE OR NO FINES)

SANDS WITHFINES

LIQUID LIMITLESS THAN 50

LIQUID LIMITGREATER THAN 50

HIGHLY ORGANIC SOILS

WELL-GRADED GRAVELS, GRAVEL -SAND MIXTURES, LITTLE OR NO FINES

SILTSAND

CLAYS

CLAYEY GRAVELS, GRAVEL - SAND -CLAY MIXTURES

WELL-GRADED SANDS, GRAVELLYSANDS, LITTLE OR NO FINES

POORLY-GRADED SANDS, GRAVELLYSAND, LITTLE OR NO FINES

SILTY SANDS, SAND - SILT MIXTURES

CLAYEY SANDS, SAND - CLAYMIXTURES

INORGANIC SILTS AND VERY FINESANDS, ROCK FLOUR, SILTY ORCLAYEY FINE SANDS OR CLAYEYSILTS WITH SLIGHT PLASTICITY

INORGANIC CLAYS OF LOW TOMEDIUM PLASTICITY, GRAVELLYCLAYS, SANDY CLAYS, SILTY CLAYS,LEAN CLAYS

ORGANIC SILTS AND ORGANIC SILTYCLAYS OF LOW PLASTICITY

SILTSAND

CLAYS

INORGANIC CLAYS OF HIGHPLASTICITY

SANDAND

SANDYSOILS

MORE THAN 50%OF MATERIAL IS

LARGER THAN NO.200 SIEVE SIZE

MORE THAN 50%OF MATERIAL ISSMALLER THANNO. 200 SIEVE

SIZE

MORE THAN 50%OF COARSEFRACTION

PASSING ON NO. 4SIEVE

MORE THAN 50%OF COARSEFRACTION

RETAINED ON NO.4 SIEVE

SOIL CLASSIFICATION CHART

(APPRECIABLE AMOUNTOF FINES)

(APPRECIABLE AMOUNTOF FINES)

(LITTLE OR NO FINES)

INORGANIC SILTS, MICACEOUS ORDIATOMACEOUS FINE SAND OR SILTYSOILS

NOTE: DUAL SYMBOLS ARE USED TO INDICATE BORDERLINE SOIL CLASSIFICATIONS

GW

GP

GM

GC

SW

SP

SM

SC

ML

CL

OL

MH

CH

OH

PT

BORING LOG SYMBOLS AND DESCRIPTIVE TERMINOLOGY


SYMBOLS FOR DRILLING AND SAMPLING

Symbol Definition Bag Bag sample CS Continuous split-spoon sampling DM Drilling mud FA Flight auger; number indicates outside diameter in inches HA Hand auger; number indicates outside diameter in inches HSA Hollow stem auger; number indicates inside diameter in inches LS Liner sample; number indicates outside diameter of liner sample N Standard penetration resistance (N-value) in blows per foot NMR No water level measurement recorded, primarily due to presence of drilling fluid

NSR No sample retrieved; classification is based on action of drilling equipment and/or material noted in drilling fluid or on sampling bit

SH Shelby tube sample; 3-inch outside diameter SPT Standard penetration test (N-value) using standard split-spoon sampler SS Split-spoon sample; 2-inch outside diameter unless otherwise noted WL Water level directly measured in boring ▼ Water level symbol

SYMBOLS FOR LABORATORY TESTS

Symbol Definition WC Water content, percent of dry weight; ASTM:D2216 D Dry density, pounds per cubic foot LL Liquid limit; ASTM:D4318 PL Plastic limit; ASTM:D4318 QU Unconfined compressive strength, pounds per square foot; ASTM:D2166

DENSITY/CONSISTENCY TERMINOLOGY

Density Consistency Term N-Value Term Very Loose 0-4 Soft Loose 5-8 Firm Medium Dense 9-15 Stiff Dense 16-30 Very Stiff Very Dense Over 30 Hard

DESCRIPTIVE TERMINOLOGY

Term Definition Dry Absence of moisture, powdery Frozen Frozen soil Moist Damp, below saturation Waterbearing Pervious soil below water Wet Saturated, above liquid limit Lamination Up to ½” thick stratum Layer ½” to 6” thick stratum Lens ½” to 6” discontinuous stratum

PARTICLE SIZES

Term Particle Size Boulder Over 12” Cobble 3” – 12” Gravel #4 – 3” Coarse Sand #10 – #4 Medium Sand #40 – #10 Fine Sand #200 – #40 Silt and Clay passes #200 sieve

GRAVEL PERCENTAGES

Term Range A trace of gravel 2-4% A little gravel 5-15% With gravel 16-50%


APPENDIX: “Report of Foundation Investigation” (for Pedestrian Bridge over Big Sioux River)

PB1

PB2

PB4

PB5

PB6

PB3

Silt-SandDark Brown

C BridgeL

Silt-SandDark Brown

LL L L

L

P7

P8

P8

P9 P10

P11

P10PB3PB4

P12

P12

Sand and Gravel

499+00 500+00 501+00 502+00

Pipestone

Sioux Quartzite

499+00

500+00

501+00 502+00

TR

PR14466

Plotted

Fro

m -

PROJECT SHEET

NO.

TOTAL

SHEETS

STATE

OF

S.D.

DESIGNED BY DRAWN BY CHECKED BY APPROVED

BRIDGE ENGINEER

Plot

Scale - 1:20

1Plot

Na

me -

...\05J

D

Subsurface

Profile.dgn

File -

Plotting Date: 05/30/2017

JWHK

GROUND WATER ELEVATIONS

LEGEND

Core Test

Water

CavedZoneSample

1400

1390

1380

1370

1360

1350

P 1385(05) MINNEHAHA COUNTY PCN 05JD

ROTARY-NORLIN PARK PEDESTRIAN BRIDGE

OVER BIG SIOUX RIVER

1400

1390

1380

1370

1360

1350

PB1PB2PB6

continuous flight auger.

inch diameter 21All auger holes are drilled with a 4

nominal diameter samples.

inch 87conducted with NQ core barrels to obtain 1

hollow stem auger to bedrock. Core tests are

inch diameter 85Core test holes are drilled with a 6

distance.

It may vary several feet vertically in a short horizontal

also be present. The surface of the quartzite is not flat.

conglomerate. Layers of poorly cemented sands may

with thin red to purple pipestone shales and coarse

sandstone. It is jointed, bedded, and cross-bedded

Sioux Quartzite is pink to red, hard silica cemented

PB1

as of SEPTEMBER 2016

1387.4

PB2 1388.0

PB3 1389.0

PB4 1388.8

(DRY) 1388.3

PB5 1389.3

PB6

Auger Test

SEC. 22 - T101N - R49W

N

CC C C

C

Abut. No. 1 Abut. No. 5Bent. No. 4Bent. No. 3Bent. No. 2

P7P9PB5

P11

1387.9

1387.7

1387.7

P10 1388.4

P11 1388.5

P12 1388.3

P7

P8

P9

as of APRIL 2017

Clay-SiltDark Brown

available for review at the Central Office in Pierre.

boring logs, core samples, and laboratory test results

The Geotechnical Engineering Activity has all of the

FL

OW

BIG SIO

UX RIV

ER

1’ min.

1’ min.

Spread Footing

Dowel Location

6’ max.


APPENDIX: WETLAND DELINATION REPORT

Wetland Delineation Report

26th Street and Southeastern Avenue Project SDDOT and City of Sioux Falls

Sioux Falls, South Dakota

May 2016

SDDOT and City of Sioux Falls | 26th Street and Southeastern Avenue Project, Sioux Falls, South Dakota

i

Table of Contents

I. Introduction ......................................................................................................................... 1

II. Methods .............................................................................................................................. 1

III. Delineation Overview .......................................................................................................... 2

Field Delineations ................................................................................................................... 3

Wetland Discussions ........................................................................................................... 3

OW Discussions .................................................................................................................. 3

HGM Modeling ....................................................................................................................... 4

IV. Conclusions ....................................................................................................................... 5

V. References ......................................................................................................................... 6

List of Tables

Table 1. Wetland Summary ........................................................................................................ 2

Table 2. OW Summary ............................................................................................................... 2

Table 3. Summary of Functional Capacity Index of each Wetland Assessment Area ................. 5

List of Figures

Figure 1 Project Location ........................................................................................................... 7

Figure 2 Wetland Mapping ......................................................................................................... 8

List of Appendices

Appendix A .............................................................. Routine Wetland Determination Data Forms

Appendix B ....................................................................................................... Site Photographs

Appendix C .............................................................................................. HGM Summary Sheets


1

I. Introduction The South Dakota Department of Transportation (SDDOT) and the City of Sioux Falls (the City),

jointly (the Clients), are implementing the 26th Street and Southeastern Avenue Project (the

Project). The Project is located at the intersection of 26th Street and Southeastern Avenue in

Sections 22 and 26 of Township 101 North, Range 49 West, within the City of Sioux Falls,

South Dakota (see Figure 1, Project Location). The Project is being implemented to reduce

traffic congestion and enhance safety at this intersection where currently, the Burlington

Northern Santa Fe (BNSF) railroad tracks cross 26th Street at grade immediately adjacent to this

intersection; creating large traffic queues during train crossings. The Project will consist of

raising the grades of a portion of both 26th Street and Southeastern Avenue above the BNSF

railroad tracks and constructing a grade separation so train traffic will not inhibit vehicle travel.

The Project will also consist of expanding the intersection dimensions to allow for more turning

lanes and sidewalks. The Clients have hired HDR to complete a wetland delineation and

Hydrogeomorphic (HGM) wetland classification and modeling of wetlands for the Project.

Jessica Brisbois and Daryn Dockter of HDR conducted wetland delineations and HGM

Assessments within the Project Area on September 26th and 27th, 2015. Subsequently, after the

Project Area was expanded in one location, Trevor Wegner and Daryn Dockter of HDR

completed wetland delineations and HGM Assessments to include the growing season on May

6th, 2016. These delineations were performed to identify wetlands and Other Waters of the U.S.

(OW) within the Project Area.

II. Methods A field review was conducted to determine the wetland and OW boundaries within the Project

Area. HDR surveyed potential wetland areas for the three required wetland parameters: hydric

soils, surface or subsurface hydrology, and hydrophytic vegetation. If all three indicators were

present during the growing season, the area was identified as wetland.

Paired upland and wetland sampling points were evaluated and recorded in the field using a

global positioning system (GPS) technology at representative locations to define the boundary

of each wetland. At each sampling point, a soil pit was dug for observation of soil and hydrologic

characteristics. Hydric soil characteristics were identified using methods described in the 1987

Corps of Engineers Wetlands Delineation Manual (USACE, 1987) and the Regional Supplement

to the Corps of Engineers Wetland Delineation Manual: Midwest Region (USACE, 2010).

Hydrology was described based on primary and secondary indicators (USACE, 2010). The

vegetation was analyzed for species dominance. The wetland indicator status of plants was

determined using The National Wetland Plant List: 2016 Wetland Ratings (Lichvar, et. al.,

2016). A wetland determination data form was completed for each sample point. These forms

are presented in Appendix A. Lastly, photographic documentation was completed and is

included in Appendix B.

Using Geographic Information Systems (GIS), an accurate delineation map was created from

the GPS data providing a record of the wetland and OW boundaries within the Project Area.


2

Wetlands and OWs were labeled from west to east and north to south throughout the Project

Area.

III. Delineation Overview Three wetlands totaling 0.98 acres and three OW were delineated within the Project Area and

are discussed in detail below. Table 1 displays a summary of the delineated wetlands and Table

2 shows a summary of the OW delineated within the Project Area. Eight wetland determination

data sheets were prepared for the Project (see Appendix A). Figures 2 shows the delineated

wetlands and OW boundaries. Photographs are presented in Appendix B.

Table 1.

Wetland Summary

Wetland Number

Cowardin Classification*

Latitude Longitude Area of Wetland within Project Area (acres)

01a PEMA 43.53017 -96.69920 0.30

01b PEMA 43.52973 -96.69919 0.24

01c PEMC 43.53008 -96.69850 0.04

01d PEMC 43.52956 -96.69846 0.02

02 PEMA 43.53045 -96.69549 0.27

03 PFOA 43.52768 -96.69673 0.11

Total 0.98

*Note: Cowardin Classifications were determined using Classification of Wetlands and Deepwater Habitats of the United States, 1979 as a reference guide (Cowardin, 1979).

**Note: Definition of Terms:

• PEMA: Palustrine Emergent Temporarily Flooded

• PEMC: Palustrine Emergent Seasonally Flooded

• PFOA: Palustine Forested Temporarily Flooded

Table 2.

OW Summary

OW Number

Type Latitude Longitude

Linear Feet of Other Water

within Project Area

01 Ephemeral

Channel 43.53026 -96.6985 180

02 Perennial Channel

43.52905 -96.69667 1810

03a Intermittent

Channel 43.53126 -96.69466 190

03b Intermittent

Channel 43.53144 -96.69547 90

03c Intermittent

Channel 43.53082 -96.69640 530

Total 2,800


3

Field Delineations The following sections describe the wetland areas and OW that were field delineated within the Project Area. Wetland and OW areas listed below are identified by a numeric system. Some wetland complexes contain multiple segments, connected either hydrologically by culverts, abutting OW, or extend outside the Project Area in one location and then re-enter it in another. Some wetland complexes can also be connected hydrologically, but be separated by vegetation types such as emergent wetlands transitioning into forested wetlands. The Cowardin classification system found in the Classification of Wetlands and Deepwater Habitats of the United States, 1979 was used to determine these different wetland vegetative types (Cowardin et al., 1979). To identify these wetland complexes as one wetland, but containing multiple different segments, an alphabetical system was added to their number identifier i.e. 1a, 1b, 1c, etc. If a wetland complex contained separate vegetative segments, additional sampling points were included to document the different wetland types within each complex. When wetland complexes extend for long distances, additional supporting sampling points were included to reinforce wetland boundaries.

Wetland Discussions

Wetland 01a, 01b, 01c, and 01d

Wetland 01a is a temporarily flooded ditch wetland, north of 26th Street and paralleling the northbound lane of I-229. Wetland 01a transfers water to temporarily flooded, depressional Wetland 01b to the east during overflow of the ditch and through a small, low trough area along the interstate right of way fence line. Wetland 01a also drains north to OW 01 and then to the Big Sioux River.

Wetland 01c and 01d is a seasonally flooded, emergent, drainage wetland located north of 26th Street and west of the Big Sioux River (see Figure 2). Wetland 01c and 01d is fed hydrologically from the south via two culverts likely draining primarily road runoff from 26th Street. Water then flows north into OW 01 and onward into the Big Sioux River. The wetland area is separated into Wetland 01c and 01d by a dirt access road with a culvert running underneath it.

Wetland 02

Wetland 02 is a temporarily flooded, emergent, linear wetland located north of 26th Street and east of the Big Sioux River (see Figure 2). Wetland 02 is between a parking lot area and the BNSF railroad tracks. It appears that Wetland 02 receives water from a culvert on its southern edge and drains north where it pools in a linear depression before continuing north to OW 03c via a culvert under an access driveway.

Wetland 03

Wetland 03 is a temporarily flooded, forested, side channel wetland located south of 26th Street and west of the Big Sioux River (see Figure 2). Wetland 03 is a floodplain wetland and is fed by the Big Sioux River during high water events. This linear depression is separated from the Big Sioux River by areas of upland leaving any accumulated water to sit stagnant rather than draining back into the river.

OW Discussions

OW 01

OW 01 is an ephemeral drainage east of I-229 (see Figure 2). OW 01 receives water from Wetlands 01a and 01c and flows north to the OW 02; the Big Sioux River. It appears this wetland becomes an OW due to a slight slope change; increasing the flow velocity of surface


4

water within this flow pattern. OW 01 contained surface water at the time of delineation, but appears to only flow following precipitation events that causes surface water transfer to it from the abutting ditch and drainage wetlands to the south. OW 01 also contained a defined bed and bank and an Ordinary High Water Mark (OHWM). Physical characteristics of the OHWM of OW 01 included a natural line impressed on the bank, washed away leaf litter, and destruction of terrestrial vegetation in its bed.

OW 02

OW 02 is a large perennial waterway known as the Big Sioux River that flows from south to north at this location. OW 02 is crossed by 26th Street within the Project Area. OW 02 receives water inflow from countless tributaries including OW 01 entering along OW 02’s northwest side near I-229, and OW 03 entering along OW 02’s east side within the Project Area (see Figure 2). OW 02 contained an OHWM, a defined bed and bank, and was actively sorting sediment at the time of delineation.

OW 03a, 03b, and 03c

OW 03a is an intermittent stream north of 26th Street and east of Southeastern Avenue (see Figure 2). OW 03a receives water from east of the Project Area and flows west under Southeastern Avenue via a culvert to OW 03b. OW 03b is an intermittent scour hole between the west side of Southeastern Avenue and a railroad track. OW 03b flows west to OW 03c via a culvert under the railroad track to OW 03c. OW 03c is a rip rap laden intermittent stream winding westerly through a park area and flowing into OW 02; the Big Sioux River. OW 03 contained an OHWM, a defined bed and bank, and was actively sorting sediment at the time of delineation.

HGM Modeling

The delineated wetlands were assessed using the riverine hydrogeomorphic (HGM) wetland functional assessment model (Gilbert et. al 2006; NRCS 2000). The HGM assessments provide a numeric score known as the functional capacity index (FCI) for various wetland functions, thereby avoiding ambiguity involved in subjective ratings. The maximum FCI is 1 for each wetland function; therefore, the maximum FCI for riverine depression and riverine fringe wetlands is equal to the number of functions they provide: 9 and 8 respectively. Functional capacity units (FCU) are the currency used for wetland credits and can be determined by multiplying FCI by acres.

Wetland assessment areas (WAA) were established within the Study Area to account for variation in site specific criteria such as wetland type, hydrologic regime, vegetation structure, topography, soils, or disturbance history. The delineated wetlands were grouped into WAA to reduce redundancy of modeling multiple wetlands with similar conditions. Four WAA were defined and are described below. Table 3 includes a summary of the wetlands associated with each WAA and the functional capacity index (FCI) of each WAA. Appendix C contains the HGM model summary calculation sheets.

WAA 1: WAA 1 consists of a road ditch wetland adjacent to Interstate 229 that feeds a riverine wetland depression and connects to a drainage ditch wetland (Wetland 01c). The riverine fringe model was used since the wetland conveys surface water runoff through a constructed, linear road ditch with unidirectional flow and no closed contours.


5

WAA 2: WAA 2 consists of a riverine wetland depression that receives surface water input from an adjacent road ditch wetland (Wetland 01a). The riverine depression model was used since the wetland depression is adjacent to a drainage and within its floodplain.

WAA 3: WAA 3 consists of drainage ditch wetlands that convey surface water runoff. The riverine fringe model was used since the wetland areas formed as a result of directing a former stream or linear wetland through a ditch containing unidirectional flow and no closed contours.

WAA 4: WAA 4 consists of a side channel wetland of the Big Sioux River. The riverine depression model was used since the wetland receives and contains overbank flow from the Big Sioux River during high flow events. Once river water height decreases, water is stored within closed contours of the wetland depression.

Table 3.

Summary of Functional Capacity Index of each Wetland Assessment Area

Wetland Assessment Area

Wetlands Wetland Type* Functional Capacity Index

WAA 1 01a* Riverine fringe 2.16

WAA 2 01b* Riverine depression 3.49

WAA 3 01c, 01d, 02* Riverine fringe 2.29

WAA 4 03* Riverine depression 6.59

*Reference wetland for WAA used for HGM model analysis.

IV. Conclusions Based on the site visit, the wetlands and OW areas within the Project Area have been delineated. The Clients will work with the USACE to obtain appropriate permits for any temporary and/or permanent impacts. Unavoidable permanent impacts to wetlands will be mitigated according to regulatory requirements consistent with practices agreed to by USACE, FHWA, SDDOT and the City. These options may include utilizing wetland banking, or potentially onsite or offsite mitigation, as appropriate.


6

V. References Cowardin, L.M., V. Carter, F.C. Golet, and E.T. LaRoe. 1979. Classification of Wetlands and

Deepwater Habitats of the United States. United States Department of Interior, Fish and Wildlife Service. FWS/OBS-79/31. 103 p.

Gilbert MC, Whited PM, Clairain EJ, Jr, Smith RD. 2006. A regional guidebook for applying the

hydrogeomorphic approach to assessing wetland functions of prairie potholes. ERD/EL TR-06-5.

Lichvar, R.W., D.L. Banks, W.N. Kirchner, and N.C. Melvin. 2016. The National Wetland Plant

List: 2016 wetland ratings. Phytoneuron 2016-30: 1-17. Published 28 April 2016, ISSN 2153 733X. Available on line at: http://wetland_plants.usace.army.mil/

NRCS. 2000. Interim Hydrogeomorphic Functional Assessment Model for Low-Gradient, Fine

Substrate Riverine Wetlands with Defined Channels and Intermittent (Seasonal) Flow Regimes in Eastern South Dakota (Version 1.1). Natural Resources Conservation Services Wetlands/Ecological Sciences. Rapid City, SD. 43 P.

U.S. Army Corps of Engineers. 1987. Corps of Engineers Wetlands Delineation Manual.

Technical Report Y-87-1, U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Waterways Experiment Station, Vicksburg, MS, 100 pp. and appendices.

U.S. Army Corps of Engineers. 2010. Regional Supplement to the Corps of Engineers Wetland

Delineation Manual: Midwest Region (Version 2.0). ERDC/EL TR-10-1. Vicksburg, MS: U.S. Army Engineer Research and Development Center.

U.S. Department of Agriculture, NRCS. 2006. Field Indicators of Hydric Soils in the United

States – Guide for Identifying and Delineating Hydric Soils, Version 6.0. G.W. Hurt, P.M. Whited, and R.F. Pringle (eds.). USDA, NRCS in cooperation with the National Technical Committee for Hydric Soil, Fort Worth, TX.

U.S. Department of Agriculture, NRCS. Web Soil Survey for Minnehaha County, South Dakota.

http://websoilsurvey.nrcs.usda.gov/app/

PATH: H:\GIS\2012_PROJECTS\SDDOT\179168_26THST_EXIT5\GIS\MAP_DOCS\WETLAND_DELINEATION\26TH_ST_DELIN_REPORT_FIG1_PROJECT_LOCATION.MXD - USER: TWEGNER - DATE: 3/11/2016

PROJECT LOCATION

FIGURE 1

26TH STREET AND SOUTHEASTERN AVENUE PROJECT

WETLAND DELINEATION REPORT

DATA SOURCE: (Source Name)

Project Location

B i g S i o u xR i v e r

B i g S i o u x

R i v e r

Bi g S i o u x

Ri v e r

MinnehahaCounty

Brandon

26th St

Southeastern Ave

§̈¦229

§̈¦29

§̈¦90

Harrisburg

SiouxFalls

Tea

UV38 Alt

UV17

UV264

UV11

UV38

UV115

UV42

SouthDakota

Iowa

LincolnCounty

LyonCounty

LEGEND

Major Roads

Interstate

NHD Area

Incorporated Place

County

0 2Miles

O

SO

UTH

EA

STE

RN

AVE

BNSF R

AILRO

AD C

LEV

ELA

ND

AVE

Sec. 27T 101NR 49W

Sec. 22T 101NR 49W

Sec. 23T 101NR 49W

Sec. 26T 101NR 49W

§̈¦229

Big Sioux River

E BRAGSTAD DR

E 26TH ST

S S

CE

NIC

WAY

E SCENIC CT

E PIONEER TRL

E RIVER RIDGE PL

S RO

CK

CR

EEK D

R

E KLONDIKE TRL

S CAMEO WAY

Photo 11

Photo 14

Photo 10

Photo 15

Photo 09

Photo 21

Photo 18

Photo 13Photo 12

Photo 17

Photo 05

Photo 08

Photo 06

Photo 01

Photo 02

Photo 07Photo 16

Photo 19

Photo 20

Photo 03

Photo 04

03 WET

02 WET

01c WET

01b WET

03 UPL

02 UPL

01c UPL

01b UPL

OW 03b90 ft.

OW 03c530 ft.

OW 021810 ft.

OW 03a190 ft.

OW 01180 ft.

Wetland 030.11 ac.

Wetland 020.27 ac.

Wetland 01c0.04 ac.

Wetland 01d0.02 ac.

Wetland 01a0.30 ac.

Wetland 01b0.24 ac.

P E M AP E M AR 2 U B GR 2 U B G

PATH: H:\GIS\2012_PROJECTS\SDDOT\179168_26THST_EXIT5\GIS\MAP_DOCS\WETLAND_DELINEATION\26TH_ST_DELIN_REPORT_FIG2_WETLAND_MAPPING.MXD - USER: TWEGNER - DATE: 5/25/2016

Project Location

§̈¦29

§̈¦229

§̈¦90Brandon

SiouxFalls

LEGEND

Project Area_̂ Sampling PointsE Culvert

Delineated WetlandOther WaterWetlandNHDNWIRailroadsStreetsInterstatePLSS Sections

FIGURE 2

WETLAND DELINEATION REPORT26TH STREET AND

SOUTHEASTERN AVENUE PROJECT

WETLAND MAPPING

0 200 400FEET

Appendix A

Routine Wetland Determination Forms

Project/Site: 26th St. and Southeastern Ave. Project

Applicant/Owner: SDDOT & City of Sioux Falls Sampling Point: 01b UPL

City/County: Minnehaha County Sampling Date: 5/6/2016

Investigators: Daryn Dockter 101N 49WSection, Township, Range 22

SUMMARY OF FINDINGS - Attach a site map showing sampling point locations, transects, important features, etc.

Remarks:

The sample point is located on an upland hillslope between a temporarily flooded ditch wetland area to the west and a depressional wetland area to the east. Overflow water from the ditch crosses the upland area but drains to the depressional wetland area to the east.

Trevor Wegner

State: SD

Slope(%): 1% Long: -96.69963Lat: 43.52969 Datum: NAD 1983

Soil Map Unit Name: Bon loam, 0 to 2 percent slopes NWI Classification: NA

Are climatic / hydrologic conditions on the site typical for this time of year?

Are Vegetation

Are Vegetation

Soil

Soil

Hydrology

Hydrology

Are "Normal Circumstances" present?significantly disturbed?

naturally problematic?

Hydrophytic Vegetation Present?

Hydric Soil Present?

Wetland Hydrology Present?

(If No, explain in Remarks)

Morphological Adaptations (Provide supporting data in Remarks or on a separate sheet)

Problematic Hydrophytic Vegetation (Explain)

Hydrophytic

Vegetation Present?

Dominance Test > 50%

Prevalence Index ≤ 3.0

Remarks: (Include photo numbers here or on a separate sheet.)Hydrophytic vegetation was met with the Prevalence Index.

Use scientific names of plants.VEGETATION

Is the Sampled Area

within a Wetland?

Hydrophytic Vegetation Indicators:

Landform (hillslope, terrace, etc.): Hillslope Local Relief (concave, convex, none): Convex

Yes X No

,

,

,

,

,

,

Yes X No

(If needed, explain any answers in Remarks.)

Yes X No

Yes No X

Yes No X

Yes No X

WETLAND DETERMINATION DATA FORM - Midwest Region

Yes X No

X

Indicators of hydric soil and wetland hydrology must be present, unless disturbed or problematic.

Indicator

Status

Absolute

% Cover

Dominant

Species

S T R

2

4

50.0%

Number of Dominant Species That Are OBL, FACW, or FAC:

Total Number of Dominant Species Across all Strata:

Percent of Dominant Species That Are OBL, FACW, or FAC:

(B)

(A)

(A/B)

OBL species

FACW species

UPL species

FACU species

FAC species

x 5 =

x 4 =

x 3 =

x 2 =

x 1 = 0

120

75

60

25

105 280(A) (B)

Prevalence Index = B/A= 2.67

Dominance Test Worksheet:

Prevalence Index Worksheet:

Total % Cover of:

Column Totals:

Multiply by:

0

60

25

15

5

Rapid Test for Hydrophytic Vegetation

Vine Stratum

Shrub Stratum

Herb Stratum

Tree Stratum

(Plot size: 30 Ft )25 Y FACRhamnus cathartica

25 =Total Cover

(Plot size: 6 Ft )60 Y FACWPhalaris arundinacea

15 Y FACUSolidago canadensis

75 =Total Cover

(Plot size: 30 Ft )5 Y UPLUlmus pumila

5 =Total Cover

US Army Corps of Engineers Midwest Region – Version 2

Type:

Depth (inches):

Indicators for Problematic Hydric Soils:

Remarks:

A depleted matrix with redox starts to appear at 10 inches below the surface, but it begins too low and does not have a high enough percentage to meet indicator F3. Past disturbance evidence was present with the mixture of sandy clay soils starting at 10 inches. This area was likely disturbed during past road construction. Hydric soil criteria was not met.

Hydric Soil Indicators:

Histosol (A1)

Histic Epipedon (A2)

Hydrogen Sulfide (A4)

Stratified Layers (A5)

2 cm Muck (A10)

Depleted Below Dark Surface (A11)

Black Histic (A3)

Thick Dark Surface (A12)

Sandy Mucky Mineral (S1)

Sandy Gleyed Matrix (S4)

Sandy Redox (S5)

Stripped Matrix (S6)

Loamy Gleyed Matrix (F2)

Depleted Matrix (F3)

Redox Dark Surface (F6)

Depleted Dark Surface (F7)

Loamy Mucky Mineral (F1)

Redox Depressions (F8)

5 cm Mucky Peat or Peat (S3)

Coast Prairie Redox (A16)

Iron-Manganese Masses (F12)

Other (Explain in Remarks)

Restrictive Layer (if observed):


Depth (inches):

Depth (inches):

Depth (inches):

Field Observations:

Remarks:

Wetland hydrology criteria was not met.

Primary Indicators (minimum of one is required; check all that apply)

Wetland Hydrology Indicators:

Secondary Indicators (minimum of two required)

Surface Water (A1)

High Water Table (A2)

Saturation (A3)

Water Marks (B1)

Sediment Deposits (B2)

Iron Deposits (B5)

Inundation Visible on Aerial Imagery (B7)

Water-Stained Leaves (B9)

Aquatic Fauna (B13)

True Aquatic Plants (B14)

Hydrogen Sulfide Odor (C1)

Oxidized Rhizospheres along Living Roots (C3)

Presence of Reduced Iron (C4)

Recent Iron Reduction in Plowed Soils (C6)


Surface Soil Cracks (B6)

Drainage Patterns (B10)

Dry-Season Water Table (C2)

Crayfish Burrows (C8)

Saturation Visible on Aerial Imag.(C9)

Geomorphic Position (D2)

FAC-Neutral Test (D5)

Drift Deposits (B3)

Surface Water Present?

Water Table Present?

Saturation Present?

Sparsely Vegetated Concave Surf. (B8)

Thin Muck Surface (C7)

Gauge or Well Data (D9)

Algal Mat or Crust (B4)

Type: C=Concentration, D=Depletion, RM=Reduced Martix, CS=Covered or Coated Sand Grains. Location: PL=Pore Lining, M=Matrix.21

Color (moist) TextureDepth

(inches) Color (moist) Type RemarksLoc

Matrix Redox Features

% %

SOIL

Profile Description: (Describe to the depth needed to document the indicator or confirm the absence of Indicators.)

21

3

XYes No

HYDROLOGY

Wetland Hydrology Present? XYes No

Yes No X

Yes No X

Yes No X

Describe Recorded Data (stream gauge, monitoring well, aerial photos, previous inspections), if available:

Indicators of hydrophytic vegetation and wetland hydrology must be present, unless

disturbed or problematic.

3

Aerial photos.

Sampling Point: 01b UPL

Dark Surface (S7)

Very Shallow Dark Surface (TF12)

Stunted or Stressed Plants (D1)

10 10YR 3 2 100 SILT LOAM/0 to

18 10YR 4 3 60 SANDY CLAY LOAM/10 to

18 10YR 4 2 10YR 4/620 4 C M SANDY CLAY LOAM/10 to




Applicant/Owner: SDDOT & City of Sioux Falls Sampling Point: 01b WET




Remarks:

The sample point is located in a temporarily flooded, reed canary grass dominated, depressional wetland north of 26th Street. The wetland area has been labeled a PEMA wetland according to the Cowardin classification system.

Trevor Wegner

State: SD




Are Vegetation

Are Vegetation

Soil

Soil

Hydrology

Hydrology









Hydrophytic

Vegetation Present?



Remarks: (Include photo numbers here or on a separate sheet.)Hydrophytic vegetation criteria was met.


Is the Sampled Area

within a Wetland?


Landform (hillslope, terrace, etc.): Depression Local Relief (concave, convex, none): Concave

Yes X No

,

,

,

,

,

,

Yes X No


Yes X No

Yes X No

Yes X No

Yes X No


Yes X No

X

X


Indicator

Status

Absolute

% Cover

Dominant

Species

S T R

2

2

100.0%




(B)

(A)

(A/B)

OBL species

FACW species

UPL species

FACU species

FAC species

x 5 =

x 4 =

x 3 =

x 2 =

x 1 = 0

150

60

80

0

115 290(A) (B)




Total % Cover of:

Column Totals:

Multiply by:

0

75

20

20

0


Vine Stratum

Shrub Stratum

Herb Stratum

Tree Stratum

(Plot size: 6 Ft )70 Y FACWPhalaris arundinacea

20 Y FACRhamnus cathartica

15 N FACUSolidago canadensis

5 N FACUCirsium arvense

5 N FACWVerbena hastata

115 =Total Cover


Type:

Depth (inches):


Remarks:

Hydric soil indicator F6 was met.


Histosol (A1)




2 cm Muck (A10)


Black Histic (A3)




Sandy Redox (S5)














Depth (inches): 2"

Depth (inches):

Depth (inches):

Field Observations:

Remarks:

Wetland hydrology criteria was met with one primary and two secondary indicators. No saturation was present despite surface water presence.




Surface Water (A1)


Saturation (A3)

Water Marks (B1)


Iron Deposits (B5)



Aquatic Fauna (B13)














Drift Deposits (B3)



Saturation Present?









% %

SOIL


21

3

X Yes No

HYDROLOGY

Wetland Hydrology Present? X Yes No

Yes X No

Yes No X

Yes No X




3

Aerial photos.

Sampling Point: 01b WET

Dark Surface (S7)



6 10YR 3 2 100 SILTY CLAY LOAM/0 to

12 10YR 3 1 10YR 3/492 8 C M SILTY CLAY LOAM/6 to

18 10YR 2.5 1 10YR 3/496 4 C M SILTY CLAY LOAM/12 to

24 10YR 2 1 100 CLAY LOAM/18 to



Applicant/Owner: SDDOT & City of Sioux Falls Sampling Point: 01c UPL




Remarks:

The sample point is located outside a seasonally flooded drainage on an adjacent upland plain north of 26th Street. Although hydrophytic vegetation was present at the sample point location, wetland hydrology and hydric soils were not present.

Jessica Brisbois

State: SD




Are Vegetation

Are Vegetation

Soil

Soil

Hydrology

Hydrology









Hydrophytic

Vegetation Present?



Remarks: (Include photo numbers here or on a separate sheet.)Hydrophytic vegetation criteria was met. Only one of the three wetland indicators were met.


Is the Sampled Area

within a Wetland?


Landform (hillslope, terrace, etc.): Plain Local Relief (concave, convex, none): None

Yes X No

,

,

,

,

,

,

Yes X No


Yes X No

Yes No X

Yes No X

Yes No X


Yes X No

X

X


Indicator

Status

Absolute

% Cover

Dominant

Species

S T R

2

2

100.0%




(B)

(A)

(A/B)

OBL species

FACW species

UPL species

FACU species

FAC species

x 5 =

x 4 =

x 3 =

x 2 =

x 1 = 0

120

90

40

0

100 250(A) (B)




Total % Cover of:

Column Totals:

Multiply by:

0

60

30

10

0


Vine Stratum

Shrub Stratum

Herb Stratum

Tree Stratum

(Plot size: 6 Ft )60 Y FACWSpartina pectinata

30 Y FACPoa pratensis

10 N FACUCirsium arvense

100 =Total Cover


Type:

Depth (inches):


Remarks:

No hydric soil indicators were present.


Histosol (A1)




2 cm Muck (A10)


Black Histic (A3)




Sandy Redox (S5)














Depth (inches):

Depth (inches):

Depth (inches):

Field Observations:

Remarks:

Only one secondary wetland hydrology indicator was met.




Surface Water (A1)


Saturation (A3)

Water Marks (B1)


Iron Deposits (B5)



Aquatic Fauna (B13)














Drift Deposits (B3)



Saturation Present?









% %

SOIL


21

3

XYes No

HYDROLOGY


Yes No X

Yes No X

Yes No X




3

Aerial photos.

Sampling Point: 01c UPL

Dark Surface (S7)



4 10YR 3 3 100 0SANDY CLAY LOAM/0 to


20 10YR 5 3 30 Sand / gravel mix.SAND/4 to



Applicant/Owner: SDDOT & City of Sioux Falls Sampling Point: 01c WET




Remarks:

The sample point was taken in a seasonally flooded, linear emergent wetland north of 26th Street. Hydrology appears to come from two culverts inputting at the south side of the wetland and drains north to the Big Sioux River. The wetland area has been labeled a PEMC wetland according to the Cowardin classification system.

Jessica Brisbois

State: SD




Are Vegetation

Are Vegetation

Soil

Soil

Hydrology

Hydrology









Hydrophytic

Vegetation Present?





Is the Sampled Area

within a Wetland?


Landform (hillslope, terrace, etc.): Toe of Slope Local Relief (concave, convex, none): Concave

Yes X No

,

,

,

,

,

,

Yes X No


Yes X No

Yes X No

Yes X No

Yes X No


Yes X No

X

X


Indicator

Status

Absolute

% Cover

Dominant

Species

S T R

2

2

100.0%




(B)

(A)

(A/B)

OBL species

FACW species

UPL species

FACU species

FAC species

x 5 =

x 4 =

x 3 =

x 2 =

x 1 = 70

60

0

0

0

100 130(A) (B)




Total % Cover of:

Column Totals:

Multiply by:

70

30

0

0

0

Rapid Test for Hydrophytic VegetationX

Vine Stratum

Shrub Stratum

Herb Stratum

Tree Stratum

(Plot size: 6 Ft )70 Y OBLTypha angustifolia

30 Y FACWSpartina pectinata

100 =Total Cover


Type:

Depth (inches):


Remarks:

Hydric soil indicators A11 and S5 were present.


Histosol (A1)




2 cm Muck (A10)


Black Histic (A3)




Sandy Redox (S5)














Depth (inches):

Depth (inches):

Depth (inches): 0"

Field Observations:

Remarks:

Wetland hydrology criteria was met with one primary and two secondary indicators.




Surface Water (A1)


Saturation (A3)

Water Marks (B1)


Iron Deposits (B5)



Aquatic Fauna (B13)














Drift Deposits (B3)



Saturation Present?









% %

SOIL


21

3

X Yes No

HYDROLOGY


Yes No X

Yes No X

Yes X No




3

Aerial photos.

Sampling Point: 01c WET

Dark Surface (S7)




12 10YR 4 2 10YR 4/660 6 C M SANDY CLAY LOAM/4 to





Applicant/Owner: SDDOT & City of Sioux Falls Sampling Point: 02 UPL




Remarks:

The sample point is located outside a temporarily flooded linear wetland north of 26th Street on an adjacent upland lawn. Hydrophytic vegetation was present, but no other wetland indicators were present. Hydrophytic vegetation likely met due to seeded Kentucky blue grass which is a FAC species.

Jessica Brisbois

State: SD


Soil Map Unit Name: Chaska loam, channeled NWI Classification: NA


Are Vegetation

Are Vegetation

Soil

Soil

Hydrology

Hydrology









Hydrophytic

Vegetation Present?



Remarks: (Include photo numbers here or on a separate sheet.)Hydrophytic vegetation criteria was met due to dominance of FAC species, Kentucky blue grass.


Is the Sampled Area

within a Wetland?


Landform (hillslope, terrace, etc.): Plain Local Relief (concave, convex, none): None

Yes X No

,

,

,

,

,

,

Yes X No


Yes X No

Yes No X

Yes No X

Yes No X


Yes X No

X

X


Indicator

Status

Absolute

% Cover

Dominant

Species

S T R

1

1

100.0%




(B)

(A)

(A/B)

OBL species

FACW species

UPL species

FACU species

FAC species

x 5 =

x 4 =

x 3 =

x 2 =

x 1 = 0

0

300

0

0

100 300(A) (B)




Total % Cover of:

Column Totals:

Multiply by:

0

0

100

0

0


Vine Stratum

Shrub Stratum

Herb Stratum

Tree Stratum

(Plot size: 6 Ft )100 Y FACPoa pratensis

100 =Total Cover


Type:

Depth (inches):


Remarks:

No hydric soils indicators were present.


Histosol (A1)




2 cm Muck (A10)


Black Histic (A3)




Sandy Redox (S5)














Depth (inches):

Depth (inches):

Depth (inches):

Field Observations:

Remarks:

No wetland hydrology indicators were present.




Surface Water (A1)


Saturation (A3)

Water Marks (B1)


Iron Deposits (B5)



Aquatic Fauna (B13)














Drift Deposits (B3)



Saturation Present?









% %

SOIL


21

3

XYes No

HYDROLOGY


Yes No X

Yes No X

Yes No X




3

Aerial photos.

Sampling Point: 02 UPL

Dark Surface (S7)



10 10YR 3 2 100 CLAY LOAM/0 to

16 10YR 3 3 CLAY LOAM/10 to



Applicant/Owner: SDDOT & City of Sioux Falls Sampling Point: 02 WET




Remarks:

The sample point was taken in a temporarily flooded linear wetland north of 26th Street. The wetland area runs parallel to an adjacent railroad bed and appears to receive hydrology from a culvert located on its south end. The wetland area has been labeled a PEMA wetland according to the Cowardin classification system.

Jessica Brisbois

State: SD


Soil Map Unit Name: Chaska loam, channeled NWI Classification: NA


Are Vegetation

Are Vegetation

Soil

Soil

Hydrology

Hydrology









Hydrophytic

Vegetation Present?





Is the Sampled Area

within a Wetland?


Landform (hillslope, terrace, etc.): Drainage Local Relief (concave, convex, none): Concave

Yes X No

,

,

,

,

,

,

Yes X No


Yes X No

Yes X No

Yes X No

Yes X No


Yes X No

X

X


Indicator

Status

Absolute

% Cover

Dominant

Species

S T R

2

2

100.0%




(B)

(A)

(A/B)

OBL species

FACW species

UPL species

FACU species

FAC species

x 5 =

x 4 =

x 3 =

x 2 =

x 1 = 0

60

210

0

0

100 270(A) (B)




Total % Cover of:

Column Totals:

Multiply by:

0

30

70

0

0


Vine Stratum

Shrub Stratum

Herb Stratum

Tree Stratum

(Plot size: 6 Ft )70 Y FACHordeum jubatum

30 Y FACWEchinochloa crus-galli

100 =Total Cover


Type:

Depth (inches):


Remarks:

Hydric soil indicator F3 was present.


Histosol (A1)




2 cm Muck (A10)


Black Histic (A3)




Sandy Redox (S5)














Depth (inches):

Depth (inches):

Depth (inches):

Field Observations:

Remarks:

Wetland hydrology criteria was met with three secondary indicators.




Surface Water (A1)


Saturation (A3)

Water Marks (B1)


Iron Deposits (B5)



Aquatic Fauna (B13)














Drift Deposits (B3)



Saturation Present?









% %

SOIL


21

3

X Yes No

HYDROLOGY


Yes No X

Yes No X

Yes No X




3

Aerial photos.

Sampling Point: 02 WET

Dark Surface (S7)



2 10YR 4 3 100 SILTY SAND/0 to

10 10YR 4 2 10YR 4/670 6 C M CLAY LOAM/2 to

10 10YR 3 2 34 CLAY LOAM/2 to

14 10YR 3 2 10YR 4/698 2 C M CLAY LOAM/10 to

24 10YR 2 1 100 CLAY LOAM/14 to



Applicant/Owner: SDDOT & City of Sioux Falls Sampling Point: 03 UPL




Remarks:

The sample point was taken outside a linear floodplain wetland south of 26th Street an adjacent upland hillslope. Hydrophytic vegetation was present at the sample point, but wetland hydrology and hydric soil criteria were not met.

Trevor Wegner

State: SD


Soil Map Unit Name: Chaska loam, channeled NWI Classification: R2UBG


Are Vegetation

Are Vegetation

Soil

Soil

Hydrology

Hydrology









Hydrophytic

Vegetation Present?



Remarks: (Include photo numbers here or on a separate sheet.)Hydrophytic vegetation criteria was met. There was 68% bare ground due to tree canopy cover.


Is the Sampled Area

within a Wetland?


Landform (hillslope, terrace, etc.): Top of Slope Local Relief (concave, convex, none): Convex

Yes X No

,

,

,

,

,

,

Yes X No


Yes X No

Yes No X

Yes No X

Yes No X


Yes X No

X

X


Indicator

Status

Absolute

% Cover

Dominant

Species

S T R

3

4

75.0%




(B)

(A)

(A/B)

OBL species

FACW species

UPL species

FACU species

FAC species

x 5 =

x 4 =

x 3 =

x 2 =

x 1 = 0

130

90

48

0

107 268(A) (B)




Total % Cover of:

Column Totals:

Multiply by:

0

65

30

12

0


Vine Stratum

Shrub Stratum

Herb Stratum

Tree Stratum

(Plot size: 30 Ft )5 Y FACWUlmus americana

5 =Total Cover

(Plot size: 6 Ft )20 Y FACAlliaria petiolata

10 Y FACUGlechoma hederacea

2 N FACUGalium aparine

32 =Total Cover

(Plot size: 30 Ft )50 Y FACWAcer saccharinum

10 N FACAcer negundo

10 N FACWUlmus americana

70 =Total Cover


Type:

Depth (inches):


Remarks:

The sample point is in a previous channel/side channel of the Big Sioux River. Redox found in the upland sample point have sharp boundaries. These are relict redox features, therefore, the soil is not hydric due to modern conditions not displaying wetland indicators.


Histosol (A1)




2 cm Muck (A10)


Black Histic (A3)




Sandy Redox (S5)














Depth (inches):

Depth (inches):

Depth (inches):

Field Observations:

Remarks:

Only one secondary wetland hydrology indicator was present.




Surface Water (A1)


Saturation (A3)

Water Marks (B1)


Iron Deposits (B5)



Aquatic Fauna (B13)














Drift Deposits (B3)



Saturation Present?









% %

SOIL


21

3

XYes No

HYDROLOGY


Yes No X

Yes No X

Yes No X




3

Aerial photos.

Sampling Point: 03 UPL

Dark Surface (S7)




16 10YR 3 2 10YR 4/496 4 Relict RedoxC PL SILT LOAM/8 to

24 10YR 3 1 10YR 4/498 2 Relit RedoxC PL SILT LOAM/16 to



Applicant/Owner: SDDOT & City of Sioux Falls Sampling Point: 03 WET




Remarks:

The sample point was taken in a linear floodplain wetland south of 26th Street. The wetland area appears to be an old side channel of the Big Sioux River and receives hydrology when the river floods over its banks. Due to the presence of over 30% aerial tree cover within the wetland this wetland area has been labeled a PFOA wetland according to the Cowardin classification system.

Trevor Wegner

State: SD


Soil Map Unit Name: Chaska loam, channeled NWI Classification: R2UBG


Are Vegetation

Are Vegetation

Soil

Soil

Hydrology

Hydrology









Hydrophytic

Vegetation Present?



Remarks: (Include photo numbers here or on a separate sheet.)Hydrophytic vegetation criteria was met. 67% bare ground due aerial tree cover. There was more than 30% aerial tree cover of the wetland therefore, this is a forested wetland.


Is the Sampled Area

within a Wetland?


Landform (hillslope, terrace, etc.): Floodplain Local Relief (concave, convex, none): Concave

Yes X No

,

,

,

,

,

,

Yes X No


Yes X No

Yes X No

Yes X No

Yes X No


Yes X No

X

X


Indicator

Status

Absolute

% Cover

Dominant

Species

S T R

6

6

100.0%




(B)

(A)

(A/B)

OBL species

FACW species

UPL species

FACU species

FAC species

x 5 =

x 4 =

x 3 =

x 2 =

x 1 = 0

102

120

8

0

93 230(A) (B)




Total % Cover of:

Column Totals:

Multiply by:

0

51

40

2

0


Vine Stratum

Shrub Stratum

Herb Stratum

Tree Stratum

(Plot size: 30 Ft )20 Y FACRhamnus cathartica

20 =Total Cover

(Plot size: 6 Ft )10 Y FACAlliaria petiolata

10 Y FACHydrophyllum virginianum

10 Y FACWPhalaris arundinacea

2 N FACUGalium aparine

1 N FACWUrtica dioica

33 =Total Cover

(Plot size: 30 Ft )30 Y FACWAcer saccharinum

10 Y FACWUlmus americana

40 =Total Cover


Type:

Depth (inches):


Remarks:

Hydric soil indicator F6 was present. The redox present at the sample point had diffuse boundaries providing evidence of modern hydric soil conditions.


Histosol (A1)




2 cm Muck (A10)


Black Histic (A3)




Sandy Redox (S5)














Depth (inches): 2"

Depth (inches):

Depth (inches): 0"

Field Observations:

Remarks:

Wetland hydrology criteria was met with three primary and two secondary indicators. Surface water was present; likely from the adjacent Big Sioux River.




Surface Water (A1)


Saturation (A3)

Water Marks (B1)


Iron Deposits (B5)



Aquatic Fauna (B13)














Drift Deposits (B3)



Saturation Present?









% %

SOIL


21

3

X Yes No

HYDROLOGY


Yes X No

Yes No X

Yes X No




3

Aerial photos.

Sampling Point: 03 WET

Dark Surface (S7)




12 10YR 3 2 10YR 4/498 2 C M SILT LOAM/6 to




Appendix B

Site Photographs


1

Photo #1. Wetland 01a. Facing northeast towards temporarily flooded, ditch Wetland 01a east of I-229 and north of 26th Street.

Photo #2. Wetland 01a. Facing northeast towards temporarily flooded ditch Wetland 01a west of I-229 and north of 26th Street.

Photo #3. Facing west towards Sample Point 01b UPL. Overflow from Wetland 01a crosses this to Wetland 01b, but the area does not collect water to create wetland characteristics.


2

Photo #4. Wetland 01b. Facing east towards temporarily flooded, depressional Wetland 01b, west of I-229 and north of 26th Street.

Photo #5. Wetland 01b. Facing southwest towards temporarily flooded, depressional Wetland 01b and adjacent mowed upland area. A slight rise elevation restricts water from continuing east into this mowed area.

Photo #6. OW 01. Facing north towards ephemeral drainage, OW 01. Water is received from Wetland 01a to the southwest and Wetland 01c to the southeast and drains north to the Big Sioux River.


3

Photo #7. OW 01. Facing southeast towards ephemeral drainage, OW 01. Water is received from Wetland 01a to the southwest and Wetland 01c to the southeast and drains north to the Big Sioux River.

Photo #8. Wetland 01c. Facing north towards linear emergent Wetland 01c north of 26th Street and west of the Big Sioux River.

Photo #9. Wetland 01c. Facing south towards linear emergent Wetland 01c north of 26th Street and west of the Big Sioux River.


4

Photo #10. Facing southeast towards open green space in a park area west of Southeastern Avenue and north of 26th Street. OW 03c can be seen in the background of the photo flowing through the park.

Photo #11. OW 03c. Facing northeast towards intermittent Stream OW 03c west of Southeastern Avenue and north of 26th Street.

Photo #12. OW 03b. Facing west towards intermittent stream OW 03b between Southeastern Avenue and a set of railroad tracks. OW 03b is north of 26th Street.


5

Photo #13. OW 03a. Facing southeast towards intermittent stream OW 03a flowing from a ravine within a housing development and crossing Southeastern Avenue to the west through the culvert depicted in the photo.

Photo #14. OW 03c. Facing south towards intermittent stream OW 03c flowing through a park area west of Southeastern Avenue and north of 26th Street.

Photo #15. OW 03c and OW 02. Facing south towards intermittent stream OW 03c feeding into OW 02a; the perennial Big Sioux River. 26th Street can be seen in the back of the photo to the south.


6

Photo #16. Wetland 02. Facing northwest towards temporarily flooded, drainage Wetland 02 north of 26th Street. Wetland 02 parallels a rail road track to the east.

Photo #17. Wetland 02. Facing south towards linear emergent Wetland 02 west of Southeastern Avenue and north of 26th Street. Wetland 02 parallels a rail road track to the east.

Photo #18. Wetland 03. Facing north towards linear, forested, floodplain Wetland 03 within an old side channel of the Big Sioux River. Wetland 03 lies south of 26th Street and west of the Big Sioux River.


7

Photo #19. Wetland 03. Facing south towards linear, forested, floodplain Wetland 03 within an old side channel of the Big Sioux River. Wetland 03 lies south of 26th Street and west of the Big Sioux River.

Photo #20. Wetland 03. Facing north towards linear, forested, floodplain Wetland 03 within an old side channel of the Big Sioux River. Wetland 03 lies south of 26th Street and west of the Big Sioux River.

Photo #21. OW 02. Facing west towards OW 02, the perennial Big Sioux River. Photo of OW 02 is south of 26th Street and west of Southeastern Avenue. A culvert flows into OW 02 at this location. A scour area that has been lined with rip rap where water flows in can be seen in the photo.

Appendix C

HGM Summary Sheets

05/06/16

1a

NA

NA

REMARKS --

0.3 0.3

Existing Predicted0.10 0.10

0.10 0.10

0.10 0.10

0.10 0.10

0.25 0.25

0.50 0.50

0.50 0.50

0.50 0.50

0.61 0.61

0.25 0.25

0.10 0.10

0.60 0.60

0.25 0.25

FCI FCU FCI FCU

0.21 0.06 0.21 0.06

0.15 0.05 0.15 0.05

0.26 0.08 0.26 0.08

0.33 0.10 0.33 0.10

0.32 0.10 0.32 0.10

0.25 0.08 0.25 0.08

0.30 0.09 0.30 0.09

0.33 0.10 0.33 0.10

MINIMAL EFFECT

NUMERICAL % (Y or N)

1.0

2.0 0.00 0.00% Yes

3.0 0.00 0.00% Yes

4.0 0.00 0.00% Yes

5.0 0.00 0.00% Yes

6.0 0.00 0.00% Yes

7.0 0.00 0.00% Yes

8.0 0.00 0.00% Yes

9.0 0.00 0.00% Yes

8.0 Maintains Habitat Structure Within Wetland

9.0 Maintains Hab. Str. and Connect. Among Wetlands

FUNCTIONCHANGE IN FCU's JUSTIFICATION OF MINIMAL EFFECT IF THERE IS A

NET FUNCTIONAL LOSS OF 10 TO 20 PERCENT

3.0 Storage and Release of Subsurface Water

4.0 Removal of Imported Elements and Compounds

5.0 Retention of Particulates and Organic Materials

6.0 Organic Carbon Export

7.0 Maintains Characteristic Plant Community

FunctionExisting Predicted

1.0 Storage of Surface Water

2.0 Velocity Reduction of Surface Water Flow

Vdenhw - Density of Perennial Herbaceous and Woody Vegetation

Vpratio - Ratio of Native to Non-Native Plant Species

Vveg - Vegetative Strata and Canopy CoverageVwetuse - Wetland Use

CALCULATION OF FUNCTIONAL CAPACITY INDICES (FCI's) AND UNITS (FCU's)

Vbuffer - Buffer Condition, Continuity, and Width

Vtopog - Flood Plain/Wetland Topographic Complexity

Vupuse - Upland Use

Vdetritus - Detritus

Vsed - Sedimentation Within the Wetland

VariableVhydalt - Flood Plain/Wetland Hydrology Alterations

Vsource - Watershed Hydrology Alterations

Vsom - Soil Organic Matter

Vsoil - Soil Porosity

YELLOW FLAG (Y/N) ----- RED FLAG (Y/N) -----------

WETLAND ACRES (EXISTING) ----------- WETLAND ACRES (PREDICTED) --------

FUNCTIONAL INDICES (VARIABLE) SCORING

PROJECT NAME ----------- I-229 Exit 5 Interchange Wetland Assessment Area 1 (WAA 1)

PLANNED ACTIVITY ------ Interstate highway interchange reconstruction

OBSERVERS ---------------- Daryn Dockter, Trevor WegnerWETLAND TYPE (NWI) ---

CONDITIONS --------------- normal WETLAND TYPE (FSA) ----

S.D. RIVERINE HGM MODEL WORKSHEET 2, VER. 1.1Use this worksheet for wetlands that are adjacent and parallel to the channel and that lack the ability to store surface

water. For depressional and linear wetlands with the ability to store surface water, use worksheet 1.

DATE ------------------------- OWNER/OPERATOR ------

WETLAND ID. -------------- ASSESSMENT TYPE ------- Field

05/06/16

1b

NA

NA

REMARKS --

0.24 0.24


0.10 0.10

0.12 0.12

0.10 0.10

0.50 0.50

0.25 0.25

0.50 0.50

0.75 0.75

0.61 0.61

0.30 0.30

0.10 0.10

0.80 0.80

0.75 0.75

FCI FCU FCI FCU

0.25 0.06 0.25 0.06

0.35 0.08 0.35 0.08

0.31 0.07 0.31 0.07

0.47 0.11 0.47 0.11

0.32 0.08 0.32 0.08

0.43 0.10 0.43 0.10

0.42 0.10 0.42 0.10

0.48 0.11 0.48 0.11

0.48 0.11 0.48 0.11

MINIMAL EFFECT


1.0 0.00 0.00% Yes

2.0 0.00 0.00% Yes

3.0 0.00 0.00% Yes

4.0 0.00 0.00% Yes

5.0 0.00 0.00% Yes

6.0 0.00 0.00% Yes

7.0 0.00 0.00% Yes

8.0 0.00 0.00% Yes

9.0 0.00 0.00% Yes

Field

Wetland Assessment Area 2 (WAA 2)

Daryn Dockter, Trevor Wegner

I-229 Exit 5 Interchange

normal

OWNER/OPERATOR ------

PROJECT NAME -----------

S.D. RIVERINE HGM MODEL WORKSHEET 1, VER. 1.1


DATE -------------------------


Interstate highway interchange reconstructionPLANNED ACTIVITY ------

WETLAND TYPE (NWI) ---

ASSESSMENT TYPE -------

OBSERVERS ----------------

CONDITIONS --------------- WETLAND TYPE (FSA) ----

WETLAND ID. --------------

Use this worksheet for depressional or linear wetlands that are disconnected from the channel and that have the ability to

store surface water. For wetlands adjacent to the channel and that lack this ability, use worksheet 2.


Vveg - Vegetative Strata and Canopy Coverage




Vupuse - Upland Use




FunctionExisting



]1

Predicted

Vwetuse - Wetland Use












JUSTIFICATION OF MINIMAL EFFECT IF THERE IS AFUNCTION


CHANGE IN FCU's

05/06/16

1c, 1d, 2

NA

NA

REMARKS --

0.27 0.27


0.10 0.10

0.10 0.10

0.10 0.10

0.25 0.25

0.25 0.25

0.50 0.50

0.50 0.50

0.27 0.27

0.25 0.25

0.25 0.25

0.60 0.60

0.50 0.50

FCI FCU FCI FCU

0.23 0.06 0.23 0.06

0.17 0.05 0.17 0.05

0.33 0.09 0.33 0.09

0.24 0.06 0.24 0.06

0.32 0.09 0.32 0.09

0.32 0.09 0.32 0.09

0.36 0.10 0.36 0.10

0.31 0.08 0.31 0.08

MINIMAL EFFECT


1.0

2.0 0.00 0.00% Yes

3.0 0.00 0.00% Yes

4.0 0.00 0.00% Yes

5.0 0.00 0.00% Yes

6.0 0.00 0.00% Yes

7.0 0.00 0.00% Yes

8.0 0.00 0.00% Yes

9.0 0.00 0.00% Yes

S.D. RIVERINE HGM MODEL WORKSHEET 2, VER. 1.1Use this worksheet for wetlands that are adjacent and parallel to the channel and that lack the ability to store surface

water. For depressional and linear wetlands with the ability to store surface water, use worksheet 1.

DATE ------------------------- OWNER/OPERATOR ------

WETLAND ID. -------------- ASSESSMENT TYPE ------- Field

OBSERVERS ---------------- Daryn Dockter, Trevor WegnerWETLAND TYPE (NWI) ---

CONDITIONS --------------- normal WETLAND TYPE (FSA) ----

PROJECT NAME ----------- I-229 Exit 5 Interchange Wetland Assessment Area 3 (WAA 3)

PLANNED ACTIVITY ------ Interstate highway interchange reconstruction










Vupuse - Upland Use





Vveg - Vegetative Strata and Canopy CoverageVwetuse - Wetland Use

CALCULATION OF FUNCTIONAL CAPACITY INDICES (FCI's) AND UNITS (FCU's)

FunctionExisting Predicted










FUNCTIONCHANGE IN FCU's JUSTIFICATION OF MINIMAL EFFECT IF THERE IS A


05/06/16

3

R2UBG

NA

REMARKS --

0.11 0.11


0.50 0.50

0.53 0.53

0.85 0.85

0.50 0.50

1.00 1.00

0.75 0.75

1.00 1.00

0.87 0.87

0.15 0.15

0.50 0.50

1.00 1.00

1.00 1.00

FCI FCU FCI FCU

0.72 0.08 0.72 0.08

0.65 0.07 0.65 0.07

0.77 0.08 0.77 0.08

0.73 0.08 0.73 0.08

0.75 0.08 0.75 0.08

0.61 0.07 0.61 0.07

0.86 0.09 0.86 0.09

0.67 0.07 0.67 0.07

0.85 0.09 0.85 0.09

MINIMAL EFFECT


1.0 0.00 0.00% Yes

2.0 0.00 0.00% Yes

3.0 0.00 0.00% Yes

4.0 0.00 0.00% Yes

5.0 0.00 0.00% Yes

6.0 0.00 0.00% Yes

7.0 0.00 0.00% Yes

8.0 0.00 0.00% Yes

9.0 0.00 0.00% Yes

Field

Wetland Assessment Area 4 (WAA 4)

Daryn Dockter, Trevor Wegner

I-229 Exit 5 Interchange

normal

OWNER/OPERATOR ------

PROJECT NAME -----------

S.D. RIVERINE HGM MODEL WORKSHEET 1, VER. 1.1


DATE -------------------------


Interstate highway interchange reconstructionPLANNED ACTIVITY ------

WETLAND TYPE (NWI) ---

ASSESSMENT TYPE -------

OBSERVERS ----------------

CONDITIONS --------------- WETLAND TYPE (FSA) ----

WETLAND ID. --------------

Use this worksheet for depressional or linear wetlands that are disconnected from the channel and that have the ability to

store surface water. For wetlands adjacent to the channel and that lack this ability, use worksheet 2.


Vveg - Vegetative Strata and Canopy Coverage




Vupuse - Upland Use




FunctionExisting



]1

Predicted

Vwetuse - Wetland Use












JUSTIFICATION OF MINIMAL EFFECT IF THERE IS AFUNCTION


CHANGE IN FCU's

STATE OFSOUTH

DAKOTA

PROJECT SHEETTOTALSHEETS

FILE:PLOTTING DATE:

15061SF SPBP REV DATE:INITIAL:10-06-2017

524 NORTH MAIN AVENUE, SUITE 201 SIOUX FALLS, SOUTH DAKOTA 57104TEL 605.339.1205 FAX 605.339.1215 THINKCONFLUENCE.COM

10-06-2017JVW

P 1358(04) 116

CONSTRUCTION PHASING AND SEQUENCING:

The following Sequence of Operation shall be followed by the Contractor unless an alternateSequence of Operations is submitted in writing and approved by the Engineer. The Contractor isresponsible for any additional traffic control costs incurred by an approved alternate Sequence ofOperations.

26th Street Lane Closures are only allowed between the hours of 8:30 am and 4:30 pm each day.Flagging will occasionally be required for material and heavy equipment deliveries to the site.

Phase 1 - Earthwork

The Contractor shall perform preliminary earthwork operations, by stripping topsoil and importingcontractor furnished borrow to surcharge the site as outlined in the Geotechnical Explorations Report(GeoTek #17-539) included in the project specifications manual.

Phase 2 - Pedestrian Bridge

Phase 2 includes construction of the pedestrian bridge crossing of the Big Sioux River. Work onPhase 2 may be concurrent with Phase 1 operations.

Contractor needs to give two weeks notice prior to start of pedestrian bridge construction for the Cityof SF and GFP to issue press releases and communications about the river closure and bike traildetour.

Phase 3 - Rotary Park

Upon approval of earthwork by the Geotechnical Engineer, the Contractor shall commenceconstruction of park improvements including storm sewer, grading, stairs, park entrance, driveway,parking, shelter, restroom and playground. Install transitional grading, temporary gravel drive, andtemporary concrete walk connection to existing 26th Street.

Phase 4 - Sewer and Water Utilities

Sewer and water improvements. Work on Phase 4 may be concurrent with the other phasedimprovements.

CONSTRUCTION LIMITS

The construction limits shall be within the areas indicated on the parks department property, 26thStreet right-of-way, Interstate right-of-way, and easement areas. Material storage and vehicle andequipment traffic shall be limited to the construction limits. All paved streets adjacent to the projectare to be cleaned at the end of each working day.

It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate with the property owners relating toaccess to their property and any subsequent damages.

The Contractor will not be allowed to store materials, equipment, etc. on structures or use structuresas a staging area.

NOISE PERMIT

The Contractor shall obtain a noise permit from the City of Sioux Falls Health Department (MarkSchuttloffel 367-8783) if working between 8:00 PM to 6:00 AM. The Contractor shall submit arequest in writing to the Engineer for approval 24 hours in advance when nighttime work iscontemplated.

COORDINATION MEETINGS

The Contractor shall conduct coordination meetings with the subcontractors, utilities, the Engineer,and the public. These meetings shall be held every other week at a location on or near the project.The Contractor shall determine the time and location and as approved by the Engineer.

Landowners, business owners, and the general public will be invited to the first half of the meeting.The Contractor will give a brief summary of the project schedule and will answer any questions. Thepublic will then be dismissed and the Contractor can discuss construction coordination and otherissues as needed.

All costs to conduct the coordination meetings shall be incidental to the project.

PORTABLE TOILET FACILITIES

The Contractor will be responsible for providing portable toilet facilities for the project at no cost tothe project.

ACCEPTANCE TESTING

The City will be responsible for taking the first acceptance test and a backup test for all

non-participating constructed improvements, if required. All subsequent tests required, due tofailures, will be paid by the Contractor by deducting the cost from the pay request unless otherwisespecified. Testing of participating items shall be goverened according the SDDOT Specifications.

DRAINAGE

Drainage is the Contractor's responsibility. Contractor shall be aware of existing drainage conditionsand facilities, and shall provide for drainage during all phases of construction. Damage caused byimproper temporary drainage facilities shall be repaired at the Contractor's expense and to thesatisfaction of the Engineer.

UTILITIES

The Contractor shall be aware that the existing utilities shown in the plans were surveyed prior to thedesign of this project and might have been relocated or replaced by a new utility facility prior toconstruction of this project, might be relocated or replaced by a new utility facility during theconstruction of this project, or might not require adjustment and may remain in its current location.The Contractor shall contact each utility owner and confirm the status of all existing and new utilityfacilities. The utility contact information is provided elsewhere in the plans or bidding documents.

All utilities shall be verified by the Contractor prior to starting work. Any time existing utilities impedethe progress of work, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer.

All utilities, whether privately or publicly owned, shall be moved, relocated, and/or replaced asnecessary, by the respective utility company or companies except as noted in the plans. Thesemodifications shall take place in advance of construction when applicable or when advised by theEngineer. No payment shall be made to the Contractor unless specified in the contract documents.

The Contractor shall safeguard all utilities and coordinate his efforts to coincide with utility work byothers in order to minimize inconvenience to the public and utility companies. When pipe utilityinstallation crosses existing utilities, the Contractor shall be responsible for supporting the utilities in amanner that is acceptable to the owner of the utility. Any damage caused to the utilities due toContractor carelessness shall be repaired at the Contractor's expense to the satisfaction of the utilityowner.

Abandoned utilities (gas lines, telephone lines, etc.) encountered during construction shall beremoved and disposed of by the Contractor. Costs associated with this work shall be incidental tothe various bid items associated with work adjacent to the abandoned utility.

The Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination of all work associated with the disturbance,removal, or replacement of unidentified metallic natural gas mains or services when encountered.The Contractor shall, in advance and prior to proceeding with the work, coordinate with the City ofSioux Falls, MidAmerican Energy Company, and all other companies related to the associated work.

Existing utility locations shown on drawings are approximate. There is no guarantee that the utilitiesshown include all such utilities or that the locations indicated are exact. The Contractor shall contactSouth Dakota One Call system, utility companies, and the City of Sioux Falls to verify locations of allexisting utilities prior to excavation. The Contractor shall be responsible for notifying South DakotaOne Call 1-800-781-7474 to have utilities field located.

The following utility companies are known to have facilities on the project:Sioux Falls Water Century LinkDarin McDonnel Chris Adamson (Engineering)668 W. Algonquin Street (605) 977-2835Sioux Falls, SD 57104(605) 367-8810 AT&T

Cindy HusenSF Water Reclamation - Sanitary (605) 338-0258Paul Faris4500 N Sycamore Ave Xcel EnergySioux Falls, SD 57117 Bob Van Kirk(605) 941-1163 (605) 339-8341

SF Water Reclamation - Storm MidAmerican Energy CompanyBrent Rosenbrook Nicolle Fasmusson4500 N Sycamore Ave 1200 S BlauveltSioux Falls, SD 57117 Sioux Falls, SD 57105(605) 367-3547 (605) 373-6081

Municipal Light & Power SDN CommunicationsJerry Jongeling Lawrence Escobin2000 North Minnesota (605) 978-1094Sioux Falls, SD 57104(605) 373-6979

PROTECTION OF EXISTING SANITARY SEWER, WATER MAIN AND STORM SEWER

SYSTEMS

For the protection of existing public underground utilities and the surrounding work area,consideration shall be given to isolating portions of the existing water distribution system within theconstruction limits while maintaining fire protection. During underground utility installation such as,but not limited to, sanitary sewer, water main, storm sewer, sump pump drain, etc., in the proximity ofexisting water main and/or water services, the existing water main distribution shall be isolated withinthe work area. Upon receiving notice from the Contractor 24 hours in advance of any work, City staffwill operate designated water valves, where appropriate, to isolate the work area as much asreasonably possible. The Contractor shall become aware of the location and status (open/closed) ofany designated isolation valves(s). City Engineering staff and/or Utility Maintenance staff shall benotified immediately in the event of a water service emergency or interruption. It will be permissiblefor the Contractor to operate the designated valve(s) in the event of a water main or water servicefailure within the construction area. The Contractor is required to have a valve operating key on sitein the event of such a failure. Utility Maintenance (367-8810) shall be notified immediately after theshutdown. City crews will operate the valves after repairs have been made and inspections havebeen completed.

Existing sanitary sewer lines and manholes within the construction limits shall be protected at alltimes during construction. The upstream ends of existing sanitary sewer lines downstream from newsanitary sewer construction shall be plugged at locations to be approved by the Engineer. Water,stone, dirt, gravel, asphalt, concrete or any other debris shall not be allowed to enter the City'ssanitary sewer system during flushing operations or at any other time. Construction taking place inthe vicinity of any existing City sanitary sewer lines or manholes shall not cause any inflow of surfacewater, ground water, water from damaged water lines, or debris to enter the City's sanitary sewersystem. The Contractor shall be responsible for any damages incurred to the City's sanitary sewersystem and/or private property and any actions imposed by SDDENR due to spills or overflows.

Existing storm sewer inlets and pipes within the construction limits shall be protected from theentrance of stone, dirt, gravel, asphalt, concrete or any other debris during construction.

LOCATING UTILITY

This work consists of excavating material to locate a utility line, (Private or Public), when the utilityowner cannot find said line, or utility line is not within four (4) feet either side of markings establishedby the utility owner. Payment for this item will be at the contract unit price per each. One (1) locate isestimated for this project.

VERIFY UTILITY

This work consists of excavating material to verify the depth of an existing utility line, (Private orPublic), to avoid possible conflicts, when directed by the Engineer. Payment for this item will be atthe contract unit price per each. One (1) verification is estimated for this project.

After verification, the Contractor shall coordinate information with the Engineer.

DEWATERING FOR UTILITIES

It is anticipated that groundwater will be encountered during construction of the watermain. Dewatering shall be at the contract lump sum price for “Dewatering” and shall be fullcompensation for all permits, materials, equipment, and labor needed to perform all dewateringassociated with utility and park construction. All costs for dewatering for the construction of thepedestrian bridge shall be incidental to the various pedestrian bridge construction bid items.

The Contractor will obtain a dewatering permit from the DENR.

General Notes 6

REVISED 02-06-2018 JVW - Confluence

STATE OFSOUTH

DAKOTA


FILE:PLOTTING DATE:



10-06-2017JVW

P 1358(04) 116Estimate of Quantities 2


STATE OFSOUTH

DAKOTA


FILE:PLOTTING DATE:



10-06-2017JVW

P 1358(04) 116

REMOVALS

REMOVAL OF EXISTING CONCRETE PAVEMENT

The concrete pavement shall be disposed of by the Contractor at a site approved by theEngineer. Payment for concrete pavement removal is included in the contract unit price per squareyard for “Remove Concrete Sidewalk” and per linear foot for "Remove Concrete Curb and/orGutter". Payment shall be at the contract unit price regardless of variations in thickness.

REMOVAL OF EXISTING ASPHALT PAVEMENT

The asphalt concrete pavement shall be disposed of by the Contractor at a site approved by theEngineer. Payment for asphalt mat removal is included in the contract unit price per square yardfor “Remove Asphalt Concrete Pavement”. Payment shall be at the contract unit price per squareyard, regardless of variations in thickness.

When asphalt may be laid over concrete pavement, removal of the concrete surfacing shall beincidental to the contract unit price per square yard for “Remove Asphalt Concrete Pavement”.

CLEARING

The contract lump sum price for “Clearing” will be full compensation for the removal and disposal oftrees less than (6) inches in diameter, stumps, roots, and other vegetation designated for removaland mowing as required. The Engineer will establish right-of-way lines and construction limit linesprior to the start of clearing operations. The Engineer, at the start of the project, will mark theclearing limits.

Organic material shall not be used as fill in trenches or embankment. The Contractor shall disposeof all trees, brush, stumps, roots and other remains in a legal manner. Burying or burning of debrison or adjacent to the project shall be prohibited.

Erosion control measures shall be installed and functioning prior to clearing and excavation. Seeerosion control plans and notes.

CLEAR AND GRUB TREE

The contract unit price per each for "Clear and Grub Tree" will be full compensation for all removaland disposal of trees. The Engineer will establish right-of-way lines and construction lines prior to thestart of clearing and grubbing operations.

Some trees may require the Contractor to have the tree topped by a licensed arborist, prior toclearing and grubbing the tree, due to the close proximity of physical features to remain. All costsassociated with this work is considered incidental to the contract unit price per each for “Clear andGrub Tree”.

Some trees to be removed are located near driveway pavements, fences or other items not beingremoved with this project. The Contractor shall cut these trees level with the ground, and grind thestump 8” below ground line. All costs associated with this work is considered incidental to thecontract unit price for “Clear and Grub Tree”. Removal of trees are identified on the Survey andRemovals Plan. All smaller trees and shrubs (less than six (6) inches in diameter) will be removedand shall be incidental to the contract lump sum price for "Clearing".

GRADING

SOIL BORINGS

Soil boring information taken for the project has been included in the project specifications.Locations, water, and rock depths encountered at the time of the borings are indicated on the plans.There is no expressed or implied agreement that depths or character of materials shown are corrector complete. Conditions affecting work may actually differ from those shown in the boring logs.

Bidders are expected to examine the site, interpret or disregard soil boring logs as they see fit, andarrive at their own conclusions regarding the character and locations of materials to be encountered.All Contractors desiring to take additional soil borings on this project must obtain permission from theproperty owners involved and from the Engineer.

UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION

Excavate the existing subgrade to provide for the required depth of subbase, base course andasphalt surfacing or base course and concrete surfacing. Earthwork shall be performed as shown onappropriate cross sections.

Due to the difficulty in making field measurements on this project and to expedite final payment, thecomputed quantity of Unclassified Excavation shall be the basis of payment for this item. No fieldmeasurements will be made for payments except when changes from the plan shown constructionlimits are ordered by the engineer.

All excavations made for underground utilities is incidental to the installation of that utility. Allexcavations for structures is incidental to the installation of that structure. All spoil material removedfor pipe installation is the property of the Contractor and is to be removed from the project by theContractor. All spoil material and costs for removing it are incidental to pipe installation costs.

The excess soil resulting from earthwork activities, if any, shall become the property of the contractorwho shall be responsible for its removal from the site.

Water for compaction of subgrade and embankments shall be provided by the contractor and used tomaintain soil at or near optimum moisture content to obtain required density. Compaction ofsubgrade and embankments shall be governed by the specified density method. Compaction ofembankment shall be no less than 95% of Standard proctor density. No separate payment will bemade for water used for compaction of subgrade.

CONTRACTOR FURNISHED BORROW EXCAVATION

The Contractor shall provide a suitable site for Contractor furnished borrow material. The borrowmaterial shall be approved by the Engineer. The plans quantity for “Contractor Furnished BorrowExcavation” as shown in the Estimate of Quantities will be the basis of payment for this item. TheContractor is responsible for obtaining all required permits and clearances for the borrow site.

Restoration of the Contractor furnished borrow site shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

The Contractor furnished borrow material shall be uniform in texture and free from organic material.The liquid limit shall not exceed 45 and the plastic index shall not exceed 25.

The Contractor will be responsible for the following minimum testing prior to use of each borrow site:A minimum of one test for liquid limit and plastic index and a 4 point for each location and soil type,with samples obtained according to SD201. The Department will be responsible for the followingminimum testing: A minimum of one test for liquid limit and plastic index and a 4 point for every100,000 cubic yards or a major change in soil type. Independent Assurance testing will not berequired.

POROUS LANDSCAPE DETENTION - SAND/PEAT LAYER

The contract unit price per ton for "Compost" shall include all materials, labor and equipment relatedto provide and install the sand/peat layer mix for the porous landscape detention areas as specified.

ORNAMENTAL LANDSCAPING BOULDERS

The contract unit price per each for “Ornamental Landscaping Boulders” shall include obtaining theappropriate stone, transporting the stone to the site, placing the stone, and any other labor, materials,or equipment necessary to complete the work of boulder placement as specified and as indicated onthe Planting Plans.

TRENCH STABILIZATION MATERIAL

Trench Stabilization Material shall be used for the water main trench in areas where much excavationhas occurred. The trench stabilization material shall be 3/4 inch to 4 inches crushed angular, wellgraded material. Larger material may be used if necessary and required to stabilize the bottom ofthe trench.

SANITARY SEWER

SANITARY SEWER - GENERAL

1. The sanitary sewer work will consist of installation of a duplex grinder pump lift station packageand associated force main to serve the new restroom facilities at Rotary Park.

2. Contractors License. The Contractor shall obtain a “South Dakota State Sewer and WaterPlumbing Contractor's License” prior to commencing construction.

3. The Contractor shall notify the City of Sioux Falls' Engineer's office upon completion of thesanitary sewer work. Inspection of the sanitary sewer will be made by the City Engineer's officewith the Contractor and all discrepancies will be noted. If deficiencies are identified prior topaving, they shall be corrected prior to paving. Final payment will not be made until alldiscrepancies have been corrected and the sanitary sewer work has been given finalacceptance. The expense of the initial television inspection will be borne entirely by the City ofSioux Falls. The expense of any additional television inspections beyond the initial inspectionwill be borne entirely by the Contractor.

4. The contractor and consultant are required to fill out the City's Sanitary Sewer BackupPrevention Plan checklist on a daily basis. The contractor and consultant shall submit thecompleted forms to the City's Project Manager every two weeks, or more often if requested bythe City's Project Manager. This form is available from the City's Project Manager. All costsassociated with filling out and submitting this form shall be incidental to the project.

SEWER BYPASS PUMPING PLAN

The Contactor shall notify Paul Faris with the City's Water Reclamation division 48 hours in advanceof any bypass pumping operations. Bypass pumping operations will only be allowed during the hoursof 8:00 am through 5:00 pm Monday through Friday. No overnight pumping will be allowed. Bypasspumping operations may be performed by re-directing flow from an upstream manhole, located atPam Road and Cliff Avenue (MH08C0005). This manhole has an overflow pipe that allows flow to gosouth towards a large diameter interceptor sewer (Sioux River South Interceptor Sewer) by blockingthe 18 inch effluent pipe. Redirecting flow in MH08C0005 shall be accomplished by placing acontractor furnished and installed 18 inch pneumatic in the effluent pipe and forcing sewage south. The flow remaining in the pipe, after MH08C0005 is directed south, is not anticipated to exceed 150gpm. The City retains the right to delay work operations due to high flow or other unforeseen events.

After flow has been redirected as described above the bypass pumping plan at the site shouldproceed as follows:

1. Set up bypass pumping from upstream manhole 08B0005, located approximately 460' south ofthe new manhole, and pump to an inserta- tee installed in the existing 24” clay sewer that hasbeen CIPP lined. The inserta-tee is to be installed just downstream of the end of thenew 24” sewer main to be installed. The inserta-tee shall be specifically designed for use withCIPP liners.

2. Complete necessary removals of manholes and sewer pipe, and install new manhole, 24” PVCsewer pipe and 2” force main inside manhole according to the plans.

3. Upon completion of the new sewer and manhole, disconnect bypass pumping and cap theinserta-tee.

4. Remove 18 inch pneumatic from manhole 08C0005 at Pam Road and Cliff Avenue.

Contractor shall sequence his operations to ensure that the bypass operations and completion of thesewer work is done within the time allotted.

LIFT STATION

See Specifications for Duplex Grinder Pump Lift Station.

All costs to furnish and install wiring and final connectionsto the lift station shall be incidental to the contract unitprice per each for "Lift Station". Conduit for the wiring fromthe restroom building shall be incidental to the contract unitprice per each for "Building, Electrical".

MANHOLE MARKER

All costs to furnish and install the manhole marker shall beincidental to the cost of the manhole.

VALVE BOX MARKER

All costs to furnish and install the valve boxmarker shall be incidental to the cost of the valve box.

General Notes 7

TABLE OF EARTHWORK QUANTITIES

Bid Item Quantity Participating NonParticipating

Placing Topsoil 8730 CuYd XPlacing Topsoil (Water & Force Main) 175 CuYd XUnclassified Excavation 1378 CuYd XUnclassified Excavation - Topsoil 8730 CuYd XUnclassified Excavation - Topsoil (Water & Force Main) 175 CuYd XContractor Furnished Borrow Excavation(Access Road, Parking Lot) 12248 CuYd XContractor Furnished Borrow Excavation(Playground, Restroom, Picnic Shelter, Water & Force Main) 11402 CuYd XShrinkage Factor: Contractor Furnished Borrow 25%, Topsoil 50%
